Home

DS800 Development Suite Software

1. ccceeeeesessscneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 Deleting Internal Variable Bindings 0 ce ccccecceeseeeseeteteeeees 80 Fie iti I Bindings orenen ee a O 81 Defining Producer Variable Groups ccccccceeceeeseeseeseeessntnaeeaees 83 Editing Producer Variable Groups cccccceeeeeessessssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 85 Deleting Producer Variable Group ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeesssessnssaeeeees 85 Linking Resources for External Bindings ceeeeessteeeeeeeeeeees 86 Editing External Resource LAnKs 3 7 ascoccne e ierann eae 87 Defining External Variable Bindings cccceccceeeeeesseseteeeeeeees 88 Editing External Variable Bindings ccccccceseesessescceeeeeeeeeeeeees 89 Deleting External Variable Bindings cccccccceseesesssesteeeeeeees 89 Paramo LC IS enesenn aaa aa a E ments 90 NV APTA DIE Group enana ae a e NE 9 Creating Variable Groups icine A E 91 Opening Variable Groups vie ccsceicvcssaeadcaronnsssehidceeasodetavacssehihetdanawssnensesiteas 9 Importing or Exporting Variables canitissmineiii a A 93 POUs Program Organization Units ccccccccccccesesesssscccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 96 ProStar NA 96 dr UNC CLOTS aean r A E N 98 Foncion BLOCKS cmieno a N 99 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Creatine POUS rien seuss ohananeeitacduae een aeasommn anna anesace reese 99 Manipulating POW Sines cers ataes x tus esdwhackuaredesieced mtasacnastunaudenartenemon
2. cccccceccseeesesssssstesseeeeees 229 Coding Conditions for Transitions ccccccessscsseeceeeeceeeeeeeees 231 Moving Action Blocks Up or DOWD cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeenees 232 Deleting an Action BIOCK cccccccsssscscccceececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeas 233 Renuimbering Rants cg iets ae ease none teaeaeaunattasecaaee sess 233 P Te IO feo tafe seas TE E vase ca E AE O 235 PX PPC drae En a A 235 Memi Ba ecese nera A E 236 Workine with Flow Charts sdncinisan a AR 239 Flow Charn E lemenisrgana e 240 ACON e E sass aamenage tate 240 MSU E E TE E E E EE E 240 IFT THEN FESE aia iaateet hed eae a eeeceeenteamens 241 DOW HILE on O 242 WHEE DO siirat a E tanned ance cant 242 ILO a E EAE E EE E EE seu A AE axons 243 COMM ClOM aara a a T 244 TOE SPC CUA ie neat saul Sees onadecten 244 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual COMME 233 ieee ee ea ee ee A E E EES 245 wo ral of 824 51 ae ne ee een eS 245 Manas ines E lemen manisa a S mus ae 246 E Oe ERASTA I E A ENEE E AAE A ENA N 246 GT gee perce E ARIEN ER R EAE AN EN OEA EATS 247 COD eranan A E 247 ASS rucna A A 248 DERO oe E a E ATO 248 INT OVC seas cae E E AE E E E TT 248 COTO E O O 249 ReMOTE E E cede eames 249 E E EEE E A EE EST A E A E E A TON 250 Ea A E a A E E EN E EE 251 arani nA Wie V EEE E A EIEE A E TAA EE 252 Malti lanoiaoe Edito oe aa AEEA A 293 APPI aNG an Ea re rN 254 IVC HU aie Secs case ectecacene eecicacensesetcacusacecccncades uetc
3. LD max value MIN value MAX min value ST new value mid i Arguments IN STRING Any non empty string NbC DINT Number of characters to be extracted cannot be greater than the length of the IN string Pos DINT Position of the sub string the sub string first character will be the one pointed to by Pos first valid position is 1 Q STRING Middle part of the string its length NbC empty string if parameters are not valid Description Extracts a part of a string The number of characters to be extracted and the position of the first character are given 542 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD Program using MID Function ST Equivalence sub string MID abcdefgh 2 4 sub_ string is de IL Equivalence LD abcdefgh MID 2 4 ST sub string min Arguments INI DINT Any signed integer value IN2 DINT cannot be REAL Q DINT Minimum of both input values Description Gives the minimum of two integer values DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 543 Example FBD Program using MIN and MAX Function max value value min value new value ST Equivalence new value MAX MIN max value value min value bounds the value to the min_value max_value set IL Equivalence LD max value MIN value MAX min value ST new value mien IH HE Arguments IN STRING Any string NbC DI
4. 4 Release the mouse button 184 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Docking toolbars e Dock a toolbar to a side of the Workspace by positioning it at the Workspace s edge this toggles between a toolbar s floating and docked states The toolbar shown above appears as follows in its floating state 2 Fa al Fs Jo hi a Fr F8 o Fs H ae E Pq Standard Toolbar Opens a POU Saves the current POU Cuts the selection and places it on the clipboard Copies the selection and places it on the clipboard Pastes the contents of the clipboard Undoes the last operation Redoes the last operation Accesses the document generator Finds and replaces items i S e Oe k De DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 185 Accesses the Dictionary view Sets or removes a breakpoint Removes breakpoints Inserts identifiers Builds the current POU a 7 O O a i Stops a build Switches the application to debug mode Switches an application to simulation mode 8 al La Accesses the cross references browser Options Toolbar Displays the grid Adjusts the zoom E 100 186 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Increases the X to Y Ratio LD Only Cells are displayed wider Decreases the X to Y Ratio LD Only Cells are displayed narrower Debug Toolbar The Debug toolbar is accessible when you run a POU in either debug or simulation mode Starts all stopped resourc
5. where ChildName is the name of the child Note that S1 is preceded by two underscore _ characters For details about ST extensions see page 467 Transitions Transitions are represented by a small horizontal bar that crosses the connection link Each transition is referenced by a name written next to the transition symbol The above information is called the level 1 of the transition Reference Name T102 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 397 Oriented Links Single lines are used to link steps and transitions These are oriented links When the orientation is not explicitly given the link is oriented from the top to the bottom Explicit orientation from Implicit orientation from Transistion GT 11 to Step GS10 Step GS10 to Transition GT10 Jump to a Step Jump symbols may be used to indicate a connection link from a transition to a step without having to draw the connection line The jump symbol must be referenced with the name of the destination step Jump to Step GS10 510 A Jump symbol cannot be used to represent a Link from a Step to a Transition 398 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example The following charts are equivalent DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 399 Divergences and Convergences Divergences are multiple connection links from one SFC symbol step or transition to many other SFC symbols Convergences are multiple connection links from more t
6. 123 1 result real constant t 3ms result time constant boo varl result Boolean Variable ana varl result integer Variable tmr vari result timer Variable boo var2 result NOT Boolean Variable DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 477 ST Operator Operation stores the current result in a variable The current result is not modified by this operation Allowed N modifiers Operand internal or output Variable Example STboo LD false ST boo varl boo varl FALSE STN boo var2 DOO VaTr2 p TRUE STana LD 123 ST ana_varl sata varli z 123 STtmr LD tHi2s ST tmr_varl tmr varl lt C IZS S Operator Operation stores the Boolean value TRUE in a Boolean Variable if the current result has the Boolean value TRUE No operation is processed if current result is FALSE The current result is not modified by this operation Allowed none modifiers Operand output or internal Boolean Variable 478 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example SETex LD true current result TRUE S boo varl boo varli TRUE current result is not modified LD false current result FALSE S boo varl nothing done boo vari unchanged R Operator Operation stores the Boolean value FALSE in a Boolean Variable if the current result has the Boolean value TRUE No operation is processed if current result is FALSE The c
7. 254 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To manage the guidelines You access the Areas layout options window from the menu or by right clicking an area titlebar 1 To show or hide the guideline areas from the Tools menu choose Show Hide Areas then in the areas layout window check the areas to display 2 To resize an area drag the boundary on the left or right side of the heading until the area is the width you want 3 To return the area guidelines to their initial widths click Restore Default Area Sizes DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 255 Menu Bar The options available differ depending on the POU s programming language Some options are available as keyboard commands File Open Close Save Build Program Stop Build Program Dictionary Description Print Exit Edit Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Special Paste Delete Select All Find Replace in POUs Find Matching Name 256 Ctrl O Altt F4 Ctrl S Alt F3 Ctrl D Ctrl K Ctrl P Ctri Q Ctrl Z Ctrl Y Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V DEL Ctrl A Ctrl F Alt F2 opens an existing POU closes the POU saves the current POU builds the code for the current POU stops to build in progress for the current POU opens the dictionary filtered for the current POU accesses the program description prints the current POU leaves the language editor cancels the last action restores the last cancelled action removes the selec
8. 558 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IL Equivalence First done is call to LEFT LD 12345678 LEFT 4 ST sub string intermediate result LD 12345678 RIGHT 4 ADD sub string ST complete string ral IH Wh F P Arguments IN DINT Any integer value NbR DINT Number of bit rotations in set 1 31 Q DINT Left rotated value no effect if NbR lt 0 Description Make the bits of an integer rotate to the left Rotation is made on 32 bits DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 559 Example FBD Program using ROL Function ST Equivalence result ROL register 1 register 2 0100 1101 0011 O101 result 2 1001 1010 0110 1010 IL Equivalence LD register ROL 1 ST result ROR ror Arguments IN DINT Any integer value NbR DINT Number of bit rotations in set 1 31 Q DINT Right rotated value no effect if NbR lt 0 Description Make the bits of an integer rotate to the right Rotation is made on 32 bits 560 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD Program using ROR Function register ST Equivalence result ROR register 1 register 2 0100 1101 0011 0101 result 2 1010 0110 1001 1010 IL Equivalence LD register ROR 1 ST result DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 561 Arguments SEL BOOL Indicates the chosen value IN1 IN2
9. ST Equivalence tangent TAN result ATAN IL Equivalence LD angle TAN ST tangent ATAN ST result CHAR char aE P Arguments Code DINT Q STRING 528 angle tangent result is equal to angle Code in set 0 255 One character string the character has the ASCII code given in input Code ASCII code is used modulo 256 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Description Gives a one character string from a given ASCII code Example FBD Program using CHAR Function ST Equivalence Display CHAR value 48 value is in set 0 9 48 is the ascii code of 0 result is one character string from 0 to 9 IL Equivalence LD value ADD 48 CHAR ST Display DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 529 Arguments IN REAL Any REAL value Q REAL Cosine of the input value in set 1 0 1 0 Description Calculates the cosine of a real value Example FBD Program using COS and ACOS Functions angle cosine result ST Equivalence Cosine COS tangle result ACOS cosine result is equal to angle IL Equivalence LD angle COS ST cosine ACOS ST result 530 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual CURRENT_ISA_DATE CURRENT _ISA_DATE DATE Arguments DATE DATE The current date Description Gets the current date The ANY TO DI
10. The number of samples N cannot exceed 128 If the RUN command is FALSE reset mode the output value is equal to the input value When the maximum N of stored values is reached the first stored value is erased by the last one Example FBD Program using AVERAGE Block auto mode store cmd ST Equivalence AVERAGE instance of AVERAGE block AVERAGE auto mode amp store cmd sensor value 100 ave value AVERAGE1 XOUT 576 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Arguments RUN BOOL Mode TRUE blinking FALSE reset the output to false CYCLE TIME Blinking period Possible values range from Oms to 23h59m59s999ms Q BOOL Output blinking signal Description Generates a blinking signal Timing diagram Timing diagram RUH DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 577 Arguments VALI DINT Any signed integer value VAL2 DINT Any signed integer value ET BOOL TRUE if vall is Less Than val2 EQ BOOL TRUE if vall is Equal to val2 GT BOOL TRUE if vall is Greater Than val2 Description Compare two values tell if they are equal or if the first is less or greater than the second one Example FBD Program using CMP Block Jewel Jumo cma O mas level iE ld manual mode ST Equivalence We suppose CMP1 is an instance of CMP block CMP1 level max level pump cmd CMP1 LT OR CMP1 EQ alarm CMP1 GT AND NOT manual_ mode 578 DS8
11. To stop a build gt From the Project menu choose Stop Build Or gt On the Standard toolbar click 6 You can also abort build operations by pressing the lt ESCAPE gt key Cleaning Projects The Clean Project or Clean Resource commands on the Project menu of the Workbench simulate a modification of all the project s or resource s programs so that they are all verified during the next Build Project or Build Resource operation Note After cleaning a project you cannot perform online changes Cleaning projects or resources actually deletes all files generated during the last Build command Therefore to retain the ability to perform online changes you can rebuild a project rather than cleaning then building it 348 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Compiler Options Compiler options are defined for each resource These options enable setting up the parameters used by the Code Generator to build and optimize the target code In the Compilation Options of a resource you select the type of code to generate according to corresponding targets and set up the optimizer parameters according to the expected compilation and run time requirements For details on resource compilation options see page 55 The general compiler options are the following Compiler options i q x General Link 7 Check Array index I Enable intemal state information tor functiona Generate Diagnostic files fom P
12. 1 From the File menu choose Print or click on the Standard toolbar The Document Generator is displayed 2 On the Table tab select the project items to print 3 On the Options tab set the desired printing options for the project documentation 4 On the Preview tab review the appearance of the documentation print job 5 Click Print Building and formatting a project s documentation may take a few minutes Before running other commands in the Workbench you should wait until the printing task is completed Building the whole documentation may require a large space on the hard disk If the disk is full an error message is displayed then you need to either free up disk space by removing files or reduce the size of the print task DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 337 Table of Items The table of items displays all items available for printing for a project The items preselected for printing differ depending on the location from which printing is initiated For example when you initiate printing from the link architecture view where the Main resource is selected all items defined for this resource appear selected in the Document Generator When you initiate printing from a program only the items defined for the program appear selected in the Document Generator You can always choose to select other items for printing You expand or collapse a branch of the tree by clicking the H H symbol before an item Clicking here c
13. Communications 1 gain OPE Assignment of one variable in Comparators OPE Test if one value ig LESS TH Counter lt OFE Test if one value ig LESS TH Data conversion lt gt OFE Test if one value is NOT EQ Data Manipulation OPE Test if one value is EQUAL T Process Control s gt OPE Test if one value is GREATE Inputs 2 Instance z Cancel e The block identifier field top left indicates the selected operator function or function block When an instance is selected the instance name is displayed e The Blocks list enables you to display all or various types of operators functions and function blocks e Inputs are only available for operators such as and AND to define the number of input connections for the block Inputs 2 e For FBD 61131 programs the Instance field is only available when the currently selected Block is a declared instance The Instance field enables you to select the Instance name to DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 203 insert into the POU When the field is left blank an automatic instance is created for the function block Instance The Help button displays the description of the Block or Function or the associated help if it exists C Function or Function Block The Parameters tab is significant only for some C Functions and Function Blocks It shows the Parameters that are not shown when inserting the block in the program editor
14. FBD Program using CTD Block result ST Equivalence We suppose F_TRIGI is an instance of F TRIG block and CTD1 is an instance of CTD block F TRIG1 command CTDLAF TRIG 2 0 load cmd 100 underflow CID1L Q7 result CTD1 CV CTU CTU u ALE ET P Pur Cc Arguments CU BOOL Counting input counting when CU is TRUE RESET BOOL Reset command dominant PV DINT Programmed maximum value Q BOOL Overflow TRUE when CV gt PV CV DINT Counter result Warning The CTU Block does not detect the rising or falling edge of the counting input CU It must be associated with an R_ TRIG or F_ TRIG block to create a pulse counter 582 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Description Count integer from 0 up to a given value by 1 Example FBD Program using CTU Block auto mode a E result ST Equivalence We suppose R_TRIGI is an instance of R TRIG block and CTU1 is an instance of CTU block R TRIG1 command CTUL R TRIGI O NOT laure mode 100 4 overflow CTU1 Q result CTU1 CV Arguments CU BOOL Up counting when CU is TRUE CD BOOL Down counting when CD is TRUE RESET BOOL Reset command dominant CV 0 when RESET is TRUE LOAD BOOL Load command CV PV when LOAD is TRUE DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 583 PV DINT Programmed maximum value QU BOOL Overflow TRUE when CV gt PV QD BOOL
15. FBD example with Convert to Double Integer Operators mre y o e UA true IN o bres pr seege a A O t 1s46ms IN o tres 7198 IN o mres ST Equivalence bres ANY TO DINT true Dres is 1 tres ANY TO DINT t 1s46ms Eres is 046 mres 4s ANY TO DINT 0198 mres is 198 IL equivalence LD true ANY TO DINT ST bres LD tH 1s46ms ANY TO DINT ST tres LD 0198 ANY TO DINT ST mres 500 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ANY_TO_REAL ANY TO REAL IH P Arguments IN BOOL SINT DINT TIME STRING any value other than a real Q REAL 0 0 if IN is FALSE 1 0 if IN is TRUE number of milliseconds for a timer equivalent number for integer Description Converts any variable to a real variable Example FBD example with Convert to Real Operators ST Equivalence bres ANY TO REAL true pres 26 I0 tres ANY TO REAL t 1s46ms Eres 1s 1046 0 ares ANY TO REAL 198 ares 28 19910 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 501 IL equivalence LD ANY TO REAL ST LD ANY TO REAL ST LD ANY TO REAL ST true bres t 1s46ms tres 198 ares ANY_TO_TIME ANY TO TIME IH r Arguments IN BOOL SINT DINT REAL any positive value other than a time and date format STRING Q TIME Description IN or integer part of IN if it is real is the numb
16. Inthe LD or FBD diagram locate the block then double click it To debug automatic instances of function blocks You can only debug automatic instances of function blocks from the LD and FBD diagrams gt Open the LD or FBD diagram where the instance is inserted then double click it DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 335 Clean Stored Code If you have downloaded a resource with the Save option checked in the Download dialog box the resource s code is stored on the target system Then if the target RAS device system restarts it will load this code and start a virtual machine to run this code Note If you want to clean i e remove this code from the target and avoid restarting on it from the Debug menu choose Clean Stored Code 336 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Document Generator You can build and print the complete or partial documentation for the current project from within the Document Generator You can access the Document Generator from the hardware architecture view link architecture view dictionary view or any of the language editors The Document Generator window has three tabs e Table showing a table or tree representing all items that can be printed for the current project e Options showing a list of printing options e Preview displaying a preview of the project to print To print the documentation for a project You can choose to print from any tab of the Document Generator
17. Refers to point type that contains the parameter to be read Instance of specified point type Parameter to get Specified point type Specified instance of point type Specified parameter Reads the TLP from a specified TLP DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 605 TLP_SET_DINT Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments point type t DINT _ Refers to point type that contains the parameter to be set logical 1 DINT Instance of specified point type parameter p DINT Parameter to set vin DINT New value for specified parameter Description Sets parameter referenced by a TLP Any numerical data type can be set with this function Vin is converted to the data type of specified TLP before parameter is set 606 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual TLP_SET_REAL Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments point type t DINT Refers to point type that contains the parameter to be set logical 1 DINT Instance of specified point type parameter p DINT Parameter to set vin REAL New value for specified parameter Description Sets parameter referenced by a TLP Any numerical data type can be set with this function Vin is converted to the data type of specified TLP before parameter is set DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 607 TLP_SET_SINT TLP_SET_SINT Warning This function block is available
18. The Build Symbol Table dialog box appears x Reduced Table i Complete Table Cancel 2 Choose the type of symbol table to download Embed Zip Source You can embed on the target an exchange file PXF holding all data from Workbench elements This exchange file is the same as the file created when exporting an element 58 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Run time Settings The run time settings include the cyclic and behavior definitions of a resource when the resource 1s executed For information about execution rules see page 376 You specify a resource s run time settings on the Settings tab of the Resources Properties window Resource Properties Wf X Network Extended Security General Target Code Settings IM Trigger cycles Cycle Timing me 100 Detect errors Nb of stored errors fie Cycle to cycle Real time Memory for Retain Advanced Cancel Apply e Trigger cycles enables you to specify the cycle timing 1 e the amount of time given to each cycle If a cycle is completed within the cycle time the system waits until the cycle time has elapsed before starting a new cycle The cycle consists of scanning the physical inputs of the process to drive executing the POUs of the Workbench resource then updating physical outputs The virtual machine executes the resource code according to the execution rules For details about the execution rules see page 37
19. YES End if Warning When the same identifier is defined twice with different ST equivalencies the last defined expression is used For example Define OPEN is FALSE OPEN is TRUE means OPEN is TRUE Naming defined words must conform to following rules e name cannot exceed 128 characters e first character must be a letter e following characters can be letters digits or underscore _ character Warning A defined word can not use a defined word in its definition for example you can not have PI is 3 14159 PP s PP2 write the complete equivalence using constants or variables and operations PI2 is 6 28318 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 393 SFC Language Sequential Function Chart SFC is a graphic language used to describe sequential operations The process is represented as a set of well defined Steps linked by Transitions A Boolean Condition is attached to each Transition A set of Actions are attached to each Step For programs Conditions and Actions are detailed using three other languages ST IL or LD For function blocks Conditions and Actions are detailed using only two other languages ST or LD From Conditions and Actions any Function or Function Block in any language can be called SFC Main Format An SFC Program is a graphic set of Steps and Transitions linked together by oriented Links Multiple connection Links are used to represent divergences and convergences The b
20. sets the display of the name alias or name and alias for coils and contacts accesses the compilation options for the POU assigns a variable name or block when inserting elements 258 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Options Continued Window Help Manual Input Numerical Display Show I O Variable Comments Hide I O variable Comments Show Internal Variable Comments Hide Internal Variable Comments Cascade Tile Show Spy List Show Output Window Ctrl 4 Clear Output Window Show Call Stack Contents Fl Search Help On About Support Info DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench assigns a variable name or block at any time sets the numerical display of values in the FBD editor displays comments for I O variables entered in the dictionary in the FBD editor hides comments for I O variables displays comments for I O variables entered in the dictionary hides comments for I O variables sets the different views of the project to appear in a cascading manner sets the different views of the project to appear in a tiled manner accesses the Spy List window where you specify variables whose values are displayed while in test mode displays the output window below the workspace clears the contents of the output window displays the call stack window accesses the online help not currently supported displays product and version information not currently suppor
21. Divergence Double Integer DINT Driver Edge ETCP Events Logger 620 Operation of an IL Program executed when the instruction occurs later in the Program The state where a project uses 1 e depends on functions or function blocks defined in a library See I O device The view displaying the variables function and function block parameters types and defined words used in the programs of a Project The size number of elements of an array For example 1 3 1 10 represents a two dimensional array containing a total of 30 elements Variables and devices have a direction For the property of a variable direction indicates whether a variable is an input output or internal The direction of a device can be input or output A variable is generally declared before its use in one POU Inputs and outputs can be used without any declaration respecting a defined syntax It corresponds to direct represented variables Example QX1 6 ID8 2 Multiple connection link from a single SFC symbol steps or transitions to multiple SFC symbols Divergences can be single or double A single divergence OR is a multiple link from one step to many transitions A double divergence AND is a multiple link from one transition to many steps Signed double integer 32 bit format Basic type that can be used to define a variable a Parameter POU or a Device See IO driver Network Driver See Falling Edge Rising Ed
22. Example FBD Program using EXPT Function ST Equivalence tb size ANY TO DINT EXPT 2 0 range J IL Equivalence LD EXPT ANY TO DINT ST FIND find ni Pal Poe Arguments In STRING Pat STRING Pos DINT 534 range tb size Any string Any non empty string Pattern 0 if sub string Pat not found position of the first character of the first occurrence of the sub string Pat first position is 1 this function is case sensitive DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Description Finds a sub string in a string Gives the position in the string of the sub string Example FBD Program using FIND Function ABCD EFGH a complete string ST Equivalence Complete string ABCD EFGH complete string 1s ABCDEFGH found FIND complete string CDEF found is 3 IL Equivalence LD ABCD ADD EFGH ST complete_string FIND CDEF ST found DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 535 INSERT insert Arguments IN STRING Initial string Str STRING String to be inserted Pos DINT Position of the insertion the insertion is done before the position first valid position is 1 Q STRING Modified string empty string if Pos lt 0 concatenation of both strings if Pos is greater than the length of the IN string Description Inserts a sub string in a string at a given position
23. Projects can be developed using any of the five languages of the IEC 61131 standard SFC Sequential Function Chart or Grafcet FBD Function Block Diagram LD Ladder Diagram ST Structured Text and IL Instruction List You can also use the Flow Chart language When building resources are compiled to produce very fast target independent code TIC or C code Within resources you can declare variables using standard IEC 61131 data types 1 e Boolean integer real etc or user defined types such as arrays or structures For defined variables you can set up alarms events and trending Furthermore field communications allow you to connect variables to field equipment Resources can share variables using internal bindings or external bindings Internal bindings are between resources within the same project External bindings are between resources belonging to different projects DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 1 You develop projects on a Windows development platform in the Workbench and language editors The Workbench graphically represents and organizes configurations resources POUs and networks within a project from multiple views e link architecture e hardware architecture e dictionary e I O wiring e bindings Libraries made up of configurations and resources enable you to define functions and function blocks for reuse throughout projects Individual resources from the configurations making up a project
24. Underflow TRUE when CV lt 0 CV DINT Counter result Warning The CTUD Block does not detect the rising or falling edge of the counting inputs CU and CD It must be associated with an R_ TRIG or F_ TRIG Block to create a pulse counter Description Count integer from 0 up to a given value 1 by 1 or from a given value down to 0 1 by 1 Example FBD Program using CTUD Block ST Equivalence We suppose R TRIG1 and R_TRIG2 are two instances of R TRIG Block and CTUD1 is an instance of CTUD block R_TRIG1 add elt R_TRIG2 sub elt CTUD1 R_TRIG1 Q R_TRIG2 Q reset cmd load _ cmd 100 ful L 2S CRUD 1 00 empty CTUD1 QD nb elt z CIUDLCYy 584 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual DBG_CLR_GET_ERR DG CLR_GET_ERR Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments This function has no arguments Description This function clears the errors that were encountered with any of the TLP_ GET xxx functions DBG_CLR_SET_ERR DBG_CLR_SET_ERR Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments This function has no arguments Description This function clears the errors that were encountered with any of the TLP SET xxx functions DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 585 DBG_GET_ERR DBG_GET_ERR Stat Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments stat
25. User Manual Function Blocks Any program or function block can call a function block A function cannot call a function block Function blocks are also known as POUs Function blocks are written in SFC ST LD or FBD SFC function blocks can have SFC child function blocks The order in which function blocks appear within their section is not important function blocks are called from a POU When using SFC function blocks and SFC child blocks you need to specify the maximum number of tokens for each one in their individual properties You can move or copy all function blocks to the Programs section and all but the SFC function block to the Functions section You can also move or copy functions and programs written with languages supported by function blocks to the Functions section When moving or copying a program to the Function Blocks section all local variables defined in the program are converted to function block parameters Creating POUsS You create 1 e add POUs programs functions and function blocks in resources while in the link architecture view You add POUs using the main menu or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking the respective component Program Function or Function Block within a resource After having created a POU you can drag and drop it to a new position in its section to another section or to another resource POUs belonging to a same section must have different names POU names must begin with a
26. stops the selected resource while in run mode restarts the selected resource using the code saved on the target node saves the code of the running resource including changes removes code previously saved on a target accesses the Diagnosis window displaying general and status information for the selected resource updates the resource status information appearing in the title bar for all resources 10 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Debug Real Time Cycle to Cycle cont Execute one cycle Alt F10 Change Cycle timing Step AIt F8 Step Into Alt F9 Show Current Step Options Layout Customize Ctrl U Hide Links DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench switches between real time and cycle to cycle mode for the selected resource executes one cycle at a time while in cycle to cycle mode accesses the Cycle Time editor where you set the cycle time for the selected resource executes the current line then steps to the next line executes the current line then steps into the next line shows the current step accesses the Layout editor where you specify which toolbars to display and the magnification of the workspace area accesses the customization properties for Workbench views and editors enables hiding or showing of the different types of binding links between resources This option is only available in the link architecture view 11 Window Help Cascade Tile Show Sp
27. A Splitter is available to change the proportion of the width of the Tree and grid windows Title bar ee D5800 FermDemo 1 0 Wiring 1 Resourcei Resource Number Diy 2 jol x Menu bar GH File Edit Options window Help a x Toolbars Bee ad J le gt mi 22 Workspace i mg Dr Sim SimlnBoo i iad ZIKO D varb Unwired variables Type BOOL Direction Comment Dect B Conversion None Si amp 3080 1 varb2 mm Direct i B Conversion None 4 amp aki 2 varbs om Direct B Conversion None pi Output window 156 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual I O Wiring Tree View E ow Simple Device Packagename DriverName Device Name comment of the I O device Parameters Only displayed if the I O device E y display has defined parameters BoardRef BoardAddress E Wired Channel Direct Alternatively Reverse for Boolean values T Conversion E ow Simple Device E Free Channel ts Gain for numeric values ts Offset for numeric values a Conversion B Complex Device When a device has been added you can use Direct Variable Representation IX1 1 to access IO values This syntax is shown in the Tree You can also wire variables that you have already declared in the Dictionary to the device channels and use these Variable names in your programs to access channel values The diagram above shows examples of certain simple devices in the I O
28. Cancel Enter the From and To numbers to use for the automatic generation of names Click OK The newly created rows are inserted below the selected row DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 139 Renumbering Addresses Renumbering addresses automatically generates contiguous addresses within a selected range of the grid Renumbering is only available in the variables grid When renumbering certain cells such as a function block instances are ignored since they have no address The reduced symbol table contains the set of variables with addresses To renumber addresses 1 Select the rows to renumber their address 2 From the Tools menu choose Renumber Addresses x From address Cancel 3 Inthe Renumber Addresses dialog enter the From Address hexadecimal value ranging from 1 to FFFF 4 Click OK Example e If Al is entered as a Start Address Al A2 A3 A4 are generated e If AA is entered as a Start Address AA AB AC AD are generated 140 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Printing a Grid You can choose to print the current grid This command launches the Document Generator with the standard list of elements to be printed for a grid For information on the Document Generator see page 337 To print the current grid e From the File menu choose Print DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 141 Variables Grid The variables grid allows the definition of variables for each resou
29. Description Limits an integer value into a given interval Whether it keeps its value if it is between minimum and maximum or it is changed to maximum if it is above or it is changed to minimum if it is below Example FBD Program using LIMIT Function ST Equivalence new value LIMIT min_value value max_value bounds the value to the min_value max_value set DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 539 IL Equivalence LD min value LIMIT value max value ST new value LOG Arguments IN REAL Must be greater than zero Q REAL Logarithm base 10 of the input value Description Calculates the logarithm base 10 of a real value Example FBD Program using LOG Function ST Equivalence xpos ABS xval xlog LOG xpos 540 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IL Equivalence LD xval ABS or xpos LOG ST xlog m IH 1 IHZ P Arguments INI DINT Any signed integer value IN2 DINT cannot be REAL Q DINT Maximum of both input values Description Gives the maximum of two integer values Example FBD Program using MIN and MAX Function mas value valle min value new value DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 541 ST Equivalence new value MAX MIN max value value min value bounds the value to the min_value max_value set IL Equivalence
30. From the Window menu choose Show Spy List Adding Variables to the Spy List You can add variables to the spy list from the Spy List window from the dictionary view and from ST LD FBD or IL programs To add a variable from the Spy List window 1 Within the Spy List window in the Name column double click 2 From the list of available resources select the resource holding the variable to spy on 3 Using the keyboard arrows or the mouse move to the Name cell then press Enter The list of variables available for the resource appears you may need to resize the Name column to display complete names 4 Using the keyboard arrows move within the list of variables to the desired variable then press Enter To add a variable from the dictionary view gt In the dictionary view select then drag a variable from the dictionary grid to the Spy List window 316 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To add a variable from ST LD FBD or IL programs In the language editors you can add variables to the spy list using the menus toolbars or contextual menus 1 2 Start the project in Debug mode Double click the program The editor is lauched displaying the program in read only mode Select a variable to spy on From the editor s toolbar click Selecting Variables in the Spy List You can select one or more variables in the spy list To select variables in the spy list 1 2 To select a si
31. Furthermore a function does not store the local value of its local variables A function is not instantiated therefore cannot call function blocks The interface of a function must be explicitly defined with a type and a unique name for each of its calling or Input Parameter or return parameter or Output Parameter In order to support the ST language convention the return parameter must have the same name as the function There is only one output parameter The following information shows how to set the value of the return parameter in the body of a function in the various languages ST IL FBD LD 372 assign the return parameter using its name the same name as the function FunctionName lt expression gt the value of the current result IL register at the end of the sequence is stored in the return parameter LD 10 ADD 20 return parameter value 30 set the return parameter using its name FunctionName use a coil symbol with the name of the return parameter FunctionName Hmm DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Function Blocks Function blocks can use the SFC ST LD or FBD languages Function blocks are instantiated meaning local variables of a function block are copied for each Instance When calling a function block in a program you actually call the Instance of the block the same code is called but the data used are the one which have been allocated for the Instance Valu
32. On the Debug toolbar click DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 297 Resource Execution Mode You can execute a resource in one of three possible execution modes e Real time e Cycle to cycle e Step by step When defining a resource s Settings properties you can set it to automatically start in real time or cycle to cycle execution mode prior to code generation By default resources start in real time mode Real time Mode Real time mode is the run time normal execution mode where target cycles are triggered by the programmed cycle timing While in real time mode you can switch the resource to cycle to cycle mode When debug information is generated for POUs in a resource the resource automatically switches to step by step mode when the application encounters a breakpoint A resource where real time mode is activated is in the RUN state To activate real time mode gt On the Debug toolbar click 298 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Cycle to cycle Mode In cycle to cycle mode the virtual machine loads the resource code but does not execute it until you execute one cycle or activate real time mode When debug information is generated for POUs in a resource the resource automatically switches to step by step mode when the application encounters a breakpoint You can also switch to step by step mode by stepping A resource where cycle to cycle mode is activated can be in one of three states STOP B
33. Save code on target This command saves the code of the running resource including changes To update your change later use the command Debug On line change Update If you did not update the change after download above option e Using the Debugger connect the RAS device target and perform any operation which can make the resource update faster or more safely then run the Debug On line change update command A message is displayed in the Output window to indicate the success of the switch If unsuccessful the existing running application remains as is DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 333 Debug Function Block Instances You can visually debug instances of function blocks Function blocks can be written in SFC ST FBD 61131 FBD 61499 or LD language Visual debugging consists of animating the source code of the function block body with the data of a specified instance of the block Below is an example of a very simple function block programmed in FBD The LIB FB1 function block has the in input and the out output and a constant having a value of 1 L 4 You can distinguish two types of instances of function blocks e Declared instances declared in the variable dictionary These instances are considered as variables e Automatic instances created in LD or FBD diagrams The compiler automatically assigns a unique identifier to each automatic instance This identifier consists of the _ INST prefix and a sequ
34. TRUE integrate FALSE hold RI BOOL Overriding reset XIN REAL Input any real value X0 REAL Initial value CYCLE TIME Sampling period Possible values range from Oms to 23h59m59s999ms Q BOOL NotRI XOUT REAL Integrated output 590 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Description Integration of a real value If the CYCLE parameter value is less than the cycle timing of the execution of the resource in the target the sampling period is forced to this cycle timing Example FBD Program using INTEGRAL Block sensor value tl Urns controlled value ST Equivalence INTEGRAL I instance of INTEGRAL block INTEGRAL1 manual mode NOT manual_ mode sensor value init value t 100ms controlled value INTEGRAL1 XOUT Arguments CLK BOOL Any Boolean Variable Q BOOL TRUE when CLK rises from FALSE to TRUE FALSE in all other cases Description Detects a Rising Edge of a Boolean Variable DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 591 Example FBD Program using R_TRIG Block __nb_edge h ST Equivalence We suppose R_TRIGI is an instance of R_TRIG Block R_TRIG1 cmd nb edge ANY TO DINT R_TRIG1 Q nb edge REQUEST_LICENSE Request License Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments name STRING Name of application to request license for vid DINT Vendor ID 592 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Ma
35. These elements can be moved but not deleted Level 2 programming of each action and test using ST LD or IL syntax is also performed within the Flow Chart editor To save the current flow chart e From the File menu choose Save CTRL S or click H on the Standard toolbar From the editor you can e Build the current program code to check your program and prepare the code for building the resource code e Print your program e Launch the Dictionary To include a description documenting your program e From the File menu choose Description DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 239 Flow Chart Elements Most common operations are performed with the mouse insertion selection and drag and drop of elements Moving an element also moves all the elements directly linked below Elements are individually re sizable Action Fe Insert FC action creates a new action each time the mouse button is pressed Actions are automatically linked by the Flow Chart editor An action number is automatically generated sequentially for each new action For details about FC actions see page 420 Begin O71 Action End Test Fa ga Insert a test to branch between sections of the program that are executed conditionally Double clicking the Yes or No text swaps their position For details about FC conditions see page 420 O1 Action 240 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IF THEN ELSE F
36. Workbench 345 If the hardware architecture view is not changed building resource code is enough to update one Virtual Machine To rebuild a project ga e From the Project menu choose Rebuild Projector click 5 on the Standard toolbar Build a POU While editing a POU the Build program command allows you to verify programming syntax errors for the current program Error messages are displayed in the Output window Double clicking on the error message places the caret on the error or for graphic programs selects the erroneous graphic element x OkStarti TRUE OkStop FALSE 1 error s 0 warnings The Build program command verifies the current program even if it has not been modified since its last verification While performing builds the security state of unlocked POUs and POUs having no access control switches to read only mode Locked POUs remain locked 346 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Building Resources Projects The Build Resource or Build Project command displays the number of the error detected in all POUs in the Output window Double clicking on the number of errors of a POU opens the corresponding editor for corrections to be made Checking database Build resource gt MAIN Configuration CONFIG Compiling for HT TARGET COMPLESTEST ADDITION MAIN UNTITLEDSFC 1 error s 0 warmingl MAIN 1 errorfs 0 warning s The
37. are downloaded using the ETCP or ISARSI serial link network onto target RAS device nodes running real time Operating systems Communication between configurations can be implemented using the TCP IP network You can choose to implement any other network You can choose to simulate the running of a project after building a project using high level debugging tools before actually downloading the resources making up configurations to the target nodes You can set four levels of access control in a Workbench application e password protection and read only mode for a complete project e password protection and read only mode for individual resources e password protection for individual POUs e password protection for a target 2 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Appearance Title bar DS800 Projecti demo project Link architecture Menu bar File Edit Insert Project Tools Debug Options Window Help Tool bars Workspace H A Parameters A Variable Groups ams HE 2 Test get info from R1 oH H A Parameters Main simple loop call to ComplexTes JL Addition simple addition J gt LDProgl FBDProg D pausi P Multiplication inputs comes from A1 iiO ComplesTest R Functions ON Pacem bs ee bebe bso A Function blocks Output window Status bar Admin Administrator Resource 1 Config1 Main send info to R2 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 3 Title Bar For h
38. check Match Case 3 To find the next occurence of the item click Find Next DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 207 4 To replace found items in the Replace field enter the text to replace then do one of the following To replace the found occurence click Replace To replace all occurences of an item click Replace All 208 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SFC Editor tn The SFC Sequential Function Chart Editor is launched automatically when an SFC program is opened from the Workbench The SFC language is used to describe operations of a sequential process It uses a simple graphic representation for the different steps of a process and conditions that enable the change of active steps An SFC Program is entered by using the graphical SFC editor SFC is the core of the IEC 61131 3 standard The other languages except Flow Chart usually describe the actions within the steps and the logical conditions for the transitions The SFC editor allows the user to enter complete SFC programs It combines graphic and text editing capabilities thus allowing the entry of both the SFC chart and the corresponding actions and conditions The SFC editor is automatically opened when an SFC program is edited Note Before creating new programs you need to close the Dictionary To subsequently open another program from the SFC Editor nil e From the File Menu choose Open CTRL 0 or click on the Standard toolbar DS
39. gt Select the graphic symbol then on the Standard toolbar click or select the graphic symbol then double click it To assign variable names or block types when placing an element gt Inthe Options menu choose Auto Input To assign variable names or block types at any time gt Inthe Options menu choose Manual Input DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 265 Variable Bee Accesses the variable selector enabling the insertion of a variable or constant into the workspace To connect a new symbol to an existing one another variable a block input or a block output keep the mouse button depressed the cursor becomes a ghost symbol and drag the element until its connecting line on the left or right overlaps an existing connecting point When the mouse is released the new symbol is automatically created and linked Drag to place the element Release the mouse button The new variable is automatically connected For input and output variables you can choose to display comments entered in the dictionary directly below the variable by choosing Show I O Variable Comments from the Options menu You hide comments by choosing Hide I O Variable Comments When moving the cursor over a Selected variable its data type and hidden comment is displayed as a tooltip Cornment al3 DIMT Comment For wala When entering variable blocks you can choose to have the Workbench automatically prompt you to enter a constant or
40. or events using either a comma separated CSV file in a text editor or a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet To include comments in your data surround them with quotation marks When using a text editor you must separate each piece of information from the others with a comma each line must end with a carriage return the resulting file can have either the csv or xls extension When using a spreadsheet enter each piece of information in a separate cell leave empty cells if an item is to be omitted save the file under the CSV or XLS format These requirements are automatically followed by the export facility you must respect them if you build a file to be imported For variables data i e alarms or events and trends imported data must include the configuration resource and variable names to which it belongs default values will appear for all other values that remain empty You need to define variables before proceeding to defining alarms events and trends Note The XLS file format is only available when Microsoft Excel is installed on your computer An example of an Excel file holding variables data 1s X Microsoft Excel export csy OF x Hull File Edit wiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Help la x OSE 46RY N EEA SS a E OB 10 B Be Prompt ara 10 B Z Ul Bile 18 8 oe Oe Ae Prom J K A i Name Data Type Alias stringsize InitValue Dimensi
41. resources and POUs by saving them to a version source control database Saving these elements to a control database enables you to retrieve older versions of the elements at a later time I O Device which is not physically connected to an I O device of the Target machine See Real Device IsaVM exe The instantiation of a resource on a Target DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Glossary 631 Wiring The property of a variable indicating the I O channel to which the variable is wired Zip Source An exchange file PXF holding all data from Workbench elements From the compilation options for a resource you can choose to embed a zip source file for resources configurations or projects onto the target This source file can be uploaded from the target at a later time 632 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Symbols operator for IL 482 operator 488 operator 489 operator 491 operator 492 lt operator 511 lt operator 510 lt gt operator 515 operator 505 gt operator 508 gt operator 507 SYSVA KVBCERR consumption error variables 68 SYSVA _KVBPERR production error variables 68 Numerics 1 gain operator 494 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index A ABS function 522 access control for configurations 118 for POUs 104 for projects 41 for resources 64 accessing configuration properties 114 contextual menus 25 diagnostic information 307 events viewer run time system events
42. resources having The copy command is available from the main menu the Ctrl C keyboard command the main toolbar or a contextual menu Note Before copying click in a blank area inside the resource window to deselect individual programs or groups To copy a resource from the link architecture view You can access the contextual menu by right clicking the title bar of the resource 1 Click on the title bar of the resource 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 51 To copy a resource from the hardware architecture view You can access the contextual menu by right clicking the resource in the configuration window 1 Select the resource 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy Pasting Resources You can paste a resource into the workspace of the link architecture view or into a configuration in the hardware architecture view When pasting resources password definitions are also pasted whereas step by step debug information is not pasted The paste resources using the main menu the Ctrl V keyboard command the main toolbar or a contextual menu To paste a resource in the link architecture view You can access the contextual menu by right clicking the title bar of the resource 1 Click on an empty area of the link architecture view 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste Resource To paste a resource in the hardware architecture view You can access the contextual menu by right clicking the r
43. 113 Configuration Properties Configuration properties are defined from the hardware architecture view To access the Configuration Properties window 1 From the Window menu choose project_name Hardware Architecture The hardware architecture view appears displaying all configurations defined for a project 2 Select a configuration 3 From the Edit menu choose Properties The Configuration Properties window appears 114 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Configuration Link to ROCLINK Configuration File The configuration general properties enable you to assign a meaningful name to a configuration and link the configuration to a ROCLINK 800 configuration file You need to link a configuration to a ROCLINK 800 configuration file before defining TLP variables in the dictonary When the configuration is linked to a configuration file the name and location of the configuration file is automatically entered in the Comment field Comments appear within next to the name of the configuration in its title bar Note The ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software must be installed on the same computer running the DS800 Workbench You can choose to replace the configuration representation in the hardware architecture view with a custom bitmap by checking the Use bitmap option then browsing to locate the bitmap Standard Configuration Representation Sample Bitmap Representation M Config C Main send info to R2 2 Tes
44. 176 history details previous versions of Workbench elements 366 internal binding list the 71 resource properties 54 the cross references browser 355 the Dictionary view 125 the external binding list 81 ACOS function 523 action blocks adding in SFC charts 229 attaching to SFC steps 229 calling functions and function blocks from 409 633 deleting in SFC charts 233 moving in execution order 232 actions Flow Chart described 420 inserting 240 actions within steps boolean 404 described 404 list of instructions for 408 non stored 406 pulse 405 SFC 407 adding action blocks in SFC charts 229 descriptions for configurations 119 descriptions for POUs 108 descriptions for resources 66 FC sub programs 102 I O devices for I O wiring 169 POUs in resources 99 rows to the Dictionary grid 134 SFC child programs 102 variables to spy list 316 addition operator 489 addresses renumbering in the Dictionary grid 140 adjusting zoom workspace 23 alarm and event operations ALARM function block 575 EVENT function block 588 ALARM function block 575 aligning coils on rungs LD elements 264 AND operator 495 AND MASK function 524 ANY TO BOOL operator 496 ANY TO DINT operator 499 ANY TO REAL operator 501 ANY TO SINT operator 498 ANY TO STRING operator 504 ANY TO TIME operator 502 appearance of I O wiring view 156 of language editors 182 of simulator 322 of the Dictionary view 126 arithmetic operations lgain opera
45. 311 breakpoints step by step mode 301 code stored on targets 336 variables from spy list 318 renaming projects 39 resources 51 SFC elements 224 structures 130 renumbering addresses in the Dictionary grid 140 elements in FC charts 249 elements in SFC charts 233 REPEAT UNTIL END REPEAT ST basic statements 464 REPLACE function 556 replacing elements Dictionary grid 137 repository path for version source control 359 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index REQUEST LICENSE function block 592 reserved keywords list of 385 reset coils described 446 resizing columns and rows in the Dictionary 132 elements in FBD POUs 274 resource links internal bindings deleting 76 hiding and showing 77 resources accessing details for previous versions of 366 adding descriptions to 66 appearance of 48 building code for 347 checking in 363 cleaning 348 comparing versions of 365 compilation options for 55 copying 51 creating 50 creating history reports for 366 cycle to cycle execution mode for 299 defining access control for 64 defining custom parameters for 63 defining the identification properties of 55 defining the network parameters for 62 deleting 53 deleting data links bindings 76 downloading code to targets for 293 editing links for external bindings 87 editing the properties of 54 executing in step by step mode 299 execution modes for 298 getting previous versions of 365 inserting in configurations 112 inserting in the link arch
46. 330 I O devices options for modifying using 331 memory requirements for 331 modifying running resources using 332 particular cases for 327 performing 327 types bindings and resource properties options for modifying using 331 variables options for modifying using 329 online mode for debugging 289 options for opening I O devices in I O wiring 170 level 2 windows FC elements 250 POUs in language editors 206 projects 36 spy lists 319 the I O wiring tool 155 variable groups 91 operating system priority SET PRIORITY function block 594 operative states of resources 48 operator modifiers IL elements described 474 operators for IL programs 482 1 gain 494 addition 489 AND 495 ANY TO BOOL 496 ANY TO DINT 499 ANY TO REAL 501 ANY TO SINT 498 ANY TO STRING 504 ANY TO TIME 502 CAL for IL 485 division 492 equal 505 greater than 508 greater than or equal 507 inserting in POUs 203 JMP for IL programs 480 LD for IL programs 477 less than 511 less than or equal 510 multiplication 488 NEG 512 NOT 514 not equal 515 OR 516 R for IL programs 479 RET for IL programs 481 S for IL programs 478 ST for IL programs 478 648 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual subtraction 491 summary of IL 476 summary of standard 487 TMR 517 XOR 518 options for printing of project items 340 toolbar in language editors 186 toolbar in main environment 20 OR operator 516 OR MASK function 553 oriented links description of 398 output v
47. 4 Inthe Consuming Variable field select the consuming variable 5 Inthe Network field select the network used for communicating 6 To set a default value for use in the event of a communication error select Use Default Value then enter a value in the field 7 To use a binding error variable indicate it in the Binding Error Variables section producer error variables are not supported in DS800 8 Click OK DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 79 Editing Internal Variable Bindings You can change the contents of existing variable bindings You edit bindings from the Variables binding grid of the Binding List window To edit the contents of an existing binding 1 Inthe Variable binding grid select the variable binding 2 From the Bindings List window s toolbar click The Binding editor appears 3 Make the necessary changes then click OK Deleting Internal Variable Bindings You delete variable bindings from the variable binding grid of the Bindings List window To delete a variable binding 1 Inthe Variable binding grid select the variable binding 2 Do one of the following From the Binding List window s toolbar click aS Press Delete 80 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual External Bindings External variable bindings are bindings between variables of resources belonging to different projects When defining external variable bindings you need to define groups of producer variables i
48. 400 conversions deleting from I O wiring 171 copying POUs 100 resources 51 variables Dictionary grid elements 136 corners inserting FBD elements 267 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index COS function 530 counters CTD function block 581 CTU function block 582 CTUD function block 583 DBG CLR GET ERR function block 585 DBG CLR SET ERR function block 585 DBG GET ERR function block 586 DBG_ SET ERR function block 586 cover page adding as printing option 340 CRC Cyclic Redundancy Checking viewing for resources 307 creating configurations 110 connections between configurations and networks 123 data links 74 FC sub programs 102 history reports version source control 366 libraries 281 networks 120 POUs in resources 99 projects 34 resources 50 SFC child programs 102 structures in the types tree 129 variable groups 91 cross references browser for 355 browsing POUs of a project 357 calculating 357 defining search options for finding 358 csv files importing variables data using 93 CTD function block 581 CTU function block 582 CTUD function block 583 current step locating for step by step mode 302 CURRENT ISA DATE function 531 cursor coordinates displaying in FBD and LD editors 254 custom parameters resources 63 customizing colors fonts of views and editors 26 637 cutting POUs 100 variables Dictionary grid elements 136 cycle time setting for resources debug mode 303 setting for resources edition mode
49. A bit of a double integer variable can be accessed using the following syntax MyVar 1 If MyVar is an Integer MyVar 1 is a Boolean i must be a constant value from 0 to 31 Real Variables REAL Real variables are standard IEEE 32 bit floating values single precision 1 sign bit 23 mantissa bits 8 exponent bits 390 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual The exponent value cannot be less than 37 or greater than 37 A real variable has six significant digits Timer Variables TIME Timer means clock or counter Such variables have time values and are typically used in Time expressions A Timer value cannot exceed 1193h2m47s294ms and cannot be negative Timer variables are stored in 32 bit words The internal representation is a positive number of milliseconds String Variables STRING String variables contain character strings The length of the string can change during process operations The length of a string variable cannot exceed the capacity maximum length specified when the variable is declared String capacity is limited to 255 characters excluding the terminating null character 0 String variables can contain any character of the standard ASCII table ASCII code from 0 to 255 The null character 0 can exist in a character string however it indicates the end of the string Strings have a size representing the maximum number of characters that the string can contain For example to define the MyS
50. ANY TO BOOL ST ares LD t Os ANY TO BOOL ST tres LD FALSE ANY TO BOOL ST mres DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference a ANY Po BOC t 0s ene tres O 497 ANY_TO_SINT ANY _TO_SINT H P Arguments IN BOOL DINT REAL TIME STRING any value other than a short integer Q SINT 0 if IN is FALSE 1 if IN is TRUE number of milliseconds for a timer integer part for real decimal number represented by a string Description Converts any variable to a Short integer variable 8 bit Example FBD example with Convert to Short Integer Operators rm h o o e A ME IN o bres Caa e o _ t Os4hms IN a tres Los ee Lp ae A 0198 IN o mres ST Equivalence bres ANY TO SINT true pres re L tres ANY TO SINT t 0s46ms Cres Is 46 lt mees 2S ANY TO SINT 098 mres is 198 498 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IL equivalence LD true ANY TO SINT ST bres LD t 1ls46ms ANY TO SINT ST tres LD 0198 ANY TO SINT ST mres ANY_TO_DINT ANY TO_DINT Lm Arguments IN BOOL SINT REAL TIME STRING any value other than a double integer Q DINT 0 if IN is FALSE 1 if IN is TRUE number of milliseconds for a timer integer part for real decimal number represented by a string Description Converts any variable to a double integer variable 32 bit DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 499 Example
51. Allubula Figg Dnadion Harmo y kuul rype 0O Nr Allubula Figg Dnadion Hamo y Wal Frenli limpula o muligesaleon comestiom Bln Tope 0 Nr Allibuls F mm Dnadion Harmo y WalZFrenult imula o muligesalen comestiom Fly Tope 0 Nr Allibuls F mm Dnadion Harmo y Hef ulk rype Orr DS 00 PROJECT dem o project DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual While printing pages you can choose to print all of a document the current page or specific sections of the document When defining the printing of a range between sections you need to specify the start and end section Print UU Printer Name HP Laszerlet EL Properties Status Ready Type HP Lazerlet 6L Where FILE Comment Page Range c Al Humber of copies f Curent Page Sections 1 251 475 IY Collate Since pagination for project documentation is set using the default paper dimensions specified for your computer when changing the paper dimensions from the Print dialog the pagination for project documentation differs from the preview DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 343 Code Generator The Code Generator is launched with the Build commands of the Workbench and editors The Code Generator shows compilation errors in the output window You can build the code of a single POU a complete resource or a whole Project Warning Before building code you should save all programs currently bei
52. Board number is always set to 1 and the Slot number refers to the slot in the RAS device housing in which the AI module resides The I O module wiring in DS800 software is NOT self identifying as it is in ROCLINK 800 software Before wiring each variable must be defined in the Dictionary View Variables Grid Select the appropriate variable from the unwired variables list The Name should identify the I O module The direction can be set three ways If defined as I Input then the variable will have to be wired to an Input module if defined as O Output then the variable will have to be wired to an Output module or if defined as Internal then it can not be wired to a ROC I O module The Attribute should be R read for Inputs W write for Outputs or Free for Inputs or Outputs that will be used as Inputs in other locations in the algorithm Analog Output 4 Point This Wiring is set in the I O Wiring View The parameters are Board number and Slot number Board number is always set to 1 and the Slot number refers to the slot in the RAS device housing in which the AO module resides The I O module wiring in DS800 software is NOT self identifying as it is in ROCLINK 800 software Before wiring each variable must be defined in the Dictionary View Variables Grid Select the appropriate variable from the unwired variables list The Name should identify the I O module The direction can be set 3 ways If defined as I Input then the variable w
53. DINT Any integer values Q DINT IN1 if SEL is FALSE IN2 if SEL is TRUE Description Binary selector selects a value between two integer values Example FBD Program using SEL Function E ST Equivalence ProCmd SEL AutoMode ManuCmd InpCmd process command selection IL Equivalence LD AutoMode SEL ManuCmd InpCmd ST ProCmd 562 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SHL shl Arguments IN DINT Any integer value NbS DINT Number of 1 bit shifts in set 1 31 Q DINT Left shifted value no effect if NbS lt 0 0 is used to replace lowest bit Description Make the bits of an integer shift to the left Shift is made on 32 bits qa OC Example FBD Program using SHL Function __ register __F fe ed ST Equivalence result SHL register 1 register 2 0100 1101 0011 0101 result 2 1001 1010 0110 1010 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 563 IL Equivalence LD register SHL il ST result SHR shr IH ab P Arguments IN DINT Any integer value NbS DINT Number of 1 bit shifts in set 1 31 Q DINT Right shifted value no effect if NbS lt 0 highest bit is copied at each shift Description Make the bits of an integer shift to the right Shift is made on 32 bits 564 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD Program using SHR Function ST Equivale
54. DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual You can customize the colors of resource data links EE 1 Main send info to R o H _ L Parameters 2 Test get info from Riel fhs ey ir eL Variable Groups L Programs i g eL Variable Groups _ L Functions i LY Programs _ fee LOY Function blocks gt Function blocks To link resources from the Binding List window You can access the Binding list window from the main menu or the Windows toolbar 1 From the Project menu choose Binding List The Binding List window appears 2 In the first column of the Resource binding grid locate the resource number of the resource holding the producing variable 3 In the top row of the Resource binding grid locate the resource number of the resource holding the consuming variable 4 Double click the grid cell where both resource numbers meet An icon appears in the grid cell indicating whether the link is between resources from the same or different configurations To link resources from the link architecture view 1 On the resource holding the producing variable click and hold the Data Link button H located on its title bar 2 Drag the link to the resource holding the consuming variable 3 Release the mouse button The data link is displayed graphically DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 75 Deleting Resource Links You can delete links between resources 1 e data links f
55. Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Language Reference This Language Reference is a complete description of all available features for programming ROC applications with this Workbench A description of the project architecture variables and the syntax of each programming language is given along with a full listing of the standard functions function blocks and Operators that can be called by programs DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 367 Project Architecture A Project is composed of configurations A configuration is one RAS device unit and is composed of one or more resources A resource represents a DS800 target Virtual Machine A resource is divided into several programming units called POUs Program Organization Unit The POUs of a resource are linked together in a tree like architecture POUs can be described using any of SFC FC ST IL FBD or LD graphic or literal languages POUs can be programs functions or function blocks Programs A Program is a logical programming unit that describes operations between variables of the process Programs describe either sequential or cyclic operations Cyclic programs are executed at each target system Cycle The execution of sequential programs has a Dynamic Behavior Programs are linked together in a hierarchy tree Those placed on the top of the hierarchy are activated by the system Child programs lower level of the hierarchy only for SFC and FC Child
56. E E A AA 606 OTT NS A peed nae aes ean acct OE 607 TESE SN Ge seca hace senesced aaah dae nd ec nce 608 TLP SET STRING wuecccccccsscssssscscscssecssecsssesuesscesessuecsessaresuessecssecaueeaneeseeee 609 SG E E E sneer rein ri ESE Teeter Sear on CP ATSC EE AET 609 E coerce dase ete tsa a tec eaten cent sea ean toenail os 610 OT dee cada ers aac S tcc 611 xvi DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual 10 A Se er nn ee UST ND Semire sa oped econ seen eeen cece cabelas ONI 613 GOSS Ay iba oi das caies Sages asec dans aden dene taraaka mae a E tedden caccad uamedansaden Stee 615 COPS TO 01 Eero eee eee eee ere E Apne ace ee ee mere 661 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Table of Contents xvii Workbench The DS800 software suite supports both the ROC800 Series and the FloBoss 107 flow computers from Remote Automation Solutions RAS To simplify usage this documentation refers to both devices as the RAS device If there is a situation where we restrict functionality to either the ROC800 Series or the FB107 we note it The Workbench is the environment in which you develop multi process control projects made up of virtual machines running on hardware components called target nodes The development process consists of creating projects made up of configurations representing individual target nodes on which one or more instances of resources 1 e virtual machines are downloaded At runtime the virtual machines run on these target nodes
57. ET TON TON m PT Arguments IN BOOL IfRising Edge starts increasing internal timer If Falling Edge stops and resets internal timer PT TIME Maximum programmed time Q BOOL IfTRUE programmed time is elapsed ET TIME Current elapsed time Possible values range from Oms to 23h59m59s999ms 610 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Description Increase an internal timer up to a given value Timing diagram pT z TE TP TF IH F PT Arguments IN BOOL If Rising Edge starts increasing internal timer if not already increasing If FALSE and only if timer is elapsed resets the internal timer Any change on IN during counting has no effect PT TIME Maximum programmed time Q BOOL If TRUE timer is counting ET TIME Current elapsed time Possible values range from Oms to 23h59m59s999ms Description Increase an internal timer up to a given value DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 611 Timing diagram IH UREY S NOR ERROR STATUS RD Arguments EN R BOOL Enable to receive data ID DINT Identification of the communication Channel R ID STRING Identification of the remote SFB inside the Channel NDR BOOL If TRUE new string received in RD ERROR BOOL If TRUE new non zero STATUS received STATUS DINT Last detected status RD STRING Received string 612 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Description Receive a string from a remote or local resource of current Project
58. Editor 1 Main MyProgFC 3 Be File Edit Tools Debug Options Window Help HHAH gt A GIE a eA C ESE FALSE AND OR aOR RETURN l THEM EES pie E A Zoom 100 Note The FC Level 2 is also shown within the corresponding element representation in the Level 1 Workspace To view the Level 2 of another element follow the instructions above in which case the new Level 2 will replace the one displayed or open the new Level 2 in a separate window 250 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To open the Level 2 in a separate window 1 Select an FC element 2 Do one of the following From the Edit menu choose Edit Level 2 in separate window Press lt Ctr1 Return gt You can close level 2 windows by clicking on the close icon on the right of their title bar Level 2 Window When the Edit Level 2 command is used e Ifno Level 2 window exists a level 2 window is opened e If one level 2 window is already open it is replaced by the level 2 of the current element The Level 2 of the FC window is sub divisible e If there are two level 2 windows the level 2 window that had the focus is replaced by the level 2 of the currently selected element A maximum of two separate windows elements can be opened for simultaneous editing DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 251 Edit the Level 2 ST is the default language of the level 2 You can change the language to LD or IL with
59. N 460 IF THEN ELSIF ELSE Statement x covicieccessicsenersdcsenreves tediwdesedscnnoeedenees 461 CADE SEMEN 555 se dasa rsa cadeasuwn A 462 WHILE Statement ressora aE a E E 463 REPEAT Statement oea a A E EE 464 FOR SEMED aarne A E AON 465 EXIT State MC INN aroe a r N A AAA 466 STF EXEN OIS naraenia E a Vedsiadsbaseennls 467 GSTART Statement in SFC Actionin wuiatockomeetaaan sees 468 GKILL Statement in SFC Action eanne cccsssseeecccccccceeeseeueeeeseeeeeeeees 469 GFREEZE Statement in SFC Action eenean annaa 470 GRST Statement m SFC Action ccc ccc ccccccccessssseceecccccceeeeeeeessssesesees 471 GSTATUS Statement in SFC Action cccccecececcccccccccceceeeeeeessseeeeeeeees 472 DT Tote A Ss etre oa areas E meat ee atau trina iets cuct uvattemiadimtaonteactetiaes 473 IMa S 81 ear ee eee ane UE nt eae ee ee eee 473 babe kecanen a aE 474 Operator Modifiers sii heeled eaten ed ca a ated amauta ans 474 Delayed Operations ainmin E RE 475 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Table of Contents xiii My OP CRALONS a A EN 476 TD BCEAO eeno E O 477 ST OPCA OT Saiesrarewtcheti vind cute Nechaaded O Mea deanbesaie 478 SOP EEALOF scsi c5 se tacactc oars dossnnapune ten Er 478 ROPO irena an a oat nanid saute adadaansasansscouusannscaswennnts 479 DIVER OPT Oaar E 480 REE Operator ecus N E 481 VOPI OL aree na r a S 482 Callina Fune Hons aia a 483 Calling Function Blocks CAL Operator cccccccccccccccceeeesssessesssssseees 485 Sandard Oero
60. Name should identify the I O module The direction can be set 3 ways If defined as I Input then the variable will have to be wired to an Input module if defined as O Output then the variable will have to be wired to an Output module or if defined as Internal then it can not be wired to a ROC I O module The Attribute should be R read for Inputs W write for Outputs or Free for Inputs or Outputs that will be used as Inputs in other locations in the algorithm System Analog Input 5 Point This Wiring is set in the I O Wiring View The 5 points channels refer to inputs for e BATT supply from Battery to power supply module is low e CHG Supply to solar Charge is low e Module V Voltage monitor from power supply module to I O and Comm modules e One point that is not used e Board Temperature monitor of thermistor on CPU For more information on these points refer to the ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software User Manual The parameters are Board number and Slot number Board number is always set to 1 and the Slot number is fixed non configurable as it has no physical location in the RAS device housing The I O module wiring in DS800 software is NOT self identifying as it is in ROCLINK 800 software DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 167 Before wiring each variable must be defined in the Dictionary View Variables Grid Select the appropriate variable from the unwired variables list The Name should identify t
61. Pos DINT Position of the first modified character first valid position is 1 Q STRING Modified string NbC characters are deleted at position Pos then substring Str is inserted at this position returns empty string if Pos lt 0 returns strings concatenation IN Str if Pos is greater than the length of the IN string returns initial string IN if NbC lt 0 Description Replaces a part of a string by a new set of characters Example Replaces a part of a string by a new set of characters replace ST Equivalence MyName REPLACE Mr X JONES Frank 1 4 MyName is Mr Frank JONES IL Equivalence LD Mr X JONES REPLACE Frank 1 4 ST MyName DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 557 g m Arguments IN STRING Any non empty string NbC DINT Number of characters to be extracted This number cannot be greater than the length of the IN string Q STRING Right part of the string length NbC empty string if NbC lt 0 complete string if NbC gt string length Description Extracts the right part of a string The number of characters to be extracted is given Example FBD Program using LEFT and RIGHT Functions ST Equivalence 12345670 complete string complete string RIGHT 12345678 4 LEFT 12345678 4 complete string is 56781234 the value issued from RIGHT call is 5678 the value issued from LEFT call is 1234
62. These Parameters are called Hidden Parameters They correspond to Input Parameters of the Block to which you can give a constant value The Parameters tab allows you to enter a value for these Parameters Select Blocks ia E 4 x fbl Help Blocks Parameters Comment Type 3 3456 DINT 4567 DINT gt Value 3456 Cancel Select the parameter name in the list and enter its value in the Value edit box press Enter to assign the value 204 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Printing POUs You can choose to print a standard list of elements for a POU from the Document Generator For information about the Document Generator see page 337 To print the current POU e From the File menu choose Print or click on the Standard toolbar Opening the Dictionary From a language editor you can open the Dictionary filtered for the current POU To open the Dictionary e From the File menu choose Dictionary or click Li on the Standard toolbar DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 205 Opening Another POU From a language editor you can open another POU written with the language supported by the current editor from any resource To open another POU from a language editor 1 From the file menu choose Open or click on the Standard toolbar 2 In the Open dialog box from the project tree select the resource holding the POU to open then the file from the list of available files Projec
63. X v Amis Binding error variables Imported from Project PROJECTI os Resource i 1 hal Consumer error variable Resource 1 from Group 1 with Group ID ed Group comment Group comment ETCF Mone Variable From Variable bo Type Network 2 Define the source of the producer group of variables used for the external bindings a Browse for the project holding the producer group to include in the bindings 86 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual b Specify the resource and producer group ID of the producer group The resource number producer group ID and network used for linking the resources are displayed in the Binding error variables section 3 To indicate a binding error variable select one from the available variables Editing External Resource Links You can edit resource links for existing external bindings from the consumer resource Warning Editing the linking information for a specified producer group resource or project sets all defined external variable bindings in the list in error E To edit a link between resources of different projects You edit links between resources from the Consumer Binding List editor gt In the Consumer Binding List make the necessary changes to the project resource or producer group information then click OK DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 87 Defining External Variable Bindings Before defining external variable b
64. a time stamped event in the event log of a device Set dominant bistable Reset dominant bistable Rising edge detection Falling edge detection Connection to a resource Sending of a message to a resource Reception of a message from a resource Full comparison Function Block Up counter Down counter Up down counter Clears error set by TLP_ GET xxx functions Clears error set by TLP_ SET xxx functions Indicates error with TLP_ GET xxx functions Indicates error with TLP SET xxx functions Reads entire contents of a soft point and writes the data to an output value Writes data to a specified soft point Returns TLP data as a DINT 573 TLP GET REAL TLP GET SINT TLP GET STRING TLP GET TLP TLP SET DINT TLP SET REAL TLP_SET SINT TLP_SET STRING AVERAGE REQUEST LICENSE SET PRIORITY Data manipulation License request and operating system priority Warning These function blocks are available only on ROC800 Series devices DERIVATE HYSTER INTEGRAL STACKINT BLINK SIG_GEN TON TOF TP Process control Signal generation Returns TLP data as a REAL Returns TLP data as an SINT Returns TLP data as a STRING Reads the TLP from a specified TLP Writes a DINT to a TLP Writes a REAL to a TLP Writes a SINT to a TLP Writes a STRING to a TLP Running average over N samples Requests a license from the license server Sets the priority of the operating system Differentiation according to time Boolea
65. aia datomiadice meant AA 5 fare loys eee te Ren rene ee ane N RT ee en eR aetna are T 14 Stamdard TOO IDAE es a a 15 Debus Toolbars A e 17 Window Buttons ToolDa m sensa a A 19 Layers Tool Daear a E N ON 19 Version Source Control TOO aR sielen esias a a 20 Options Toolbar seresa a A 20 VOWirine Toolbar nanye A 20 WOKS ACG ennaa E E T eanieraess 22 BOE NE S tous tanaitawetaasentctae 23 OUMU WINdO Wonsa a TS 24 COMECK CU Al Menina e S 25 BS UUs BE Cassa a rt cihawsesteincracta as eats cous sa Sor glace aba thee pa es os ohana E E 25 CUSO ZION aeaa tober cena ac he ece oe tone apnea Neosat aa 26 TRS CLO YS OIC CU zanien etidats tenesrac ate sien E eaaebenenantete 29 Workne With PTO ECIS ss 520s ies a e E O 32 C Eanna Proci Sonnen tivonaapateotorncs ssh otenaeed aaneeasias Rares aie 34 Opening and Closing Projects ss snes asaanieceiematedgeeee dd aoe ee ees 36 DAViS Proje O nesae A estates aGeeacas Ge eno 39 Reman Projeti ee 53224 oases asec A eee 39 Adding a Project DeSCrIptiOn ccccceccccceeeesessessececcceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 40 Pinne Proj CCS ios sadeg avd sand a 40 Projec ACCESS Conto hesan a E 41 Importing and Exporting Workbench Elements cccccssssssccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 43 Uploading Workbench Elements from Targets cccsessesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 46 Lettie ATC MILE CLUES VIEW ienaa aE EEA aerap ead odiak Ss eats A een cou tade 48 IRS OUECES seine 5 E sue ie eats hahiwencas ico w
66. any expression Example Examplel IEC 61131 function call Main ST program gets an integer value and converts it into a limited time value ana timeprog SPlimit tprog_cmd appl timer ANY TO TIME ana_timeprog 100 456 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Called FBD function named SPlimit min value W l input value ot bn mas value a sri Example2 C function call same syntax as for IEC 61131 function calls Functions used in complex expressions min max right mlen and left are standard C functions limited value min 16 max 0 input value rol msg right message mlen message 1 left message 1 Calling Function Blocks Calling Function Blocks from ST Name name of the function block instance Meaning calls a function block from the standard library or from the user s library and accesses its return parameters Syntax call of the function block lt blockname gt lt p1 gt lt p2 gt gets its return parameters lt result gt lt blockname gt lt ret_param1 gt lt result gt lt blockname gt lt ret_paramN gt Operands parameters are expressions which match the type of the parameters specified for that function block Return value See Syntax to get the return parameters Consult the Standard Function Blocks section to find the meaning and type of each function block parameter The function
67. as internal variables They can be read or updated by the Debugger so that the user can simulate the I O processing but no actual connection is made DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 171 Wiring Channels You wire variables to channels by selecting a channel in the Tree then double clicking or pressing lt Return gt on a variable in the grid If the channel is already wired the existing variable is unwired and replaced by the one in the grid After a connection the variable is removed from the grid and the next channel is selected only variables available for wiring appear in the grid Note If no channel is selected nothing happens Mapping Channels You can define the mapping of logical channels to physical channels When mapping channels only one link can send to or receive from a logical channel For an input device you can map a physical input to one or more logical inputs Whereas you cannot map more than one physical input to a logical input For an output device you can only link one logical output to one physical output Input Device Output Device Physical Logical Physical Logical Input Input Output Ouput When performing online changes you can modify channel mappings To map logical and physical channels for a device 1 Inthe I O wiring tool select the device 172 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual 2 From the Edit menu choose Map Channels or click 2 on the I O Wiring toolbar The Map
68. ascending order and a second time for descending order When viewing events you can access more detailed information for specific messages by pressing F1 Note The Events Logger only logs target errors Simulator errors are not displayed in the Events Viewer To access the Events Viewer When starting the Events Viewer while running an application the Events Logger automatically points towards the application s project and is started gt Inthe Workbench from the Tools menu choose Events Viewer To sort events in the Events Viewer gt At the top of the window click a category heading To inverse sorting order click the category heading a second time To view events for another day 1 At the top of the window click the date The Events Viewer Date Selection window appears DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 177 Events Viewer Date Selection Sur Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 26 27 20 29 30 3H 1 2 3 4 5 zG E 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 fl 22 eo 24 25 25 2 2 2 os 4 5 E 7 6 Today 2 7 03 Cancel 2 To view the events for another day click the day on the calendar 3 To view the dates for another month do one of the following Click 4 or J to scroll through the previous or following months Click on the month at the top of the calendar then choose one from the list 4 To change the year click the year at the top of the calendar then choose one from the list 5 To return
69. block instance name of the copy must be declared in the dictionary DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 457 Example ST program calling a function block declare the instance of the block in the dictionary Gragbi bbLock R TRIG rising edge detection Function block activation from ST language trigbl b1 return parameters access If trigb1 Q Then nb edge nb edge 1 End if 458 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ST Operators Standard operators such as AND NOT OR XOR etc are described in the Standard Operators section ST Basic Statements Assignment Name Meaning Assigns a variable to an expression Syntax lt variable gt lt any_expression gt Operands Variable must be an internal or output variable and the expression must have the same type The expression can be a call to a function Example ST program with assignments variable lt lt variable bo23 bolo Variable lt lt expression bo56 bx34 OR alrml100 amp level gt over value result 100 input value scale assignment with function call limited value min 16 max 0 input_value 3 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 459 RETURN Statement Name RETURN Meaning terminates the execution of the current program Syntax RETURN Operands none In an SFC action block the RETURN statement indic
70. call to ComplesT est E Hello E ComplesT est DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 339 Printing Options Project documentation uses the default printer settings specified for your computer However you can define many other printing options You can choose to place each item on a new page You can also choose to print diagrams in landscape orientation This option sets the printing of all FBD and LD diagrams using the landscape orientation while printing all other items using the portrait orientation FBD and LD diagrams including guideline areas are automatically scaled to fit the width of the printed pages You can also specify printing options for the following documentation aspects 340 Header Footer You can choose to display document information including the date and page count as a header at the top of each page or as a footer at the bottom of each page You can also choose to have no headers or footers You can modify the contents of the displayed header or footer by clicking Edit in the Header Footer section of the printing options You can choose to use one of two formats as header footer One format provides three fields where you can enter text In both formats you can change the logo by entering the path and filename of a bitmap bmp file Click to browse and select your file Header Footer 4 X p EMERSON Editable text PROJECT E Editable text demo project Bitmap file EiFrogram FilesiEmers
71. can list all types of variables or individual standard IEC 61131 types as well as defined words arrays and structures You can also list variable groups and variable directions When editing functions or function blocks the parameters option appears in this list When typing identifier names the selector automatically searches for the first item in the list matching the entered criteria Select variable a E x array dint outputa Type DINT bd Global local Local Group AI Groups Direction All Directions Alias Type Direction Dimension Comment array dint_input Input comment 4 aray dint_output Output comment 3 array dint_output Output array dint_output Output aray _dint_output 3 DINT Output aray dint_output 4 Output arral_dint_output 5 Output Note Arrays must be declared in the Dictionary View before using them in Functional Block Diagrams FBD To insert an identifier in a POU 1 From the Edit menu choose Insert Identifier or click from the Standard toolbar The Select Variable dialog box is displayed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 201 2 To reduce the number of variables appearing in the list select a type variable group and direction of the identifiers to list To list the parameters for functions and function blocks select the Parameters option 3 Do one of the following To use a previously declared variable select a variable from the list or type th
72. configuration is connected to You define network properties when you create them When you create DS800 projects networks are automatically inserted Networks are represented in the hardware architecture view as a horizontal bar Mame Notes e A project can contain an unlimited number of networks e Ifthe network is not implemented in the target it is the responsibility of the integrator to develop and implement a driver for that particular network Creating a Network e The default network is ETCP e ISaRSI is only used to connect the Workbench to the RAS device target ISaRSI does not support projects with multiple configurations Creating Networks You define network properties at the time of creation You need to specify the protocol also called Network Driver to use for communications between configurations when bindings are defined The parameters defining the network appear in the grid Some parameters may be read only greyed Not all networks require parameters at this level e g ETCP for Ethernet When you create DS800 projects networks are automatically inserted You can choose to integrate help using the Help button 120 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To create a network dh 1 Switch to the hardware architecture view l 2 From the Insert menu choose Network A new Network is created and the Network Properties dialog box from which you select a protocol The available protocols are ETCP
73. control information for a project using the file mode or the client server mode 1 With the project open in the Workbench from the File menu choose Project Properties 2 Inthe Project Properties window select the Version Control tab Project Properties E x Security Wersion Control Repository path User Password RemotePC Rep m Repository project MyProject Clear SC Status Cancel Apply 3 Inthe Repository path and Repository Project field specify the location in which to save the version source control information by clicking to browse the path The syntax to specify a server repository path on a remote computer is as follows UserName Password RemoteComputer where UserName and Password represent the logon information for the remote computer RemoteComputer represents the name or IP address of the computer DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 361 To clear version source control status for a project 1 With the project open in the Workbench from the File menu choose Project Properties 2 Inthe Project Properties window select the Version Control tab 3 Make sure the repository path is the correct one for the project then click Clear VSC Status The version source control information is disabled for the project 362 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Performing a Check in of a Workbench Element You can check in 1 e save project configuration resource and POU defi
74. convergences are represented by double horizontal lines s Double Divergence Double Convergence E 402 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example SFC program with double divergence and convergence Ruri EndofProcess 0 101 waitfor rocess true DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 403 Actions Within Steps The level 2 of an SFC step is the detailed description of the actions executed during the step activity This description is made by using SFC literal features and other languages such as Structured Text ST or Ladder Diagram LD The basic types of Actions are e Boolean actions with Set Reset or Non Stored Qualifier e List of instructions programmed in ST LD or IL with Pulse or Non Stored Qualifier e SFC Actions management of SFC children with Set Reset or Non Stored Qualifier Several Actions with same or different types can be described in the same Step The special feature that enables the use of any of the other language is calling Functions and Function blocks written in ST LD and FBD Boolean Actions Boolean Actions assign a Boolean Variable with the activity of the Step The Boolean Variable can be an output or a memory Variable It is assigned each time the Step activity starts or stops This is the meaning of the basic Boolean Actions N on a Boolean Variable assigns the Step activity signal to the Variable S on a Boolean Variable sets the Variable to TRU
75. cycle mode Then to overpass the breakpoint you can choose either to execute one cycle or switch real time mode When a resource is in the BREAK state and step by step debugging is activated for ST IL or LD POUs within the resource you can also step to the first line of the first POU of the resource for which debug information is generated Note You can only set breakpoints for resources producing TIC code you cannot set breakpoints for resources producing C source code Furthermore you cannot set or remove SFC breakpoints while a resource is in the STEPPING state Four types of SFC breakpoints are available Breakpoint on Step Activation B Breakpoint on Step Deactivation Breakpoint on Transition Transition Clearing Forcing i To set a breakpoint command on a step or transition You can set breakpoint commands from the Breakpoints toolbar or from the contextual menu gt Right click on the step or transition then from the contextual menu choose the desired breakpoint command Once the breakpoint is reached you can execute one cycle or switch real time mode to continue the execution To remove breakpoints from steps You can remove breakpoints from the Breakpoints toolbar or from the contextual menu DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 311 1 To remove a single breakpoint right click on the step then from the contextual menu choose Remove Breakpoint 2 To remove all breakpoints right click on a step t
76. elements 1 From the Edit menu choose Paste CTRL V or click E on the Standard toolbar 2 Position the ghost 3 Click to paste at the new location Delete To delete elements 1 Select the element s 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete OR press lt Delete gt Move All elements linked directly below a moved element are automatically moved and their flow links re drawn To move elements 1 Select the element s to move 2 Drag the ghost to a valid location 3 Drop the elements as required 248 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual GoTo To go to a symbol in the current FC program 1 From the Edit menu choose Goto The Goto dialog box appears Goto Goto O2 Init 05 CountS mall OF SmallSignal 10 Begin 13 End 2 Select the element from the list then click OK The Action Test Level 1 is selected Renumber F11 aay Da Two elements cannot have the same logical number within one Flow Chart In this case a renumber facility is provided to automatically generate sequential numbers The order in which the chart is renumbered is based on each element s position from top to bottom then from left to right DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 249 Level 2 To view the Level 2 window of an FC Element action or test 1 Select an FC element 2 Do one of the following From the Edit menu choose Edit Level 2 Double click an FC element loj x Flow Chart
77. false Duration of one sample Possible values range from Oms to 23h59m59s999ms Maximum counting value Inverted after each sample Up counter increased on each sample TRUE when up counting ends Sine signal period counting duration Generates various signal blink on a boolean a integer counter up and real sine wave When counting reaches maximum value it restarts from 0 zero So END keeps the TRUE value only during 1 PERIOD DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 595 Timing diagram PERIOD RUM PULSE WA ATMO UP EMD AHE SOFT_POINT_READ SOFT_POINT READ log data Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments log num log DINT Identifies the logical number of a soft point to read from data SoftPoint Stores contents of specified soft point Description Reads entire contents of a soft point and writes the data to an output value 596 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SOFT_POINT_WRITE SOFT POINT WRITE lout data Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments log num log DINT Identifies the logical number of a soft point to write to data SoftPoint Contains data to be written to soft point Description Writes data to a specified soft point Hidden Parameters This function block has hidden parameters that correspond to each parameter in a soft point These hidden para
78. filenames projects 36 FIND function 534 finding matching coils LD POUs 278 matching names LD POUs 278 variables elements in POUs 207 variables elements in the Dictionary 137 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index flow links described 419 inserting 243 fonts changing for printing options 340 customizing for views and editors 26 FOR TO BY DO END_FOR ST basic statement 465 forcing transition clearing 315 values of variables in a spy list 319 values of variables in the Dictionary 304 foreground colors customizing for views and editors 26 freeing channels I O wiring 174 function blocks ALARM 575 AVERAGE 575 BLINK 577 calling from action blocks 409 calling from IL CAL operator 485 calling from ST programs 457 calling from transitions 413 CMP 578 CONNECT 579 creating in resources 99 CTD 581 CTU 582 CTUD 583 DBG CLR GET ERR 585 DBG CLR SET ERR 585 DBG GET ERR 586 DBG_ SET ERR 586 debugging instances of 334 defining access control for 104 DERIVATE 587 described 373 displaying tooltips for 267 EVENT 588 F_ TRIG 588 HYSTER 589 inserting in FBD diagrams 267 641 inserting in POUs 203 INTEGRAL 590 manipulating in resources 100 modifying instances of in online changes 330 R_TRIG 591 REQUEST LICENSE 592 reusing through libraries 281 RS 593 SET PRIORITY 594 SIG_GEN 595 SOFT POINT READ 596 SOFT POINT WRITE 597 SR 598 STACKINT 600 summary of standard 573 TLP GET DINT 601 TLP GET REAL 6
79. for function blocks 267 displaying for variables 266 TP function block 611 transitions clearing in SFC 311 conditions attached to ST or LD described 410 editing code for SFC elements 231 forcing clearing of in SFC 315 in SFC described 397 inserting in SFC 216 programming for conditions in IL 411 programming for conditions in LD 411 programming for conditions in ST 410 tree view for a project 353 for I O wiring 157 TRUNC function 570 types arrays described 379 available standard IEC 61131 types 377 grid in the Dictionary 144 modifying for online changes 331 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index structures described 380 tree creating structures in 129 tree deleting structures from 130 tree described 129 tree renaming structures in 130 U unlocking POUs with access control 104 resources with access control 64 variables 304 unwiring channels in I O devices 174 uploading Workbench elements from targets 46 URCV S function block 612 USEND _ S function block 613 user types arrays described 379 structures described 380 using libraries in projects 282 V validation at cell level 153 at database level 154 at row level 153 values forcing for variables 304 variable bindings defining for external bindings 88 defining for internal bindings 78 deleting for external bindings 89 deleting for internal bindings 80 described 67 editing for external bindings 89 editing for internal bindings 80 external describ
80. in a horizontal tiling manner T sets the I O device windows to appear in a vertical tiling manner Contextual Menu A contextual menu accessed by right clicking within an I O device window enables you to change the numeric presentation of values the display options I O window header and variable name and split the window Displaying I O Device Window Headers In the Simulator you can choose to display a header at the top of device I O windows in the following format lt Resource number gt lt Resource name gt lt configuration name gt Direction lt Input Output gt Type lt type name gt 1 Cl_R1 Config C1 Direction Input Type BOOL To display window headers gt From the Option menu choose Display Header DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 325 Moving or Hiding the Browser You can move resize or hide the Simulator s browser To undock it click on the double line and drag the window You can move it to the top bottom left and right of the workspace or completely outside of the Simulator window To move or hide the browser 1 To move the browser click its frame then drag it to the new location 2 To hide the browser from the View menu choose Treebar 326 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Online Changes You can modify a resource while it runs This is sometimes necessary for chemical processes where any interruption may jeopardize production or safety When pe
81. in normal mode before editing single resources Otherwise a build while in single resource mode may generate errors Only one user can access a resource at any given time while in use a resource remains locked to all other users For instance when editing a project in normal mode all resources making up the project are automatically locked for your use except for those resources currently open in single resource mode The currently open resources are displayed in the workspace but remain locked Locked resources appear gray with a lock symbol in their title bar ae 05800 Projecti demo project Link architecture Z ioj x File Edit Insert Project Tools Debug Options Window Help lel FSA KOM eo eo SSCS EAT e Sge g Alles a oj t Ei Main send info ta R2 ATE ol H gt BS Get into irom rs ae Parameters Ee BRS wee kai Ry Variable Groups a Groups i Programs pe a Main simple loop call to ComplexT est UP Programs LPY Functions dL Addition simple addition a Functions Ljet ComplexT est Ry Function blacks Ly Function blocks Pa 4 F Admin Administrator Resource 1 Config1 Main send info to Re NUM E 32 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual You can unlock resources currently open in single resource mode by another user by selecting the resource then choosing Unlock Resource from the Tools menu Warning The Unlock Resource option
82. information displayed in the output window x To view the Output Window gt From the Window menu choose Show Output Window To clear the contents of the output window gt From the Window menu choose Clear Output Window 24 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Contextual Menus Contextual menus are displayed by right clicking in the workspace of the various tools and applications From the Hardware Architecture view you can access a contextual menu for configurations or resources For configurations you access it by right clicking a configuration s title bars For resources you access it by clicking a resource s name in the configuration window From the Link Architecture view you can access a contextual menu for resources by right clicking a resource s title bar Example Insert Resource Edit Project Description Rename Project Check in Project View Project History Status Bar A status bar appears at the bottom of the main window displaying information about commands operations and projects To show or hide the status bar 1 From the Options menu choose Layout The Layout editor appears 2 To show the status bar check Status Bar then click OK 3 To hide the status bar uncheck Status Bar then click OK DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 25 Customization You can choose to customize the colors and fonts for many aspects of the Workbench as well as set working preferences Y
83. killing and giving the status of running virtual machines The link between networks and configurations displayed in the hardware architecture view 617 Constant Expression Consumer Group Consumption Error Behavior Contact Contextual Menu Convergence Conversion Conversion Function CRC Cross References Browser CSV File Format Current Result IL 618 Literal expression used to describe a constant value A group holding external producer variables having bindings with consumer variables defined in the project Indication of the value to use when an error occurs for an internal binding Possible values are either the last value issued from the binding or a specified default value Graphic component of an FBD or LD diagram Depending on the type of contact it represents the value or function of an input or an internal variable Menu that is displayed under the mouse cursor by right clicking the mouse Multiple connection link from multiple SFC symbols steps or transitions to a single symbol Convergences can be single or double A single convergence OR is a multiple link from multiple transitions to the same step A double convergence AND is a multiple link from multiple steps to the same transition Filter attached to an input or output variable The conversion 1s automatically applied each time the input variable is read or the output variable is refreshed C written Function which
84. letter For SFC programs and SFC child programs you may need to change the SFC dynamic behavior factors for the resource For details on the SFC dynamic behavior factors see page 60 For each SFC function block and SFC child block you may need to adjust the maximum number of tokens To create a POU 1 Inthe resource window select the POU component to create DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 99 2 From the Insert menu choose Add Program then the desired language The new component appears at the end of its respective section with its name ready to edit 3 Type a name for the component 4 For SFC POUs do one of the following For an SFC program or SFC child program make sure the dynamic behavior factors defined for the resource are sufficient by selecting the resource then from the Edit menu choosing Properties then the Settings tab then clicking Advanced Settings For an SFC function block or SFC child function block specify the maximum number of tokens by selecting the block then from the Edit menu choosing Properties then the Settings tab Manipulating POUs You can move cut copy paste and delete POUs with certain exceptions within their sections to other sections and from one resource to another You can only move or copy POUs between sections supporting the same language For instance you cannot move or copy an SFC program or function block to the Functions section You can move progra
85. list contains all variables of the producer resource The Consuming Variable selection list contains all variables which do not have the INPUT direction and are not already used as a consumed variable in an existing binding The network selection list contains the networks that are supported by the target of the configuration of the first resource and the target of the configuration of the second resource The Binding Parameters list displays the parameters to be defined for the variables bound on the selected network This list may be empty depending on the network used by the binding For example ETCP does not need any parameters at this level You define parameters by double clicking on a parameter line to display the Binding Parameter dialog box available only when the parameter is editable Some parameters are read only The Binding Error Variables section contains two selection lists for selecting a variable Global Memory of the DINT type in each resource to receive binding error values producer error variables are not supported in DS800 Producer error variables and consumer error variables can be used in the resource s POUs to trap and act upon errors The default value is None To create a binding between variables 1 In the Variable binding grid select the next available field 2 From the Binding List window s toolbar click a l The Binding editor appears 3 In the Producing Variable field select the producing variable
86. menu 3 Select the new location i e the Program Function or Function Block section within the same or different resource 4 From the Edit menu choose Paste lt Ctr1 V gt or use the contextual menu To delete POUs 1 Select the POU 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete lt DEL gt To copy POUs from a project to another 1 In the destination project create a program having the same name and language as the program in the original project 2 From the original project directory of the program s resource copy the POU_name stf file then paste the file in the destination project s resource directory 3 Inthe destination project redeclare local and global variables needed for the POU DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 101 Creating FC Sub programs ral Flow Chart FC Flow Chart FC Sub program To create an FC sub program You can create FC sub programs using the main menu options or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking the FC program component within a resource 1 In the resource window hierarchy select an existing FC program z 2 From the Insert menu choose Add FC Sub Program Creating SFC Child POUs Sequential Function Chart SFC Child Sequential Function Chart SFC To create a child SFC POU You can create child SFC POUs using the main menu options or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking an SFC POU within a resource 1 Select the existing SFC POU fms in the res
87. names Dimensions Initial values Text length for example Comments Alias e Variable Array and Structure names cannot be the same as Reserved Keywords e Validity and range checks of Addresses Row level Validation The system validates the rows records at grid level When editing a row the system checks e Retain variables cannot be Input Output e If Type is not of type String the column must be empty Direction checks Internal Wiring must be empty Input Wiring must begin with l Output Wiring must begin with Q DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 153 Attribute checks Can only be Read only for Inputs Can only be Write or Free for Outputs Inputs cannot have an initial value Retain variables cannot have an initial value Database level Validation The system validates the database When saving the system checks 154 IEC 61131 functions have one and only one Output parameter named as the function Function and function block parameter names are not duplicated Parameters are ordered Input then Outputs Variable names are not duplicated within a resource Local variable names are not duplicated within a POU do not have the same name as a global variable within a Structure a field in not repeated the Maximum number of function and function block parameters respects target capabilities DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual I O Wiring View I O wiring en
88. naming used in the Wiring grid of the dictionary s variable grid For example the QU19 0 means that the TLP device index is 19 148 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual 2 In the I O Wiring view locate and expand the TLP device having the corresponding index The TLP device index is the number appearing at the left in a device s name In the following example the device index is 19 19 DS800 TLP TLP_ SOFT POINT WRITE 3 Expand the Parameters element then double click any field 4 In the I O Parameters dialog locate the field for which to disable the write permission then set its Value to FALSE 5 Click OK The selected SoftPoint structure field s write permission is disabled DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 149 Initial Values Initial values can only apply to variables If no initial value is entered in the variables grid a value of 0 or FALSE is used by default The initial values are Variable BOOL SINT USINT BYTE INT UINT WORD DINT UDINT DWORD LINT ULINT LWORD REAL LREAL TIME 150 Default FALSE gt gt gt o gt o gt o gt O co eo Cc fo fC t 0s Possible Values TRUE or FALSE any other short integer value any other unsigned short integer value any byte value any other integer value any other unsigned integer value any other word value any other double integer value any other unsigned double integer value any other double word value an
89. negation described 433 displaying cursor coordinates 254 inserting comments 272 inserting corners 267 inserting function blocks 267 inserting jumps to labels 268 inserting labels 268 inserting links connection 267 inserting returns 269 inserting variables 266 jumps and labels described 431 main diagram format 429 managing guideline areas 254 monitoring output values 295 640 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual return statement described 431 showing execution order 265 toolbar language editor 195 FC Flow Chart actions described 420 begin component described 418 comments described 424 complex structures examples of 425 conditions described 420 connectors described 424 creating sub programs 102 dynamic behavior of 426 end component described 418 execution of sub programs 371 flow link described 419 I O specific actions described 423 inserting actions 240 inserting comments 245 inserting connector links 244 inserting DO WHILE structures 242 inserting flow links 243 inserting I O specific actions 244 inserting IF THEN ELSE structures 241 inserting sub programs 245 inserting tests 240 inserting WHILE DO structures 242 language editor menu bar options for 236 programs hierarchy restrictions for 96 renumbering in charts 249 sub programs vertical structures of 422 syntax verification rules main 426 toolbar language editor 191 using goto symbols 249 viewing level 2 windows for 250 working with charts 239
90. on Variables All variables have an Attribute and a Direction Variables can have one of the following Attributes Free Variable which can be used for reading or writing with an initial value Read Read only variable with an initial value Write Write only variable with an initial value They also have a direction Internal Internal variable updated by the programs Input Variable connected to an input device refreshed by the system Output Variable connected to an output device Note Some variables cannot be input or output Timers for example Each restriction is indicated in the corresponding section Variables of standard IEC 61131 types can be given an Initial Value The default initial value is 0 or FALSE The initial value is the value of the variable when the Target starts the first Cycle DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 389 Boolean Variables BOOL Boolean means Logic Such variables can take one of the Boolean values TRUE or FALSE Boolean variables are typically used in Boolean expressions Short Integer Variables SINT Short Integer variables are 8 bit signed integers from 128 to 127 A bit of a short integer variable can be accessed using the following syntax MyVar i If MyVar is a short Integer MyVar i is a Boolean 1 must be a constant value from 0 to 7 Double Integer Variables DINT Double Integer variables are 32 bit signed integers from 2147483648 to 2147483647
91. on the right inserting 262 usage of 451 boolean actions within steps 404 constant expressions 381 negations in FBD described 433 variables 390 boolean operations AND operator 495 AND MASK function 524 F_ TRIG function block 588 NOT operator 514 ODD function 551 OR operator 516 R_TRIG function block 591 RS function block 593 SR function block 598 XOR operator 518 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index BREAK resource state 291 breakpoints on step activation SFC 312 on step deactivation SFC 313 on transition SFC 314 removing step by step mode 301 setting step by step mode 301 setting removing for steps and transitions SFC 311 viewing step by step mode 307 browser for cross references 355 manipulating in simulator 326 browsing POUs of a project 357 building code for POUs 346 for projects 345 for resources projects 347 builds stopping projects resources and POUs 348 c C source code implications of generating 351 CAL operator for IL 485 calculating cross references 357 calling function blocks from IL CAL operator 485 function blocks from transitions 413 function blocks in FBD 433 functions from IL 483 functions from transitions 412 functions in FBD 433 CASE OF ELSE END CASE ST basic statements 462 cell level validation 153 changing coils and contacts types LD elements 263 635 channels in I O devices freeing 174 mapping 172 wiring 172 CHAR function 528 checking in Workbench element
92. or another Project Warning Connect block must have been called in current cycle before the URCV_S call This CFB receives a string from one USEND _ S instance Previously received string is overwritten If string is successfully received then NDR is set to TRUE during one cycle If an error occurs the ERROR output parameter is set to TRUE and the status is set in the STATUS parameter STATUS can have the following values STATUS Description Receive successfully completed Waiting for message Invalid identifier 0 i 2 3 Not ready for receive 6 Waiting for message 7 Dialog has failed See example in the description of the CONNECT Block USEND_S USEND_S DONE ERROR STATUS Arguments REQ BOOL Send request on rising edge ID DINT Identification of the communication channel R ID STRING Identification of the remote CFB inside the channel DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 613 SD STRING String to send DONE BOOL If TRUE function performed successfully ERROR BOOL If TRUE new non zero STATUS received STATUS DINT Last detected status Description Send a string to a remote or local Resource of current Project or another Project Warning Connect block must have been called in current cycle before the USEND S call This CFB sends a string to one URCV_S instance on rising edge of REQ If string is successfully sent then DONE is set If an error occurs the output parameter ERROR is set to TRUE and th
93. password IXL clients not having the target password cannot access the target AE The configuration is accessible the target recognizes the password XL clients having the target password can access the target To specify access control for a configuration You set access control for a configuration in the configuration s Security properties Configuration Properties l 2 i X General Hardware Security Password Confirm pazzword Warming Password will not be changed on the target ou need to be on line to do so gt Inthe Password field enter the password for the configuration then reenter the password in the Confirm Password field Note You can only change a password while in real time or debug mode Otherwise the password embedded on the target remains unchanged 118 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Configuration Description A free format text description of the configuration To edit the configuration description 1 Right click on the configuration title bar The contextual menu appears 2 Choose Edit Description 3 Edit the description as required DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 119 Networks Networks provide the means for communication between configurations Configurations need to communicate when bindings have been defined within them Configurations are connected to the network The target attached to the configuration must support the network the
94. program is shown as an icon beside the program name Sequential Function Chart SFC SFC Editor a Flow Chart FC FC Editor 96 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Structured Text ST Multi language Editor Ladder Diagram LD Multi language Editor ro fa Function Block Diagram FBD Multi language Editor Instruction List IL Multi language Editor Within a resource there are certain restrictions on the relative positions of programs within the hierarchy e All SFC and FC programs must be adjacent within the hierarchy e SFC Child or FC Sub programs must use the same language as their parent When using SFC programs in a resource you may need to change the SFC dynamic behavior factors defined for the resource For details on the SFC dynamic behavior factors see page 60 You can move or copy programs written in ST LD and FBD to the Functions section and programs written in SFC ST LD and FBD to the Function Blocks section You can also move or copy functions and function blocks to the Programs section When moving or copying a program to the Function or Function Blocks sections all local variables defined in the program are converted to function or function block parameters respectively Note To call a POU written with a different language from SFC or FC program call a function or function block written in ST LD FBD or IL DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 97 Functions Any program can call a Funct
95. read only mode check Read Only DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Importing and Exporting Workbench Elements You can import and export Workbench elements 1 e projects configurations resources and POUs from one project to another When exporting an element you copy the element from the project and create a compressed exchange file PXF holding all data except for spy lists and step by step debug information Therefore enabling you to copy and paste elements from one project to another When importing and exporting elements having access control password definitions are retained To export a Workbench element 1 Depending on the element type do one of the following steps For projects from the File menu choose Export then Project For configurations resources and POUs select the element either from the link architecture or hardware architecture view from the File menu choose Export then the element type 2 In the Export window select a directory in which to store the compressed exchange file then click Start 3 To close the window when the export is complete click Close To import a Workbench element You can only import Workbench elements that have previously been exported and stored as compressed exchange files You cannot import elements having the same name as those in a project Before importing an element you can choose to create an automatic backup of your project 1 From the Fil
96. s binding list toolbar click In the Consumer Binding List editor select an external binding from the list then click In the Binding editor make the necessary changes Deleting External Variable Bindings You delete external bindings from the consumer resource To delete an existing external binding 1 In the External Binding List window select the binding link to edit in the Consumer groups section From the Consumer Group s binding list toolbar click In the Consumer Binding List editor select an external binding from the list then click ay DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 89 Parameters The Parameters component contains the IO Wiring and Defined words sub components For details on I O Wiring see page 155 For details on the Defined Words Tree see page 130 Fa Parameters pa P I O Wiring Defined Words I O Wiring Double clicking on this item opens the I O Wiring Tool to select I O devices and connect variables to them Defined Words Double clicking on this item opens the Dictionary on the Defined Words Tree 90 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Variable Groups Variables Groups provide a method of managing variables and logically sorting them within a resource The variable groups are shown in the Variables Tree their contents are defined within the Dictionary Variables grid For information on the variables tree see page 127 Creating Variable Groups You create va
97. select a variable from the Select Variable dialog by choosing Auto Input from the Options menu You can also choose to enter variable names manually by choosing Manual Input You can resize variable blocks 266 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Function Block F3 Accesses the block selector enabling the insertion of a block into the workspace Blocks can be function blocks RAS device or IEC 61131 functions RAS device or IEC 61131 or operators Inputs and outputs can be connected to variables contacts or coils or other block inputs or outputs Formal parameter short names are displayed inside the block When moving the cursor over a selected function block or instance of a function block its comment is displayed as a tooltip Furthermore when moving over a parameter its data type and comment is displayed as a tooltip TIME blinking period Blinking boolean signal You can resize function blocks Link FL er l l Connection links are drawn between elements in the diagram a o Negation connection links are equivalent to placing a NOT block on a direct link Both direct links and negated links are always drawn from an output to an input point in the direction of the data flow Corner Fe User defined points may be inserted in the diagram that determine the routing of links First place a corner then add links to and from this point If no corner is placed the editor u
98. should only be used when necessary When unlocking resources currently opened by another user make sure the remote Workbench is no longer running The Workbench automatically assigns a user name to a project when running on a network The user name is displayed in the status bar and in the access control properties of the resources The assigned user name depends on the editing mode e In normal mode the user name is always UserName Administrator e In single resource mode the user name is the Windows login user name of the user editing the resource Resources currently opened by another user hold the name of that user in their properties In single resource mode a project is displayed in the link architecture view with the project and resource identification in the title bar of the single resource The hardware architecture view and binding list are not available In the dictionary view and the I O wiring view only the variables and wiring defined for the resource are displayed Variables bound to other resources as well as types and defined words are in read only mode While in single resource mode you can switch a project to debug or simulation mode nw D5800 Project1 demo project 1 Main send info to R2 Link architecture File Edit Insert Project Tools Debug Options Window Help EIE Eii R Parameters ii R Varlable Groups e Programs Am Main simple loop call to ComplexT est o L Addition simple add
99. the Function for functions only When an output is the name of the currently edited function it represents the assignment of the return value for the function returned to the calling program Input and output variables inputs and outputs of the blocks are wired together with connection lines or links Single lines may be used to connect two logical points of the diagram e An input variable and an input of a block e An output of a block and an input of another block e An output of a block and an output variable For information on variables see page 389 The connection is oriented meaning that the line carries associated data from the left end to the right end The left and right ends of the connection line must be of the same data type Multiple right connection also called divergence can be used to broadcast an information from its left end to each of its right ends All the ends of the connection must be of the same data type For information on data types see page 377 430 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual RETURN Statement The lt RETURN gt keyword may occur as a diagram output It must be connected to a Boolean output connection point of a block The RETURN statement represents a Conditional End of the program if the output of the box connected to the statement has the Boolean value TRUE the end remaining part of the diagram is not executed Example gt auta mode _ l aam _ RETURN
100. the library 3 Select a template 4 Click OK Using Libraries in a Project Projects can use functions and function blocks from one or more libraries You need to create libraries before using them Furthermore you need to define a project s dependencies 1 e the set of libraries the project will use before using a library s defined elements A project can depend on more than one library You can also add dependencies to third party library projects However to enable their use you need to license third party library projects Otherwise their dependency appears invalid 282 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Library functions and function blocks can refer to some global defined words or data types defined in the library In such a case these defined words and data types from the library can also be used in the project A library cannot use functions and function blocks from another library In other words you cannot define external dependencies for a library However a function or function block from a library can call other functions or function blocks from the same library Furthermore functions or function blocks from libraries can call C written functions and function blocks defined for the corresponding target All functions and function blocks within a project including those coming from libraries must have unique names When more than one uses the same name the following conditions apply e Ifthe func
101. the selection of TLP numeric point locations from the ROCLINK 800 configuration file for use as TLP variables in the DS800 environment Before defining TLP variables you need to link the configuration to a ROCLINK 800 configuration file and set the configuration target definition property to the applicable RAS device target DS800 automatically performs the wiring from defined TLP variables to TLP devices Each TLP variable is assigned a TLP device Window s Development Plattor ROC LINKA Cong eration Point Type Logical Number Parameter Undefined 1 System Variables Logon Parameters License Key Information ROC Comm Ports 1 FID Mode 2 Loop Period 3 Actual Loop Period 4 Action on Process Variable Failure FST Parameters 5 Discrete Output Control G T 8 9 Reset Mode Manual Tracking Primary Input Point Primary Process arable 10 Primary Setpoint Point 11 Primary Setpoint FST Register Tage Soft Point Parameters Configurable Opeode Power Control Parameters Station Parameters 12 Primary Setpoint Low Limit 117 Modbus Configuration Parameters 13 Primary Setpoint High Limit 118 Modbus Register to TLF Mapping 14 Primary Setpoint Maximum Change Aate 119 Modbus Event Alarm and History Ta 15 Primary Proportional Gain 120 Modbus Master Modem Configuration 16 Primary Integral Gain 110 0 0 AC10 m F Pead ge wite y OK X Cancel e Po
102. to real time mode execute one cycle go to the next step only when step by step mode is instantiated DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 291 Resource State Description STEPPING The resource is in step by step mode Possible operations are switch the resource to cycle to cycle mode returning the resource to the start of its cycle without executing the remaining code execute one cycle execute the current step and go to the next one locate the current step switch the resource to real time mode STEPPING ERROR The resource is in stepping error mode This state is caused when an invalid operation occurs such as a division by 0 or a bound check error Possible operations are locate the current step to debug it switch the resource to cycle to cycle mode returning the resource to the start of its cycle without executing the remaining code The BREAK STOP and ERROR states are possible while in cycle to cycle mode I Os and bindings are done but POUs are not executed A complete cycle is executed when you execute one cycle The STEPPING and STEPPING ERROR states are possible while in step by step debugging mode The existence of code on the configuration is indicated with the following text CODE The resource is not running but the code exists disk or PROM on the configuration NOCODE The code does not exist on the configuration On a running resource when the version of code in the project differs from the
103. to viewing events for the current day click below the calendar To start the Events Viewer from a command line You can set the Events Viewer to start for a given Workbench project from a command line using the following syntax Events Viewer P full_directory_path The executable file for the Events Viewer is installed in the following location Program Files Emerson DS800 bin EventsViewer exe 178 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual The Events Viewer needs to be started in it s location directory For example C gt cd Program Files Emerson DS800 Bin C gt EventsViewer P Program Files Emerson Projects DS800 Prj MyProject You can also start the Events Logger from a command line DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 179 Language Editors The Workbench holds several language editors having some Common Editor Features for use with the many supported languages SFC Editor FC Editor Multi language Editor Composite IEC 61499 Editor Common Editor Features Each Editor in the Workbench has a similar and consistent interface using standard Windows layout and functionality for example menus toolbars The Dictionary listing variables that can be used in the current POU or used to declare new variables can be opened from any Editor Building POU Code and starting Test Mode can also be performed from all the Editors Printing from an Editor launches the Document Generator with elements specific to that
104. toolbar an 1 cea x Project3 E7 v Sf X gt From L variable n variable Type t Network aa lt iman Tmemax omp 3 Flash __ TimePrag mme ETC a To access the Binding List window 1 From the Window menu choose project _name Link Architecture The link architecture view appears displaying existing resources and their data links 2 Do one of the following Click g Double click a data link joining two resources DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 71 Resource binding Grid The Resource binding grid on the left side of the Binding List window displays the data links between resources The first column and the top row display the available resource s numbers The resource display order depends on their configuration numbers When working in the Resource binding grid you can perform various tasks using the mouse or keyboard commands Description Mouse Keyboard Move into the grid Select cells Arrows keys Select an entire row Select a row header Shift space bar Select an entire column Select a column header Ctrl space bar Select the entire grid Select an arrow on the top left of the grid Shift Ctrl space bar Switch to the Click on the Variable binding grid Tab Variable binding grid Variable binding grid The Variable binding grid on the right side of the window enables you to manage variable bindings The variable binding grid manages the bindings between variables The gri
105. transitions 410 for downloading resource code 293 in FC charts described 420 configurations accessing details for previous versions of 366 accessing the properties window for 114 checking in 363 comparing versions of 365 controlling development access for 118 controlling target access for 118 creating history reports for 366 creating in project 110 defining target properties for 117 deleting from a project 111 editing descriptions of 119 general properties for 115 getting previous versions of 365 identification of 115 636 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual inserting resources in 112 managing 110 moving in hardware architecture view 112 moving resources between 113 viewing the history of 364 CONNECT function block 579 connection lines in Ladder diagrams 436 connections configurations to networks creating 123 deleting 124 described 123 connectors Flow Chart described 424 linking elements 244 constant expressions boolean 381 double integer 382 real 382 short integer 381 string 383 timer 383 consuming variables viewing for internal bindings 77 consumption error variables 68 contacts LD elements changing types of 263 inserting in FBD POUs 270 on the left inserting 261 on the right inserting 261 contextual menus accessing 25 convergences SFC elements deleting branches from 220 double described 402 inserting new branches in 219 linking and placing in chart 217 single described
106. with each channel in all I O devices sets the numerical display of values activates or deactivates the automatic saving of changes to the Simulator including the position and look of all I O device windows These changes are saved in the current project directory 323 Window Cascade displays the I O device windows ina cascading manner Tile displays the I O device windows in a tiling manner Help Contents accesses the online help Search for Help On not currently supported About displays product and version information Support Info not currently supported Toolbar ie T z n T m1 lel ae D 0 E 141 E 324 shows or hides the Simulator s browser display the variable names associated with each channel in all I O devices displays integer values in the hexadecimal format displays integer values in the decimal format sets real values to be rounded off to one digit after the decimal point Otherwise values appear in scientific notation 1 0E 2 format sets real values to be rounded off to two digits after the decimal point sets real values to be rounded off to three digits after the decimal point sets real values to be rounded off to four digits after the decimal point sets real values to be rounded off to five digits after the decimal point DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual a sets the I O device windows to appear in a cascading manner sets the I O device windows to appear
107. 00 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual CONNECT CONNEC T EN_C VALID ERROR FARTHER STATUS ID Arguments EN C BOOL Enable connection PARTNER STRING Name of the remote communication partner VALID BOOL If TRUE connection ID is valid ERROR BOOL If TRUE new non zero status received STATUS DINT Last detected status ID DINT Identification of the communication Channel Description Creates a connection with a remote or local Resource of current Project or another Project and manages the exchanges for blocks USEND S and URCV S For details on the USEND S block see page 613 For details on the URCV_S block see page 612 It creates a communication channel identifier ID This identifier is required in all others communication function blocks URCV_S or USEND S PARTNER parameter is a string with the following format ResourceNumber Address Example 1 123 45 67 89 Connection with the ETCP driver to Resource 1 at address 123 45 67 89 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 579 If the Resource is on the same Configuration its number is enough to identify it e g 1 On a rising edge of EN _C parameter the CONNECT Block establishes the communication with the remote partner The VALID parameter is set to TRUE until the communication is available Every time the status changes the output parameter ERROR is set to TRUE during one cycle and the new status is set in the STATUS parame
108. 00 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Dictionary View The Dictionary is an editing tool using tree views and grids for the declaration of the variables functions and function block parameters user types and defined words of the project The various components are sorted in a tree like hierarchy e g by resource or by Type The Tree name is displayed on the window title bar The four dictionary tree views are Variables Tree inal Parameters Tree Types Tree Defined Words Tree Note You need to declare variables before proceeding with the I O Wiring process To switch to the Dictionary view gt Do one of the following steps From the Project menu choose either Types Variables Function Function Block Parameters or Defined Words Note The choices available differ depending on whether you are in the hardware architecture or link architecture views On the Window Buttons toolbar click i Open a variable group To switch to the Dictionary view from a language editor Opening the Dictionary from an Editor opens the Variable Tree and grid for the POU being edited DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 125 gt Do one of the following steps From the File menu choose Dictionary On the Standard Buttons toolbar click ii Appearance The Dictionary view is displayed maximized in the workspace The menus and toolbar now reflect Dictionary options only The left of the dictionary works
109. 00 templates EmptyLibmonoresource templates A directory per hardware configuration A directory per resource 29 Bi Li Bi Bi Bi Mi EmptyLibmultiresource j lt configuration gt lt gt y resource EmptyPrjmonoresource j lt configuration gt lt resource gt y esource EmptyPrjmultiresource j lt configuration gt lt r r gt esource Libmonoresource j lt configuration gt m lt rce gt resource Libmultiresource j lt configuration gt lt gt resource Prjmonoresource j lt configuration gt lt resource gt y esource EmptyLibmultiresource templates A directory per hardware configuration A directory per resource EmptyPrjmonoresource templates A directory per hardware configuration A directory per resource EmptyPrjmultiresource templates A directory per hardware configuration A directory per resource Libmonoresource templates A directory per hardware configuration A directory per resource Libmultiresource templates A directory per hardware configuration A directory per resource Prjmonoresource templates A directory per hardware configuration A directory per resource DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Prjmultiresource Shared Error Reporting Help 2 1 Sentinel lt configuration gt ay lt resource gt Prjmultiresource templates A directory per hardware configuration A
110. 02 TLP GET SINT 603 TLP GET STRING 604 TLP GET TLP 605 TLP SET DINT 606 TLP SET REAL 607 TLP SET SINT 608 TLP SET STRING 609 TOF 609 TON 610 TP 611 URCV_S 612 USEND S 613 working with 99 functions ABS 522 ACOS 523 AND MASK 524 ASCII 525 ASIN 526 ATAN 527 calling from action blocks 409 calling from IL 483 calling from ST programs 456 calling from transitions 412 CHAR 528 COS 530 creating in resources 99 CURRENT ISA DATE 531 defining access control for 104 DELETE 532 described 371 EXPT 533 FIND 534 INSERT 536 inserting in POUs 203 LEFT 537 LIMIT 539 LOG 540 manipulating in resources 100 MAX 541 MID 542 MIN 543 MLEN 544 MOD 546 MUX4 547 MUX8 549 NOT MASK 550 ODD 551 OR MASK 553 POW 554 RAND 555 REPLACE 556 reusing through libraries 281 RIGHT 558 ROL 559 ROR 560 SEL 562 SHL 563 SHR 564 SIN 565 SQRT 566 standard summary of 521 SUB DATE DATE 567 TAN 569 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual TRUNC 570 working with 98 XOR MASK 571 G general properties for configurations 115 for resources 55 generating C source code implications of 351 debug information program level 107 debug information resource level 55 symbols monitoring information 107 TIC code 55 getting previous versions of Workbench elements 365 GFREEZE statement 470 GKILL statement 469 go to line ST and IL POUs 279 goto steps or transitions SFC elements 227 sym
111. 1 User Manual Description Integer bit to bit negation mask Example FBD example with NOT MASK Operators i 1 IM F ST equivalence result NOT MASK 16 1234 result is 16 FFFF EDCB IL equivalence LD 16 1234 NOT MASK ST result ODD odd Arguments IN DINT Any signed integer value Q BOOL TRUE if input value is odd FALSE if input value is even Description Tests the parity of an integer result is odd or even DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 551 Example FBD Program using ODD Function ST Equivalence If Not ODD value Then Return End if value value 1 makes value always even IL Equivalence LD value ODD RETNC LD value ADD 1 ST value 552 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual OR_MASK or mask Arguments IN DINT Musthave integer format MSK DINT Musthave integer format Q DINT Bit to bit logical OR between IN and MSK Description Integer OR bit to bit mask Example FBD example with OR MASK Operators or mask ST Equivalence parity OR MASK xvalue 1 makes value always odd result OR MASK 16 abc 16 f 0f equals 16 fbf IL equivalence LD xvalue OR MASK 1 ST parity DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 553 LD 16 abc OR MASK 16 f0f ST result 5 Arguments IN REAL EXP REAL Q REAL Descripti
112. 138 printing the grid of the 141 renumbering addresses in the 140 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index resizing columns and rows in the 132 selecting rows and elements in the 132 sorting the grid of the 138 types grid described 144 types tree described 129 variables grid described 142 variables tree described 127 working with the grids of the 131 direct coils in Ladder diagrams described 443 contacts in Ladder diagrams described 440 direction variables 389 directly represented variables 387 directory structure installation 29 displaying errors and information output window 24 I O device window headers 325 the status bar the 25 tooltips for function blocks 267 tooltips for variables 266 variable comments 279 divergences SFC elements deleting branches from 220 double described 402 inserting new branches in 219 linking and placing 217 single described 400 division operator 492 DO WHILE structures inserting FC elements 242 docking toolbars 14 double convergences described 402 divergences described 402 integer constant expressions 382 integer variables 390 downloading resources code onto targets 293 duplicating rows Dictionary grid 139 dynamic behavior for Flow Chart diagrams 426 setting SFC limits 59 SFC charts described 414 639 editing descriptions for configurations 119 descriptions for POUs 108 descriptions for resources 66 external bindings 89 internal bindings 80 level 2 programming SFC element
113. 2 1 Workbench 243 Connector FE am K A Connector is used to link to an element without specifically drawing the link For details about FC connectors see page 424 The Connect To Dialog Box is automatically displayed Connect to Connect to U2 Action E Actions C E E cd E 04 Action H Tests El SubPrags fy Os Other eno D8 End 1 Expand or collapse sections in the tree by clicking on the m or E Buttons 2 Select an element then click OK I O Specific F2 oo An I O Specific action is one that contains hardware dependent code they must be re written for different I Os For details about FC I O specific actions see page 423 Begin O01 Action 244 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Comment Fiz ct Comments are free format text inserted anywhere in the Flow Chart for documentation puposes only For details about FC comments see page 424 L pen Enel Sub Program F10 n IEI When inserting a Sub program symbol a dialog box is displayed to select the Sub program from the list within the current program For details about FC sub programs see page 422 Begin f osu 01 SubProg End Note Double clicking on a Sub program opens the selection dialog box to change the sub program reference DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 245 Managing Elements Flow Chart elements can be cut copied and pasted with
114. 2 1 Language Reference 417 FC BEGIN A Begin symbol must appear at the beginning of a Flow Chart program It is unique and cannot be omitted It represents the initial state of the chart when it is activated Below is the drawing of a Begin symbol The Begin symbol always has a connection on the bottom to the other objects of the chart A flow chart is not valid if no connection is drawn from Begin to another object FC END An End symbol must appear at the end of a Flow Chart program It is unique and cannot be omitted It represents the final state of the chart when its execution has been completed Below is the drawing of an End symbol End The End symbol generally has a connection on the top to the other objects of the chart A flow chart may have no connection to the End object always looping chart The End object is still visible at the bottom of the chart in this case 418 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual FC Flow Links A flow link is a line that represents a flow between two points of the diagram A link is always terminated by an arrow Below is the drawing of a flow link Example Two links cannot be connected to the same source connection point DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 419 FC Actions An action symbol represents actions to be performed An action is identified by a number and a name Below is the drawing of an Action symbol non Name Two
115. 2 1 Workbench 61 Resource Network Parameters You need to define network parameters attached to the resource for each available network You specify a resource s network parameters on the Network tab of the Resources Properties window Resource Properties i X General Target Code Settings Network Extended Security Network fHsD ka Help Host System Driver for local binding Cancel Apply Note The parameters appearing in the list reflect those attached to the resource Some parameters are read only However when a resource is attached to a network not requiring parameters the list appears empty You can also access the online help by clicking Help For the HSD network the current definition is the following The consumer computes the time elapsed between production and consumption and tests if it less than the ValidityTime parameter specified for the producer resource in the workbench The user must be careful when specifying this value to take into account the cycle time of the producer resource This resource cannot emit values at a period shorter that its cycle time If this time out is detected the consumer sets the error variable to ISA HSD KVB ER TIMEOUT value 62 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual For the ETCP network the current definition is the following On the consumer side if no data is received during the time specified in the Timeout parameter value then the error v
116. 4 al gp 2 temporary inl temporary temporary ino temporary result ANY TO DINT 42n2 9 result t 27ANY TO DINT 1In2F7 temporary result result 2 ANY TO DINT in2 ANY TO DINT inl result 4 ANY TO DINT in2 2 ANY TO DINT inl temporary result result 4 ANY TO DINT in2 2 ANY TO DINT in1l ANY TO DINT in0 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Calling Function Blocks CAL Operator Operation calls a function block Allowed CN modifiers Operand Name of the function block instance The input parameters of the blocks must be assigned before the call using LD ST operations sequence Output parameters are known if used Example Calling function block SR SR1 is an instance of SR LD auto_mode AND start _cmd ST SR1 seti1 LD stop_cmd ST SR1 reset CAL SR1 LD SR1 Q1 ST command FBD equivalent We suppose R TRIG is an instance of R TRIG block and CTU1 is an instance of CTU block DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 485 LD ST CAL LD ST LDN ST LD ST CAL LD ST LD ST command R_TRIG1 clk R_TRIG1 R_TRIG1 Q CTU 1 seu auto mode CTU reset 100 CTU1 pv Cru CTU1 Q overflow CTU1 cv result FBD equivalent 486 auto mead a nn sgin i R ESE F Py DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Standard Operators
117. 5 renenesterosienahetavacsacesaasssoavesneucs nieudenaemonncans 213 CLEC Ux cans cs a a e a sama tiateeanneneass 273 TRS SIS doa iocitalas cassie oe ac asta ag aA os waco a Tne aes 274 Wd OF Redo id ss5sxscsierceseseadestacslecaacateaaeudaegasaseus eae ae anicnssaeeea eae 274 INAON C24 c Ser oka tetas ecpeden sense esacasapasnantu a odo aaes tet seanpon souseananes 245 CCU ad siuca cates canieana ud san ad delet ida Panea ea A caaansetnacasek 219 COD eene ar e E N ET 276 PASC E E E E E E S E A AT 276 Paste Speca inneren E wolasucvannadheasiaomeans 217 DEEE eee ren eee Ren eee re ee a ee ee 211 Select Aeren a A ee a ne 278 Find Matching Name casiccrcscschcsasicacdaaascantacanrcaateassniedeataswesanerceuses 278 Find Matehing C lln a eer natacs 278 GOAO TANE ic eeessrets caters tases tbearaesdastaedieiacataa A A r 279 Display Hide CoMmMeEntS ennie eaa 279 Eib eSa E a eas A ee ee 281 CENE EIDE Senesni r E E asa eees 281 Usmo Libraries 1a Project cctesoxctct denancch a a a done 282 De DUT oE E 289 Staus Inora Oee co nae deel ee aed ata 290 Download 2 ueriaiaianeniscavedetecassee cone ane aca Ae ees a a 293 Debu SMAI epee a hsca esau ee rea aise eis wees ee esr 295 STALL SOPA RESO Geane a 297 Resource Execunon Modes iiinsunnnsii ie baa na eee eet Soe 298 Realtim NIG IS cesses acti cara aa e 298 Cy ClealozCy Cle MOC vias cts tata ca Aertel ieee tia 299 viii DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Step by Step ModE s 5 is aecl ha
118. 59 cycle to cycle execution mode resources 299 cyclic and sequential operations 369 data conversion ANY TO BOOL operator 496 ANY TO DINT operator 499 ANY TO REAL operator 501 ANY TO SINT operator 498 ANY TO STRING operator 504 ANY TO TIME operator 502 TMR operator 517 data links internal bindings creating 74 deleting 76 hiding and showing 77 data manipulation AVERAGE function block 575 LIMIT function 539 MAX function 541 MIN function 543 MUX4 function 547 MUX8 function 549 SEL function 562 database commands DBG CLR GET ERR 585 DBG CLR SET ERR 585 DBG GET ERR 586 DBG SET ERR 586 SOFT POINT READ 596 SOFT POINT WRITE 597 TLP GET DINT 601 TLP GET REAL 602 TLP GET SINT 603 TLP GET STRING 604 TLP GET TLP 605 TLP SET DINT 606 TLP SET REAL 607 TLP SET SINT 608 TLP SET STRING 609 database level validation 154 DBG CLR GET ERR function block 585 DBG CLR SET ERR function block 585 DBG GET ERR function block 586 DBG_ SET ERR function block 586 debug information generating at program level 107 information generating at resource level 55 mode starting for the project 295 toolbar in language editors 187 toolbar in main environment 17 debugging instances of function blocks 334 modes for a project 289 declared instances of function blocks debugging 334 variables modifying in online changes 329 defined words described 392 grid for Dictionary 145 parameters component for 90 defining external bindings 88 internal bindin
119. 6 e Detect errors enables the storing of errors You need to define the number of entries 1 e the size of the queue FIFO in which detected errors are stored e Cycle to Cycle Real Time indicates whether programs are executed during the cycle or not For Cycle to Cycle inputs are read but the code is not executed during the cycle time This option is useful for testing I Os e Memory for Retain indicates the location where retained values are stored the required syntax depends on the implementation DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 59 You can also specify advanced settings for resources e SFC dynamic behavior limits e Memory size for online changes Advanced settings a X SFC dynamic behaviour limite Gain factor E a Offset factor fi a Memory size for on line changes Code size 322000 User variable size 2048 To access advanced settings gt Click Advanced SFC Dynamic Behavior Limits The SFC dynamic behavior limits determine the amount of memory allocated by the target at initialization time to manage SFC dynamic behavior 1 e token moving The amount of allocated memory is calculated as a linear relation with the number of SFC POUs Alloc Mem bytes N NbElmt sizeof typVa NbElmt GainFactor NbOfSFC OffsetFactor Where N 5 constant linked to SFC engine design typVa 16 bits in the medium memory model 32 bits in the large memory model NbElmt re
120. 7 events logging of run time 175 events viewing of run time 176 T TAN function 569 targets cleaning code stored on 336 defining compilation options for 55 defining control access for 118 specifying for configurations 117 templates for libraries 281 templates specifying for projects 34 testing projects 295 tests inserting FC elements 240 third party libraries licensing 282 TIC code generating 55 time operations CURRENT ISA DATE function 531 SUB DATE DATE function 567 TOF function block 609 TON function block 610 TP function block 611 timer constant expressions 383 variables 391 timing information accessing 307 title bar of main environment 4 TLP variables defining 146 TLP_GET_DINT function block 601 TLP_GET REAL function block 602 TLP_GET_ SINT function block 603 TLP GET STRING function block 604 TLP GET _TLP function block 605 656 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual TLP_ SET DINT function block 606 TLP_ SET REAL function block 607 TLP SET SINT function block 608 TLP SET STRING function block 609 TMR operator 517 TOF function block 609 TON function block 610 toolbars available in language editors 184 debugging main environment 17 docking moving and showing 14 I O wiring main environment 20 layers view main environment 19 options main environment 20 simulator 324 standard main environment 15 version source control main environment 20 window buttons main environment 19 tooltips displaying
121. 8 viewing breakpoints step by step mode 307 history of Workbench elements from version source control 364 internal bindings 77 level 2 windows of FC chart elements 250 run time system events 176 the lock status of variables 304 the project tree 353 version information 307 virtual attribute setting for I O devices 171 WHILE DO END WHILE ST basic statements short integer 390 463 string 391 l WHILE DO structures inserting FC charts 242 system accessing 307 window timer 391 buttons toolbar in main environment 19 headers displaying for I O devices 325 wiring channels in I O wiring 172 tool opening 155 tree described 127 variables defining TLP 146 version information viewing 307 658 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Workbench elements exporting between projects 43 importing between projects 43 uploading from targets 46 Workbench overview of 1 working with function blocks 99 functions 98 programs 96 workspace adjusting zoom in 23 managing for language editors 197 of a resource window 49 X X Y ratio setting for language editors 197 XOR operator 518 XOR MASK function 571 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index 659 Copyright Information in these pages is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Emerson Process Management No part of these pages may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purp
122. 8 security for configurations 118 for POUs 104 for projects 41 for resources 64 state of resources within projects 36 SEL function 562 selecting elements in the multi language editor 273 project items for printing 338 rows and elements in the Dictionary 132 variables in a spy list 317 semaphore manipulation SOFT_POINT_READ function block 596 semaphore manipulation SOFT_POINT_WRITE function block 597 sequential operations 369 set coils Ladder diagrams 445 SET PRIORITY function block 594 setting access control for resources 64 breakpoints for steps and transitions SFC 311 breakpoints step by step mode 301 cycle time of resources debug mode 303 prompting to save before exiting 26 652 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual real or virtual attributes for I O devices 171 refresh rate for resources 290 reloading of last project when starting 26 SFC Sequential Function Chart actions within steps described 407 adding action blocks to level 2 programming 229 breakpoints on step activation 312 breakpoints on step deactivation 313 breakpoints on transition 314 breakpoints toolbar in language editors 189 changing hierarchy level of child programs 103 creating child programs 102 deleting action blocks from level 2 programming 233 deleting branches from convergences divergences 220 dynamic behavior described 414 editing code for transitions 231 editing level 2 programming 228 editor described 209 GFREEZE
123. 800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 209 Appearance Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbar i SFC 1 Main Main simple loop call to ComplexTest E File Edit Tools Debug Options Window Help fs PUE False AND Workspace 7 gt s Output St atus B ar For Help press F1 SEENE HF EAE ERBE v mf 2 210 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Menu Bar Some options are available as keyboard commands File Open Close Save Build Program Stop Build Program Dictionary Description Print Exit Edit Cut Copy Paste Delete Undo Redo Find Replace in POUs Go to Rename Step Transition Renumber Add Action Block Ctrl O Alt F4 Ctrl S Alt F3 Ctrl D Ctrl K Ctrl P Ctri Q Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V DEL Ctrl Z Ctrl Y Ctrl F Ctrl G Ctrl R DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench opens an existing POU closes the POU saves the current POU builds the code for the current POU stops the build in progress for the current POU opens the dictionary filtered for the current POU accesses the program description prints the current POU leaves the language editor removes the selected item and places it on clipboard takes a copy of the selected item and places it on the clipboard inserts the contents of the clipboard into the selected item removes the selected item cancels the last action restores the last cancelled a
124. Before renaming projects make sure to close all Workbench windows such as language editors and browsing tools To rename a project 1 From the File menu choose Rename Project The Rename Project dialog box appears x Mame Project Comment Cancel 2 Change the name and comment as required 3 Click OK The directory structure containing the project is renamed when you save changes to the project DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 39 Adding a Project Description You can include a text description for a project To edit the project description gt From the Tools menu choose Edit Project Description Printing Projects You can print projects using the Document Generator For details on the Document Generator see page 337 To print the current Project gt From the File menu choose Print The document generator appears with a standard list of elements to be printed for a complete project 40 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Project Access Control For project security you can control access using a password You can also apply the read only mode to the entire project In read only mode users not having the password will have read only access to the project When opening a project in read only mode all resources and POUs making up the project are set to read only mode However individual resources and POUs making up projects can have their own access control For instance a r
125. Build Project performs the Build Resource command for all resources of the project and builds information used to recognize configurations on networks Note While in single resource mode you cannot build a resource having links to libraries located on a different computer The Build Resource command constructs the entire code of the resource Before generating anything this command checks the syntax of the declarations and programs of each resource Errors that cannot be detected during single program compiling are detected using these commands For example the IO Wiring and Binding Links are checked While performing builds the security state of unlocked resources and resources having no access control switches to read only mode Locked resources remain locked Programs which have already been checked with no errors detected and have not been modified since their last Build program operation are not re compiled Variable declaration verification and coherence checking are always performed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 347 Stopping Builds You can stop a build i e compilation in progress for a project resource or POU This feature is not available when using a PROPI interface When a build process is stopped it can be restarted without affecting the incremental or full compilation After a build is stopped online changes can be performed since a copy of the last build is kept until a complete new one is generated
126. CV and Emerson Process Management Ltd Remote Automation Solutions division UK are wholly owned subsidiaries of Emerson Electric Co doing business as Remote Automation Solutions RAS a division of Emerson Process Management ROC FloBoss ROCLINK Bristol Bristol Babcock ControlWave TeleFlow and Helicoid are trademarks of RAS AMS PlantWeb and the PlantWeb logo are marks of Emerson Electric Co The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of the Emerson Electric Co All other trademarks are property of their respective owners The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only While every effort has been made to ensure informational accuracy they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees express or implied regarding the products or services described herein or their use or applicability RAS reserves the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products at any time without notice All sales are governed by RAS terms and conditions which are available upon request RAS does not assume responsibility for the selection use or maintenance of any product Responsibility for proper selection use and maintenance of any RAS product remains solely with the purchaser and end user DS800 Development Suite 2 10 User Manual Table of Contents Workbench PPP Caran Ge oaa N 3 PE Ale ns Gh han ede care ches teats tetas enaesee oh nes eae N A 4 INV CHAU Barokas oee e tiaras
127. Channels editor displays the current mapping of channels for the device Channels map Map channels of 1 Dry Sim SimUutboo Peset a z119 CH14 Cancel 3 For each logical channel to map locate and double click its corresponding physical channel then from the drop down list assign the new physical channel by double clicking it 4 Click OK DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 173 Freeing Channels You can unwire one or all variables for a selected device To free one channel 1 Select a wired channel in the tree view 2 Do one of the following From the Edit menu choose Free I O device channel From the I O wiring toolbar click on the I O Wiring toolbar Press Delete To free all channels 1 Select a device in the tree view 2 Do one of the following From the Edit menu choose Free all I O device channels From the I O wiring toolbar click ee 174 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Run time System Events You can log run time system events on the Windows platform using the Events Logger and view these events using the Events Viewer You access the Events Logger and Events Viewer from the Workbench You can also start the logger and viewer from command lines Logging Events The Events Logger receives events from DS800 targets You can view these events using the Events Viewer Events are stored in a log file in Unicode format located in the Events Logger f
128. D Note For this Operator the number of inputs can be extended to more than two Arguments inputs BOOL output BOOL Boolean AND of the input terms Description Boolean AND between two or more terms Example FBD example with AND Operators AND O bi bii 02 Wit ST equivalence bol0 bil01 AND NOT bil02 bo5 b i51 AND bi52 AND bi53 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 495 IL equivalence LD bil01 current result bil0l ANDN bi102 current result bil01 AND not bil102 ST bol0 bolO current result LD a5 al current result bi5l1 amp bi52 current result bi51 AND bi52 amp bi53 current result DIS1 AND bi52 AND H153 ST bo5 bo5 current result ANY_TO_BOOL ANY TO BOOL IH r Arguments IN SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING any non Boolean value Q BOOL TRUE for non zero numerical value FALSE for zero numerical value TRUE for TRUE string FALSE for FALSE string Description Converts any variable to a Boolean variable 496 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD example with Convert to Boolean Operators ay TO BOOL ee aa O AR YO Pl Bi FALSE ST Equivalence ares ANY TO BOOL 10 ares is TRUE tres ANY TO BOOL t 0s tres is FALSE mres ANY TO BOOL FALSE mres is FALSE IL equivalence LD 10
129. DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 519 Standard Functions The following are the standard functions supported by the system Arithmetic Operations Binary operations Boolean operations Data manipulation String manipulation DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference ABS EXPT POW LOG MOD SQRT RAND TRUNC ACOS ASIN ATAN COS SIN TAN AND MASK OR MASK XOR MASK NOT MASK ROL ROR SHL SHR ODD MIN MAX LIMIT MUxX4 MUX8 SEL ASCII CHAR MLEN DELETE INSERT FIND REPLACE LEFT MID RIGHT Absolute value of a real value Exponent power calculation of real values Logarithm of a real value Modulo Square root of a real value Random value Truncate decimal part of a real value Arc cosine Arc sine Arc tangent of a real value Cosine Sine Tangent of a real value Integer bit to bit AND mask Integer bit to bit OR mask Integer bit to bit Exclusive OR mask Integer bit to bit negation Rotate Left Rotate Right an integer value Shift Left Shift Right an integer value Odd parity Minimum Maximum Limit Multiplexer 4 or 8 entries Binary selector Character gt ASCII code ASCII code gt Character Get string length Delete sub string Insert string Find sub string Replace sub string Extract left middle or right of a string 521 Time operations CURRENT ISA DATE Gets the current date SUB DATE DATE Compares two dates and gives the difference in TIME for
130. DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 491 IL equivalence LD ail01 SUB ail02 ST aolo LD ai51 SUB 1 SUB ai53 ST ao5 Arguments INI SINT DINT REAL IN2 SINT DINT REAL Q SINT DINT REAL Description can be of any integer or real format operand non zero integer or real value divisor INI and IN2 must have the same format integer or real division of IN1 by IN2 Division of two integer or real variables the first divided by the second 492 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD example with Division Operators ST Equivalence aol0 ail01 ail0O2 ao5 ai5 2 aid3 IL equivalence LD ailOl DIV ail0d2 ST aolo LD a1i5l DIV 2 DIV ai53 ST ao5 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 493 Arguments IN SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING Q SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING IN and Q must have the same format Description assignment of one variable into another one This Block is very useful to directly link a diagram input and a diagram output It can also be used with a Boolean negation line to invert the state of a line connected to a diagram output Example FBD example with assignment Operators ST equivalence ao23 ail bo100 NOT bil AND bi2 IL equivalence LD ailo ST ao23 LD bil 494 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual AND bi2 STN bo100 AN
131. Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 225 Paste Use the Paste command to place the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Pasted elements are automatically assigned sequentially numbered names To paste elements 1 From the Edit menu choose Paste CTRL V 2 Position the ghost 3 Click to paste at the new location OR 1 On the Standard toolbar click Gi 2 Position the ghost 3 Click to paste at the new location 226 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Delete To delete elements gt Select the element s then from the Edit menu choose Delete lt Delete gt Goto The step transition is selected in the level 1 To go to a step or transition in the current SFC program 1 From the Edit menu choose Goto 2 Inthe Goto Step Transition dialog select the element from the list then click OK Ix Goto a Step Trans i ooo Cancel DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 227 Level 2 The Level 2 window displays the coding for steps and transitions For steps the window displays the defined action blocks For transitions the window displays the defined conditions You can also display a second level 2 window for another step or transition When first coding steps you need to add action blocks ctrl flag FALSE fermenter level 0 0 fermenter temp 32 0 fermenter_ph 0 blower FALSE heat FAl SF zl ctrl flag TRUE To edit the Level 2 The Edit L
132. E when the Step activity signal becomes TRUE R on a Boolean Variable resets the Variable to FALSE when the Step activity signal becomes TRUE 404 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual The Boolean Variable must be an OUTPUT or a MEMORY variable The following SFC programming leads to the indicated behavior Qualifier S108 fo Adirerct spot a 5 SE Breset Variable Name S10 X is the activity of Step S10 Pulse Actions A pulse action is a list of instructions which are executed only once at the activation of the Step P1 Qualifier or executed only once at the deactivation of the Step PO Qualifier Instructions are written using the ST IL or LD syntax The following shows the results of a pulse Action with the P1 Qualifier Step Activity Execution DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 405 Example Qualifier Action Name Code nb edge nb edge 1 Non stored Actions A non stored normal action is a list of ST IL or LD instructions which are executed at each cycle during the whole active period of the step Instructions are written according to the used language syntax Non stored actions have the N qualifier The following is the results of a non stored Action Step Activity Execution 406 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example Qualifier Action Name Code nb edge nb edge 1 SFC Actions An SFC action is a child SFC sequenc
133. Editor DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 181 Appearance title bar W DGE 1 Main MyProgFBD O x menu bar File Edit Tools Debug Options Window Help lejl x toolbars SH ASB LA LOLEK Oh gt e fro ty a E N H eja rejk Inputs From Logics To Outputs o ooo workspace output window status bar Title Bar For help locating the title bar see the Appearance diagram The title bar displays the application name and filename of the active Program Control Icon At the left end of the title bar is the Control Icon which is used to access the Control Menu see following section Double clicking on the Control Icon closes the Editor Control Menu Clicking on the Control icon opens the Control Menu The Control Menu is used to position the Main Window or to exit 182 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Window Buttons The standard window buttons appear at the right end of the title bar Use these to resize or close the Window Menu Bar The Menu Bar contains the Editor s menus For help locating the menu bar see the Appearance diagram Each menu lists a family of selections each selection performs a specific action Note Menus that are not currently available are temporarily removed from the menu bar Menu Items not available are displayed in gray Using the Menus 1 Open a menu by clicking on it or by pressing lt Alt gt plus the letter that is un
134. Error 410 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Condition Programmed in LD The Ladder Diagram LD language can be used to describe the condition attached to a transition The diagram is composed of only one rung with one coil The coil value represents the transition s value Example SFC Program with LD programming for transitions RunMotError krez Condition Programmed in IL Instruction List IL programming may be directly used to describe an SFC condition according to the following syntax lt IL instruction gt lt IL instruction gt The value contained by the current result IL register at the end of the IL sequence causes the resulting of the condition to be attached to the Transition current result 0 or FALSE gt condition is FALSE current result lt gt 0or TRUE gt condition is TRUE DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 411 Example SFC program with a condition programmed in IL Condition name RunMotError IL Code LO Run ANON Error Calling Functions from a Transition Any Function written in ST LD or FBD or a C Function can be called to evaluate the condition attached to a Transition according to the following syntax in ST lt function gt The value returned by the Function must be Boolean and yields the resulting condition return value FALSE gt condition is FALSE return value TRUE gt condition is TRUE Example SFC prog
135. Example FBD Program using INSERT Function 536 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ST Equivalence MyName INSERT Mr JONES Frank 4 MyName is Mr Frank JONES IL Equivalence LD Mr JONES INSERT Frank 4 ST MyName LEFT left IH Wi P Arguments IN STRING Any non empty string NbC DINT Number of characters to be extracted This number cannot be greater than the length of the IN string Q STRING Left part of the IN string its length NbC empty string if NbC lt 0 complete IN string if NbC gt IN string length Description Extracts the left part of a string The number of characters to be extracted is given DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 537 Example FBD Program using LEFT and RIGHT Functions 12345676 complete string ST Equivalence complete string RIGHT 12345678 4 LEFT 12345678 4 complete string is 56781234 the value issued from RIGHT call is 5678 the value issued from LEFT call is 1234 IL Equivalence First done is call to LEFT LD 12345678 LEFT 4 ST sub string intermediate result LD 12345678 RIGHT 4 ADD sub string ST complete_string 538 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Arguments MIN DINT Minimum allowed value IN DINT Any signed integer value MAX DINT Maximum allowed value Q DINT Input value bounded to allowed range
136. Form A6126 Part Number D301174X012 March 2009 DS800 Development Suite Software User Manual Revision Tracking Sheet March 2009 This manual is periodically altered to incorporate new or updated information The date revision level of each page is indicated at the bottom of the page opposite the page number A major change in the content of the manual also changes the date of the manual which appears on the front cover Listed below is the date revision level of each page Page Revision All Pages 05 02 55 112 117 119 120 242 419 425 431 454 538 540 542 546 549 552 553 556 559 563 566 570 588 594 5950 08 02 All Pages 07 06 All Pages 03 09 2002 2009 Remote Automation Solutions division of Emerson Process Management All rights reserved NOTICE Remote Automation Solutions RAS division of Emerson Process Management shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors in this manual or omissions from this manual RAS MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THIS MANUAL AND IN NO EVENT SHALL RAS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PRODUCTION LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF REVENUE OR USE AND COSTS INCURRED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FOR CAPITAL FUEL AND POWER AND CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES Bristol Inc Bristol Canada BBI SA de
137. Function Blocks ccccsscccccccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 433 LSLS WAS eean E NA 435 Power Ratls and Connection Lites sissisodan iiaae 436 IM lip les Connection ernen ee ierdacatidatssdaran aadendasteaais 437 Basic Contacts and C O eaan a E S 439 Dre CONAC saros an r A E 440 Wy He ISO Ol UAC aae e a 440 xii DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Contact with Rising Edge Detection cccsseessscccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 Contact with Falling Edge Detection ccccccessessscccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 442 TOME CU OM aiin dyosesa deanna auaec T NTE 443 TEV CLC CC OI sss scasasns cc aseaaastanancnncnnses dev ans Suma alsisoaysahaesacaeetiashasaeesGordeaaeniessen 444 SECCO a A 445 RESET Collana ee e A A A 446 Coil with Rising Edge Detect omnepsinineiieiii a EA 447 Coil with Falling Edge Detection osnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsessssssssnnnnseneeeeeessssssssss 448 RETURN State MeN naan a E a 449 Jumps and Label Seaan E E E ea oeraso waoucsse eens 450 3 WB Sau 1 1 Jee ne ene N N ee 451 Sy Ea SUA ana a a a EEA ea 453 ST Main Oynar a A A A A E 453 Expressions and Parentheses roscssrsniiant n a EE 455 Functions or Function Block Callssi ssiiicicid sncd catoc tani eiadadateideeatendotd ss 456 Calling F Un CH OMS ere o a tates aReeorses 456 Calling Function BlOCKS criniera aceite eee 457 STF OPETI a ts Gtcee ne Gay OE 459 SFDI SALE a N A S O TAG 459 ASSO OMEN eoii E E EE T AE aauadaeniadeds 459 RETURA S E E
138. Groups You edit the contents of an existing producer variable groups from their originating resource To edit the contents of an existing producer variable group 1 Inthe Producer Groups list select a producer group 2 From the Producer s Group binding list toolbar click 3 Inthe Producer Binding List editor make the necessary changes then click OK Deleting Producer Variable Groups When deleting producer groups having producer variables used in external bindings in the consumer project the link between the consumer and producer resource shows an error gt To delete a producer group gt In the Producer Groups list select the producer group to remove then from the Producer s Group binding list toolbar click a DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 85 Linking Resources for External Bindings Before defining external variable bindings between resources you need to link the consumer and producer resources You link these resources from the consumer resource by identifying the project resource and producer group of variables holding the producer variables whose values are conveyed to the consumer variables A link between resources flows in one direction You can choose to use binding error variables To link resources for external variable bindings 1 From the External Binding List window double click in the Consumer Groups section The Consumer Binding List is displayed Consumer binding list i f 7
139. H Pos Code Arguments IN STRING Any non empty string Pos DINT Position of the selected character in set 1 len len is the length of the IN string Code DINT Code of the selected character in set 0 255 returns 0 is Pos is out of the string Description Gives the ASCII code of one character in a string Example FBD Program using ASCH Function DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 525 Firstar ST Equivalence FirstChr ASCII message 1 FirstChr is the ASCII code of the first character of the string IL Equivalence LD message ASCII 1 ST FirstChr ASIN asin Arguments IN REAL Mustbe in set 1 0 1 0 Q REAL Arc sine of the input value in set PI 2 PI 2 0 0 for invalid input Description Calculates the Arc sine of a real value Example FBD Program using SIN and ASIN Functions 526 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual resut ST Equivalence Sine SIN angle result ASIN sine result is equal to angle IL Equivalence LD angle SIN ST Sine ASIN ST result atan IH F Arguments IN REAL Any real value Q REAL Arc tangent of the input value in set PI 2 PI 2 0 0 for invalid input Description Calculates the arc tangent of a real value DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 527 Example FBD Program using TAN and ATAN Function
140. L before being written to the output value 602 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual TLP_GET_SINT TLP_GET_SINT t p Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments point type t DINT logical 1 DINT parameter p DINT vout SINT Description Refers to point type that contains the parameter to be read Instance of specified point type Parameter to get Value of specified TLP Gets parameter referenced by a TLP The specified TLP may be any numerical data type Parameter is converted to a SINT before being written to the output value DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 603 TLP_GET_STRING TLP_GET_ TRING t p Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments point type t DINT Refers to point type that contains the parameter to be read logical 1 DINT Instance of specified point type parameter p DINT Parameter to get vout STRING Value of specified TLP Description Gets parameter referenced by a TLP The specified TLP must be a string The string is truncated if it is too large to fit in the return value 604 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual TLP_GET_TLP TLP_GET_TLP Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments point type t DINT logical 1 DINT parameter p DINT rpoint type t DINT rlogical 1 DINT rparameter p DINT Description
141. LL SYS RESTANA SYS_RESTBOO SYS _RESTTMR SYS SAVALL SYS SAVANA SYS SAVBOO SYS _SAVTMR SYS TALLOWED SYS_TCURRENT SYS TMAXIMUM SYS TOVERFLOW SYS _TRESET SYS _TWRITE SYSTEM TAN TASK THEN TIME TIME OF DAY TIME TO BCD TIME TO BOOL TIME TO INT TIME TO REAL TIME TO STRING TMR TO TOD TRUE TYPE UDINT UINT ULINT UNTIL USINT VAR VAR_ ACCESS VAR EXTERNAL VAR GLOBAL VAR IN OUT VAR_INPUT VAR_ OUTPUT WHILE WITH WORD XOR XOR MASK XORN All keywords beginning with an underscore _ character are internal keywords and must not be used in textual instructions 386 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Directly Represented Variables The system enables the use of directly represented variables in the source of the programs to represent a free Channel Free Channels are the ones which are not linked to a declared I O variable The identifier of a directly represented variable always begins with character The naming conventions of a directly represented variable for a channel of a single I O device s is the slot number of the I O device c is the number of the Channel IXs c free Channel of a Boolean input I O device IBs c free Channel of a Short integer input I O device IDs c free Channel of a Double integer input I O device IRs c free Channel of a Real input I O device ITs c free Channel of a Time input I O device ISs c free Channel of a String input I O device QXs c free C
142. NG 125 3 eres iS TAQ 504 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IL equivalence LD true ANY TO STRING ST bres LD 125 ANY TO STRING ST ares Equal Arguments INI BOOL SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING IN2 BOOL SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING Q BOOL Description Both inputs must have the same format The TIME input only applies to the ST and IL languages The BOOL input is not accepted in the IL language TRUE if IN1 IN2 Test if one value is EQUAL TO another one on integer real time date and string variables Note The equality test on a TIME variable is not recommended for testing output of TIME blocks such as TON TP TOF BLINK and for testing StepName t in SFC chart DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 505 Example FBD example with Is Equal to Operators aresult mresult ST Equivalence aresult 10 25 aresult is FALSE mresult ab ab mresult is TRUE IL equivalence LD 10 EQ 25 ST aresult LD ab EQ ab Sak mresult 506 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Greater Than or Equal Arguments INI SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING Both inputs must have the same type IN2 SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING The TIME input only applies to the ST and IL languages Q BOOL TRUE if IN1 gt IN2 Description Test if one value is GREATER THAN or EQUAL TO another one on intege
143. NT Number of characters in the IN string Description Calculates the length of a string 544 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD Program using MLEN Function grefie ST Equivalence nbochar MLEN complete string If abchar lt 3 Then Return End if prefix lt LEFT complete string 3 this program extracts the 3 characters on the left of the string and put the result in the prefix string variable nothing is done if the string length is less than 3 characters IL Equivalence LD complete string MLEN ST nbchar LT 3 RETC LD complete string LEFT 3 ST prefix DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 545 mod IH Ewe P Arguments IN DINT Any signed INTEGER value Base DINT Must be greater than zero Q DINT Modulo calculation input MOD base returns 1 if Base lt 0 Description Calculates the modulo of an integer value Example FBD Program using MOD Function division result ST Equivalence division result value divider integer division test of division i MOD value divider trest of the division 546 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IL Equivalence LD value DIV divider ST division result LD value MOD divider ST rest_of division MUX4 Arguments SEL DINT Selector integer value must be in set 0 3 IN1 IN4 DINT Any integer value
144. NT function enables the conversion of DATE to the number of seconds since 1970 01 01 00 00 00 000 GMT Greenwich Mean Time Example FBD Program using CURRENT_ISA_ DATE Function CURRENT ISA DATE ST Equivalence datResult CURRENT ISA DATE IL Equivalence CURRENT ISA DATE ST datResult DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 531 DELETE delete Arguments IN STRING Any non empty string NbC DINT Number of characters to be deleted Pos DINT Position of the first deleted character first character of the string has position 1 Q STRING modified string empty string if Pos lt 1 initial string if Pos gt IN string length initial string if NbC lt 0 Description Deletes a part of a string Example FBD Program using DELETE Function complete string 532 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ST Equivalence complete string ABCD EFGH complete string is ABCDEFGH sub string DELETE complete string 4 3 sub string as VABGH IL Equivalence LD ABCD ADD CEFGH ST complete string DELETE 4 3 ST sub string EXPT Arguments IN REAL Any signed real value EXP DINT _ Integer exponent Q REAL IN EXP Description AP OESEH Gives the real result of the operation base base being the first argument and exponent the second one DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 533
145. O 10 DO MyVar3 I J FALSE END_ FOR END FOR DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 379 User Types Structures Users can define structures using standard IEC 61131 types or user types A structure is composed of sub entries called Fields When a structure is defined a variable can be created with this type Example MyStructl is composed of Field1l which is BOOL Field2 which is DINT MyStruct2 is composed of Field1 which is DINT Field2 which is BOOL Field3 which is an array of 10 DINT Field4 which is of type MyStruct1 MyVar of type MyStruct2 can be used as follows Valuel MyVar Field1 Valuel is of type DINT Ok1 MyVar Field2 Ok1 is of type BOOL Tab 2 MyVar Field3 5 Tab is an array of DINT Value2 MyVar Filed3 8 Value2 is of type DINT Ok2 MyVar Field4 Field1 Ok2 is of type BOOL 380 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Constant Expressions Constant expressions are relative to one type The same notation cannot be used to represent constant expressions of different types Boolean Constant Expressions There are only two Boolean constant expressions e TRUE is equivalent to the integer value 1 e FALSE is equivalent to the integer value 0 True and False keywords are not case sensitive Short Integer Constant Expressions Short integer constant expressions represent signed integer 8 bit values from 128 to 127 Short integer cons
146. OK Debug information a X Cl perate Toggle Select Select All Unselect Al rea Target Code and Compiler Options You can specify the generation of three types of code for use in simulation or run time e Code for simulation code required when running the application in simulation To run the Simulator you must check Code for Simulation to produce the application code e TIC Code the indication of whether Target Independent Code is produced by the compiler TIC code can be executed on DS800 Development Suite virtual machines e Structured C source code the indication of whether structured C source code is produced by the compiler Structured C source code can then be compiled and linked with DS800 Development Suite libraries to produce embedded executable code You can also define compiler options for individual resources For details on compiler options see page 349 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 57 Symbol Table You can specify whether to download the symbol table to the Virtual Machine with the resource code The symbol table groups the variable names of the resource You can also choose to download the complete symbol table or the reduced symbol table Note The Complete Table must be selected The reduced symbol table contains only names of variables for which the Address cell had been completed For details on the variables grid see page 142 To change the Build Symbol Table 1 Click Options
147. OL object tiles Readable image F Reallimage Cancel Apply e Check array index enables the verification of array indices e Enable internal state information for functions Functions containing no internal state information denotes that the invocation of a function with the same arguments always yields the same values e Generate Diagnostic files from POU object files To be defined DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 349 The link compiler options are the following Compiler options E 3 A xj General Link Generate map file Generate diagnostic files Dump POU files Dump configuration files T Dump network files Cancel Apply e To be defined To access the compiler options for a resource The general and link compiler options are accessed for individual resources from the resources properties window 1 From the Window menu choose project_name Link Architecture 2 Select a resource 3 From the Edit menu choose Properties The Resource Properties window is displayed 4 On the Target Code tab click Compiler Options The Compiler Options dialog is displayed 350 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual C Source Code The workbench compiler produces by default TIC code Target Independent Code that can be executed by virtual machines The compiler also enables the production of code in C You select code production in the Compilation Options of a reso
148. OUs Directly represented variables can also be used in POUs Sending the contents of Workbench elements including projects configurations resources and POUs for storage in a version source control database Checked in elements can be recovered at a later time For SFC and FC program which is activated by its father The child has only one father Only its father can start or kill it A father can have more than one child The forcing of the clearing of a transition whether the latter is valid or not 1 e all previous steps are active or not Tokens are moved and actions are executed as for a usual transition clearing All tokens existing in the preceding steps are removed A token is created in each of the following steps Short name for the configuration manager Graphic component of an LD Program representing the assignment of an output or an internal variable Scope of a declaration applying to all POUs within a Project Only defined words and types can have common scope See I O Complex Device A Boolean expression attached to an SFC Transition or an FC test In case of an SFC transition the transition cannot be cleared when its condition is false A software object made up of one or more resources A configuration becomes a RAS device target when it is downloaded onto a target ConfigurationManager exe The executable file providing communication services between the Workbench and target Responsible for launching
149. Parameters a E Board Number 1 Board module i on Lae Slot_Number 1 Location of module on board 91 elles 1 alles 2 elles 3 allen 4 2 EPMFCD ROCS8O9 AlModule_4Pt 4 Pt Analog Input 3 EPMFCD ROC8O9 Ol Module_8Pt 8 Pt Discrete Input 4 EPMFCD ROC8O9 40Module_4Pt 4 Pt Analog Output 5 EPMFCD ROC8O9 PlModule_2Pt 2 Pt Pulse Input B EPMFCD ROC8OS System lModule_5Pt 5 Pt SystemAl ChO B atter Ch Charge Che Modu T EPMFCD ROC8OS ATO Module_2Pt 2Pt Resistance Thermal Detector i EPMFCD ROC8OS TCM odule_5Pt 5Pt Thermocouple DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 161 TLP Devices Automatic Wiring When you define TLP variables in the dictionary these are automatically wired to TLP devices You may need to modify the write permissions for the fields of Softpoint structures While modifying the permissions for these fields avoid interfering with the automatic wiring Note The DS800 TLP I O device drivers require ROC800 Series firmware 2 10 or greater The following devices are available for automatic wiring TLP DINT READ TLP DINT WRITE TLP REAL READ TLP REAL WRITE TLP STRING READ TLP STRING WRITE TLP SOFT POINT READ TLP SOFT POINT WRITE TLP REGISTER READ TLP REGISTER WRITE 162 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Analog Input 4 Point This Wiring is set in the I O Wiring View The parameters are Board number and Slot number
150. Po cmd ST equivalence If auto mode OR alarm Then Return End if bo67 bil0 AND bi23 OR x cmd Jumps and Labels Labels and jumps are used to control the execution of the diagram No other object may be connected on the right of a jump or label symbol The following notation is used gt gt LAB Jump to a label label name is LAB LAB Definition of a label label name is LAB If the connection line on the left of the jump symbol has the Boolean state TRUE the execution of the program directly jumps to after the corresponding label symbol DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 431 Example SNOMODIF NOMODIF result H valid o est f cmd IL Equivalence ld manual and b1 jmpe NOMODIF ld inputl or input2 st result NOMODIF id result or valid st cmd 10 432 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Boolean Negation A single connection line with its right end connected to an input of a block can be terminated by a Boolean negation The negation is represented by a small circle When a Boolean negation is used the left and right ends of the connection line must have the BOOL type Example input input cutout Calling Functions and Function Blocks The FBD language enables the calling of functions or function blocks A Function or Function Block is represented by a box The name written in the box is the name of the fu
151. RAEES EAE AEE TEE a 575 ETE SI AE E E E EEN 577 N 578 INN eI E I AAE E PRT AET N 579 C Da E O 581 E E EA A lyse anne eae A NE A E 582 Te ID AREE EE EE E ATETA 583 DBG CLR GET ERR eeccccsecssessscccssssvessecsscssvessccsucscvcsucesatsasesscesaseueesacenees 585 DBC GER SPT ERR ax aneia N 585 DBG_ GET ERR uncecccesccccssccseccsecsseessccsucsssesscccecssecsusececssecsasenecssvesatenscsseesees 586 DBG_ SET Ei cE 586 DE BE E E A E E EA 587 BIN I ETIE EN TEN E EETA 588 a E EE E A EE 588 E eE E E A EA EEA 589 TIN TE GRA E E E E 590 E EET N TATEA E E O A AT 591 REQUEST LICENSE scsscssecssesssecssesscssecsucssscssecsuessucsueesscsseessresueeseesseentes 592 ES a Een en Ree oP eo ee Crear eae AE E AET 593 SE Fe O ULM E Galena hnig EAT 594 SG GOI Nose A aan 595 SOFT POINT READ cccccccssscsesssesssessscssesssecsscssvcssecesecsucssecsusesucesecsscensen 596 SOFT POINT WRITE ceccccssccssscsessscssscssvsssessscssecssecsuceseseseesucsseesseenseeseeee 597 S AREER EAT tue dato to EE ATE 598 SG T NT AR 600 TEP GET DUNT og ssseessssessdosdeasaess cesses savasalsasostiegstveseushadboceaceusesinesuaathscteapae 601 TEP GET REA Dies cicsessiisaataiastieaaistiinatsiasnadlageataanieuanalsenuaaiealaniaiee 602 MEE ye SIN oo anaes hace E E E EA ctthcntcateheetaasd 603 TEP GB RING esses ceases ees hice eu sterncp vad daw anteae dee steal Mandan 604 TLP GET TP icsctcclnacesedceainseshceesiadesia cutis bees diasdeteetastasasecatiossstekeos os 605 TEP OSE D DING
152. REAK and ERROR To activate cycle to cycle mode gt On the Debug toolbar click bil To execute one cycle Cycle to cycle mode must be activated before executing individual cycles gt On the Debug toolbar click D Step by step Mode You can instantiate step by step mode for ST IL and LD POUs For ST and IL POUSs you set breakpoints to specific lines of code For LD POUs you set breakpoints to rungs When you run an application in Debug mode the application stops when it encounters a breakpoint At this time depending on the state of the resource you can choose to perform various operations e Step to the next line of code or rung e Step into the next line of code or rung e Execute one cycle e Switch to cycle to cycle mode e Switch to real time mode DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 299 A resource where step by step mode is activated is in the STEPPING state When the resource encounters a stepping error the resource is in the STEPPING ERROR state When stepping within a resource reaches the end of its cycle the resource automatically switches to cycle to cycle mode in the STOP state Note You can only set breakpoints for resources producing TIC code you cannot set breakpoints for resources producing C source code Furthermore you cannot set or remove SFC breakpoints while a resource is in the STEPPING state Before setting up step by step mode for ST IL and LD POUs you need to specify the generatio
153. Ready The browser located on the left side of the window displays the defined project items in a tree like structure with the project as root The workspace to the right of the window enables you to display the I O devices defined for the items selected in the browser Each I O Device appears in a separate window showing the resource and configuration to which the I O Device belongs You can customize many aspects of the Simulator including e Resizing and moving individual I O device windows e Moving and hiding the browser e Displaying I O device window headers 322 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Menu Bar Some options are available as keyboard commands File View Option Open I O Device Ctrl O Exit Alt F4 Toolbar Status Bar Tree Bar Auto Vertical Tile Windows Auto Horizontal Tile Windows Auto Cascade Windows Display Header Display Name Numerical Display Auto Save when Exit DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench creates a new project leaves the Simulator shows or hides the Simulator s toolbar shows or hides the Simulator s status bar shows or hides the Simulator s browser sets the I O device windows to automatically tile vertically sets the I O device windows to automatically tile horizontally sets the I O device windows to automatically display in a cascading manner displays a header at the top of I O device windows displays the variable names associated
154. SFC Editors can be sub divided into two simultaneous views _ Begin Ei O3 Action End Each view can be zoomed independently To split the workspace 1 From the Window menu choose Split 2 Drag and drop the vertical division to the required position Grid The editing grid shows matrix cells An editor option allows the user to show or hide the grid during development The grid is very useful for placing new elements DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 197 To toggle display hide the grid E Ed e From the Layout sub menu of the Options Menu choose Grid or click on the Options toolbar Note The grid visibility does not affect its use to position elements simply whether or not it can be seen X Y Ratio The x y ratio determines the relative width spacing of the grid compared to the height of each grid cell This is a display property only it has no effect on the definition or execution of the Program To change the x y ratio on the 9 e From the Options Menu choose Layout OR use the buttons Options toolbar Note The X Y ratio features are only available when editing LD 198 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Contextual Menus The Contextual Menus are displayed by clicking the right mouse button in the Editor Workspace The commands on the Contextual Menu are generally available in the Edit Menu Example Ka Bi Copy B Faste Del
155. SFC and FC Sub programs are activated by their father A program can be described with any of the available graphic or literal languages e Sequential Function Chart SFC e Flow Chart FC e Function Block Diagram FBD e Ladder Diagram LD e Structured Text ST e Instruction List IL The same program cannot mix several languages except for LD and FBD which can be combined into one diagram 368 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SFC programs and SFC child programs have dynamic behavior limits which are set at the resource level Whereas SFC function blocks and SFC child function blocks each have their own maximum number of tokens which are set in their individual properties Cyclic and Sequential Operations The hierarchy of POUs is divided into three main sections or groups Program Section Programs located in this part represent the target cycle Note that inside this section SFC and FC programs which represent sequential operations are grouped together Function Section Set of functions that can be called by any program Function Block Set of function blocks that can be called by any program Section Programs before and after SFC and FC programs describe cyclic operations and are not time dependent They are called cyclic programs SFC and FC programs describe sequential operations where the time variable explicitly synchronizes basic operations These are called Sequential programs Cyclic programs are sy
156. SFC child is killed PO actions are executed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 327 e Inthe case of a step that becomes inactive if its code sequence has changed then the new one is used PO actions are executed Code sequence for receptivity equation of a transition is changed if it is required and it will be evaluated when the transition is valid Particular case of IEC 61131 function blocks You can make changes to the body of an IEC 61131 function block but cannot change its definition That is to say you cannot change e The number of parameters e Parameters name type direction input local output dimension for arrays and string size for string type Therefore in case of graphic languages you cannot add remove nested blocks C block or IEC 61131 block calls because they lead to automatic instances and therefore number of parameters modifications For same reasons you cannot add remove a pulse variable Particular case of calls to Functions You can add a call to a standard IEC 61131 function You cannot add a call to a specific RAS device function if it is its first use Particular case of calls to Function Blocks When adding calls to IEC 61131 function blocks you need to respect the particularities of function block instances For details on the particularities of function block instances see page 330 328 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Variables As the variable database 1s a critical p
157. Scope Gob Direction lIntemal Retain No Wirrig m Address P Comment P Ti Cancel Some fields have pull down menus showing the options available for that field The Type field also enables access to the Select Data Types browser Note The group name is automatically asserted when a variable group is selected in the Variable Tree To insert a row in the grid 1 Select a row in the grid 2 From the Edit menu choose Insert Row When the Line editing mode is selected a row is inserted in the grid When the Grid editing mode is selected grid dialog box appears 134 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Moving Rows You can change the position of a variable or a parameter in the grid by dragging the line to a new position Note You cannot undo row moving operations Expanding or Collapsing Grid Components Variables with user types Arrays and Structures are initially displayed collapsed i e only the variable definition row is displayed with a sign in the row header cell Clicking on the row header cell expands or collapses that variable For example the variable In1 of type arrl where arrl is defined in the Dictionary as an Array of 1 3 Booleans is initially displayed as F in Hone Arrd Free Gl When expanded the complete definition of inl is shown _ find None Arr Free Gale int 1 BOOL int 2 BOOL int 3 BOOL DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 135 Cutting Copying and Delet
158. TE TIT AE EAT EAT 532 E S AE E EE E E EE A TAEA E 533 h E AAEE EE E A REETA TEETAR 534 E E A eter sone ETT ET 536 E S EA TA A ETE ATEA TE EE E A 537 TA Me saa EE E T tasers Viasapemnesas 539 TG asses ee E EE AEAT TERNE 540 O A E E E N E E T E 541 ION ncaa ada EIET E cates hd estes tdi erated ae needs td 542 IDEN cd feeds sch E ve ed vee dosncomen A AEE 543 IV Be ees secesc se aanecssctas oaths aad cect teats ScasathesNeaasicee eatacctae cal aceeaesscac teats 544 MO ct cahsn se eset Mere ca ea sec crates E 546 E asa deca ceed et han TEE A EE eats edits 547 ED access EE E A A T 549 NOT MASK uccccsccssccsecssecssecsuecsecsseccucssesssscssecsecsacaseesucssecsueesecsarceueesecsneeen 550 CD E EE E outset EA ES EA erected ees 551 ONIA E a A 553 E R E E E AE E N EE A E 554 A o ETE EE E E A EREET ENANTA 555 REPLACE errient e raced cde E sat ole ovedaeldtio 556 PE gE EEE sec achat see AE ae dre atc Seca ATE 558 PO E E EEA E A A A TT 559 O E E E E E AEAEE RRE 560 e E A E A ten atstenoriet ease 562 SE ERATE ect EEN IEEE A ETAT TEET 563 T N EN E E AE 564 STEN staan EE EAE ARRE E A TEA 565 OP E tne sb tet ta cacao 566 SUR DATE DATE costs eta etched dicted cabs teed end edn aca saad aah et 567 BIT casi azn see dhenc ah E E E E 569 TERING sass esha acess cance see sean ascasc inact sctastaa aaasade aeceanectnactutdaieetasaiceies 570 XOR NGI a n E Ta 571 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Table of Contents XV PTI E E nape can cus saan ates EE ees 575 STG
159. The exponent part of a real scientific expression must be a signed integer value from 37 to 37 A real variable has six significant digits Example 3 14159 1 0E 12 1 0 1 0E 15 789 56 1 0E 37 382 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual The expression 123 does not represent a Real constant expression Its correct real representation is 123 0 Timer Constant Expressions Timer constant expressions represent time values from 0 to 1193h2m47s294ms The lowest allowed unit is a millisecond Standard time units used in constant expressions are Hour The h letter must follow the number of hours Minute The m letter must follow the number of minutes Second The s letter must follow the number of seconds Millisecond The ms letters must follow the number of milliseconds The time constant expression must begin with T or TIME prefix Prefixes and unit letters are not case sensitive Some units may not appear Example T 1H450MS 1 hour 450 milliseconds time 1H3M 1 hour 3 minutes The expression 0 does not represent a time value but an Integer constant String Constant Expressions String constant expressions represent character strings Characters must be preceded by a quote and followed by an apostrophe For example THIS IS A MESSAGE er Warning The apostrophe character cannot be used within a string constant expression A string constant expression must be expressed on one line of the program source
160. The following are Standard Operators of the IEC languages Arithmetic operations Boolean operations Comparator Data conversion DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference Addition Division Multiplication Subtraction 1 GAIN NEG AND OR XOR NOT Less Than Less Than or Equal Greater Than Greater Than or Equal Equal Not Equal ANY TO BOOL ANY TO SINT ANY TO DINT ANY TO REAL ANY TO TIME ANY TO STRING Adds two or more variables Divides two variables Multiplies two or more variables Subtracts a variable from another Assigns one variable into another Integer negation Boolean AND Boolean OR Boolean exclusive OR Boolean negation Tests if one value is less than another Tests if one value is less than or equal to another Tests if one value is greater than another Tests if one value is greater than or equal to another Tests if one value is equal to another Tests if one value is not equal to another Converts to Boolean Converts to Short integer Converts to Double integer Converts to Real Converts to Time Converts to String 487 Note For this operator the number of inputs can be extended to more than two Arguments inputs SINT DINT REAL can be INTEGER or REAL all inputs must have the same format output SINT DINT REAL multiplication of the input terms Description Multiplication of two or more integer or real variables Example FBD example with Multipli
161. To adjust the font for printed diagrams you need to modify the font used for the editor To subsequently open another program from the Multi language editor e From the File menu choose Open CTRL O To add a description to a program e From the File menu choose Description DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 253 Appearance Title Bar DGE 1 Main MyProgFBD wee X CEOL LEIJE Toolbars E fox i TAR F2 ew Fs 5 E Fa al FS Jo hin al FT F8 9 ae Inputs From Logics To Outputs File Edit Tools Debug Options Window Help e x fu CEGE Workspace with or without Guidelines Output Window Status Bar Note The Language toolbar contains tools for LD ST IL or FBD Workspace You can arrange the workspace of the FBD editor to show guideline areas These areas divide the workspace into logical sections Inputs From Logics To and Outputs Elements move independently of the area guidelines You can choose to hide individual areas and resize the areas You can also choose to restore the default area sizes When moving the cursor across the FBD or LD editor the cursor s coordinates are displayed in the status bar These coordinates refer to grid areas For instance the top leftmost grid area is coordinate 0 0 and the grid area to its immediate right is coordinate 1 0 The grid coordinates remain the same whether the zoom or cell width changes
162. Wannenai n a aah tenets chen Gear bana sented dh eaten 353 Cross RETCTEMCES ST OWS esis tence inusehctauldnn o NE 355 Calculating Cross Re lee nCe Sie sce teetcdaa sa pe ketea ae a iets wlan tensa dtedaane nce 357 Browsme the POU S Of a Project assin a ena A mein 357 Defining Search Option Seseskreasienioseia n e e aE 358 Verono EC ONTON aaa e E E E 359 Performing a Check in of a Workbench Element ceeeesseeeeeeeees 363 Viewing the History of Workbench Element cccccccscscccecceeeeeeeeeees 364 Ge tting a Previous V CTSiOMss 00 ccssatesrsesacseecnsennseddasesbeomedsysueniedastiuaaess 365 Comparing Current and Previous Versions cccccccccccccccceeeeeeseseeeeens 365 Ac cessing Details for a Previous Version cccccsssssssccceceeeeceeeeeeeees 366 Create a History IRE PON sicearsescieonadeenatleudatacacemihevasieontannieaeenabtesoeeenedes 366 Language Reference 367 Project APC MILE COINS 5 010 533 sae daasupztcoancuan acted unos N a aaea 368 Programo sosiaesdasaacsarads anes cauaisanealanaacann asansaanneomiareceatantuonaiectanagedsaguuaaadauanone 368 Cyclic and Sequential Operations 00 0 0 eccecccccseesessesssccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 369 CNG SFC POS arcsec cette E eng aaueades 370 FC SUB RFO OAS eene a a a esuanauie aas aeiae 371 PONCHO IS ie A A N A N 371 Function Blocks oarsoren ianen E O E 373 D scripton Lano Wace nenssnio ninn a coved oetheata dara saccdaeat eanee eaactamaccs 375 Xe CUT OM OUI ES eser
163. Wiring Tree view DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 157 Parameters e Double click on any parameter in the tree to open a dialog box that allows you to modify its value Direct Reverse For a boolean IO channel you can switch between the original value direct or its negation reverse Simply double click on Direct or Reverse to swap from one choice to another Gain Offset For a numerical channel you can apply a gain and an offset to a channel value For inputs the original value coming from the input device is multiplied by the gain and the offset value is added This gives the value used by the programs of the resource For outputs the value of the variable resulting from the execution of the program is multiplied by the gain and the offset value added before updating the output device e Double click Gain or Offset in the tree to open a dialog box that allows you to modify the values Note Gain is composed of a multiplier factor and a divider factor The conversion formula applied is as follows NewValue Value MultFactor DivFactor Offset For details on specific implementations contact your supplier Conversions Conversions can be applied to any kind of channels The list of available conversions depends on the target implementation Please contact your supplier for more information on conversions they provide Simply double click on Conversion in the tree to open a dialog box that allo
164. _ SET DINT 606 TLP_SET REAL 607 TLP_SET SINT 608 TLP_SET STRING 609 WHILE DO END WHILE basic TOF 609 statements for 463 TON 610 working with POUs in the multi language TP 611 editor 260 URCV S 612 ST operator for IL 478 USEND S 613 STACKINT function block 600 standard function blocks standard function blocks summary of 573 standard functions ALARM 575 ABS 522 AVERAGE 575 ACOS 523 BLINK 577 AND MASK 524 CMP 578 ASCII 525 CONNECT 579 ASIN 526 654 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ATAN 527 CHAR 528 COS 530 CURRENT ISA DATE 531 DELETE 532 EXPT 533 FIND 534 INSERT 536 LEFT 537 LIMIT 539 LOG 540 MAX 541 MID 542 MIN 543 MLEN 544 MOD 546 MUX4 547 MUX8 549 NOT MASK 550 ODD 551 OR MASK 553 POW 554 RAND 555 REPLACE 556 RIGHT 558 ROL 559 ROR 560 SEL 562 SHL 563 SHR 564 SIN 565 SQRT 566 SUB DATE DATE 567 summary of 521 TAN 569 TRUNC 570 XOR MASK 571 standard IEC 61131 types available for programming 377 standard operators 1 gain 494 addition 489 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index AND 495 ANY TO BOOL 496 ANY TO DINT 499 ANY TO REAL 501 ANY TO SINT 498 ANY TO STRING 504 ANY TO TIME 502 division 492 equal 505 greater than 508 greater than or equal 507 less than 511 less than or equal 510 multiplication 488 NEG 512 NOT 514 not equal 515 OR 516 subtraction 491 summary of 487 TMR 517 XOR 518 standard toolbar in language editors 185 in main en
165. _name Note For command lines resource names are case sensitive You can also use the resource number to identify the resource When manually starting the Workbench you may need to provide the location of the Workbench project The Workbench needs to be started in it s location directory For example C Program Files Emerson DS800 Bin DPM exe C Emerson Projects DS800 Prj Project1 res Lead gt To open the project in read only mode from a command line use the following syntax DPM exe project_path readonly When manually starting the Workbench you may need to provide the location of the Workbench project The Workbench needs to be started in it s location directory For example C Program Files Emerson DS800 Bin DPM exe C Emerson Projects DS800 Prj Project1 readonly 38 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Saving Projects The project name is used to create a unique directory structure Saving the project saves it in the MS Access database of the project root directory Other files related to the project are also updated in this directory structure When editing a project in single resource mode changes are only saved for the edited resource To save a project gt From the File menu choose Save Project Note When a project is saved the undo redo history is cleared Renaming Projects You can rename projects and edit their comments You cannot rename projects while in single resource editing mode
166. a E a NR 142 Parame rs Grid sine N N NS 143 Types Grids E a lon 144 DG ite GW OS Orid iener anoa AAA 145 Definine TLP Variables esms aiaa oa ienaat 146 Minak V alies ca A E E 150 Valdatioikasseonnn E E O OOE 153 CelHevel Vakdationssr eraio RAN 153 Row level V aliCatiOn j d 0s3c caoczasscaneaneeas deesaeeadecestecgstacedseaa ha vicnsuaesareowansst 153 Database level Validation sisiccc5 ss casks a E E N 154 VOWS VEN ooa oe ontario E E Giese oa lana OIN 155 PRPC AR ANC Oaia A eet caches Meeacsaneumens 156 VO Wine Tree VIEW rosone a A sacs cero eae 157 LO W tr GUU VIEW ar E ceiceseecceteeaas 159 Working with the I O Wiring Tool cccccccccceeeessssssccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 160 TLP Devices Automatic Wiring eressminoroniias ain a a 162 Analog Input 4 Point ciccessnetvaaniecadeariveneeehndashinesantecaseedavesnatesweeviaraaees 163 Analog Output 4 Potae ined aad ceueeasgetoaetetes 163 Discrete Input S POM eins ioctl A 164 Discrete Output 5 P Onis 2 sercs srs Genie ertaestssacaocaae hacer sencwnwsareOsteedesoest 164 Multi Variable Sensor Input 6 Point ccccessessssccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 165 P be Inputa 2 Pon 65 octet ceased axial awl do tse arate eaeeatgeasaaeten 166 RED np ROIN 2g oie cool E E et abedadtaeseeecas 167 System Analog Input 5 Point gctisccctede cecatessteinaavndssntcntecettaariaetsoaes 167 Thermocouple Input 5 Point cccccccccccccceeeeeeeseeeesessesssssseeeeeeeees 168 Adding VO Devies oxic tictadouese
167. a ate T 169 Openine IDS VIC CS cies cos teed dade Macca ts ten aetia sees oegaies eadica ews taaeeeeceet sais 170 Deleting Devices and ConverSiONs cccccssssssccccccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeees 171 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Setting the Real or Virtual Attribute ccccccccceeeeeesssessseeeeeeas 171 Winne CAMS lS eeina e eaneeaden eee eee 172 Mapp ine C hanne Senioro ia A 172 Pree C hanme lsano Naaa 174 R ntime System EVENS eien E e iaa 175 Loscho Eyen areni EN T se 175 NIG WO EVEN ananin anno A dated daneaceestamaaaemadaaeadant deanes 176 VAT WAC STE OES act aratondzecenstansatsaescoeaeeie teas T AEE EAEE 181 Common Editor Meares i105 oe atch aA 181 PRC AP ANIC E E E E E E A EE AA 182 Menu B Iorin A OA My mokenessgades 183 TOODA Sarie E EEA 184 Standard Toolbar enasna A 185 Options Toolbar tarine a eee 186 Debus FOOD Al acia e Rin ee a oneine 187 SFC Breakpoints Tool bat cccccsesssssccccceceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeesens 189 SFC OOS a reser cenit cates a itiaen olen a 189 POW Clare OOS gcse acd eat eo cet taniie et toca acute ene Mae 191 STE ToO arn a T Biseeleee eae 192 METO Eirini ts Aartee th apd cen eave densientens Mecmaiene aeee seer eesesan 193 LD TOUS oases eee eee ese eee ed 194 FBD TOOB noai ah sade aca reese 195 WV OFKS DAC Ciccone eects 197 Contextial Menis 5a cceasosdeweuncadstsinctncsiensteetsnnsansaashauecsadeenetreneeeenetens 199 Output Wd OW corcra eaa Sieh E E 199 DULG B
168. able has the Softpoint structure type For a Softpoint structure you may need to disable the write permission for its individual fields by default Softpoint structure fields have the write permissions To disable the write permission for a structure field in the I O wiring view select the corresponding field then in the I O Parameter dialog set the parameter s field to FALSE To define TLP variables in the dictionary You access the TLP browser from the dictionary s variables grid while in the line editing mode 1 Select a row in the variables grid then from the Edit menu choose Add Row 2 In the grid dialog click E 3 Inthe TLP browser to define the point location select the point type logical number and parameter then indicate the read write permissions for the device assigned to the TLP variable and click OK The TLP variable s attributes are displayed in the grid dialog 4 To enter the TLP variable in the variable grid click OK When you save changes in the dictionary DS800 automatically performs the wiring from the TLP variable to a TLP device The assigned TLP device s directly represented variable naming is displayed in the Wiring field of the variable grid To disable the write permission for a Softpoint structure field 1 In the dictionary s Wiring field identify the TLP device index to which the Softpoint structure is wired The TLP device index is indicated in the directly represented variable
169. ables you to define links between the variables defined in a project and the channels of the devices existing on the target system Wiring is performed at the resource level therefore I O wiring is only available when a resource is selected in either the link architecture or hardware architecture views and when a target has been attached to the current configuration After creating variables in the Dictionary you perform I O wiring in the I O wiring tool by adding I O devices setting device parameters and I O filters then wiring the channels of the devices to variables in the grid You can also define the mapping of logical channels to physical channels To open the I O wiring tool from the link or hardware architecture view 1 Select a resource 2 Do one of the following From the Project menu choose I O wiring On the Window Buttons toolbar click pa To open the I O wiring tool from the link architecture view gt Within a resource window open the parameters component then the I O wiring component DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 155 Appearance The I O Wiring view is displayed in the workspace The menus and toolbar now reflect I O Wiring options only The left of the I O Wiring Workspace is a hierarchical Tree View of defined I O devices The right side of the workspace displays a grid like table of the free unwired variables of the current resource These unwired variables are listed in alphabetical order
170. acas veaeteaaatea cata weaneieancacasnas 256 Malti Cano Ga oe TASC IS cerniere EEEE 260 IS SIS tS sage crates E E 260 MTD VSI BGS eneen Selassie toocaa A E TOE 261 WOMPACt OMNI Si assesses caste tetencceas ccastaceuce gan caceeemaneesuns 261 Contactom the Rag NG secaraa a n 261 Paral le COMA N eree A 262 Co onae E T A E T 262 Blockon tme Lera tceuanc en cacane eta cecentemtaccnanent 262 Block ON ME RAGE cores 262 Parallel BIOCK timine eenaa detente tase daceaient faced dasedsaneesaaatenees 262 ALEE a 5 ate E E EE EA E A E E A E E 262 TWANG E EA A ER REA EEEE ETS 263 RE aent ona vee a a er ne Pea 263 Change Coil Contact Type permisie teenie 263 Disert New RUTE srieonreemesn a a O T a 264 Other Operations o cee estas ee secanenantiedtncecaaeaadardeanaes 264 TEDE 218 0 0 Dae ee ERO ee eae nT oe a I 265 pe Es D ce ene ne en eee ee eR on REN Pe EA 266 FUNCTION BOCK osmana e NENN 267 E e EEEE NAE ANE E AE A E NNS 267 CO O oaea a E Oa a ONN 267 VTA o EPA AEE AE E EAE E EA ET 268 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Table of Contents vil TR CULII I AE E E O ono E EE E EEE 269 PIXELEN Saciarse n atid uct eada dared saaadaatdaaaes donee ternestass 270 Lett POWER Bal omonier r a 270 CONTACTS eor a a E 270 LD Vertical OR Connection ccccceeeeseessscesteeeeeeeees 270 COS a 271 Rag hit Power Baf x 2ducs nus ssackeosvartaceeseayecactaapdtenedeaneor eens 271 COMMON saentes Sosa aaa e A A E AAA 212 Mana imne TCMMGM S s 2 s
171. action for ST and IL To Undo Redo the previous action e From the Edit menu choose Undo Redo or click e or bd on the Standard toolbar 274 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Move Moving elements in the Multi language editor is only valid for FBD IEC 61131 POUs You can drag individual elements to a new position in the workspace without first selecting them However to drag multiple elements you need to select each element To move elements e To move a single element click the element and while holding down the mouse drag the element to its new position then release the mouse e To move multiple elements select all elements and while holding down the mouse drag the elements to their new position then release the mouse Cut Use the Cut command to remove selected Elements and move them to the clipboard replacing the clipboard s current contents To cut elements 1 Select the element s to cut 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut CTRL X OR 1 Select the element s to cut 2 On the Standard toolbar click DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 275 Copy Use the Copy command to copy selected elements and place them on the clipboard replacing the clipboard s current contents To copy elements 1 Select the element s to copy 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy CTRL C OR 1 Select the element s to copy 2 On the Standard toolbar click oy Paste Use the Paste command to p
172. ail The associated Boolean variable must be OUTPUT or MEMORY Example inputi noeh oE ouest ST Equivalence IF inputi THEN outputl TRUE END IF IF input2 THEN outputl FALSE END IF DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 445 RESET Coil Reset Coils enable Boolean output of a connection line Boolean state Left Connection Right Connection The associated variable is RESET TO FALSE when the Boolean state of the left connection becomes TRUE The output variable keeps this value until an inverse order is made by a SET coil For information on variables see page 389 The state of the left connection is propagated into the right connection Right connection may be connected to the right vertical Power Rail The associated Boolean variable must be OUTPUT or MEMORY Example dig eye p ne se ST Equivalence IF inputi THEN outputl TRUE END IF IF input2 THEN outputl FALSE END IF 446 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Coil with Rising Edge Detection Coils with rising edge detection or Positive coils enable Boolean output of a connection line Boolean state fa 2 Left Connection Right Connection The associated variable is set to TRUE when the Boolean state of the left connection rises from FALSE to TRUE The output variable resets to FALSE in all other cases For information on variables see page 389 The state of the left connection is propagated into t
173. ails on a previously checked in version of the element These details include the incremental version number automatically assigned at check in the date on which the version was checked in and the identity of the user who checked in the version as well as an optional comment To access the history details of a previous version gt In the History list of elements select the version for which to access details then click Details The History Details dialog is displayed showing the details for the selected version Creating a History Report When viewing the history of a project configuration resource or POU you can choose to create a report of text format txt on the history of the element This report lists all or selected incremental checked in versions the dates of each check in and the user that performed each check in A report can also include the differences from one version to the next Before sending a report to a file you can choose to preview it To create a history report for an element 1 Inthe History list of elements click Report 2 Inthe History Report dialog do the following To include version numbers check in dates and check in users check Include details To include the differences between versions check Include differences 3 To preview the report before sending it to file click Preview 4 To send the report to file click OK then choose the location in which to save the file 366 DS800
174. al mode and one or more resources of the project are opened in single resource editing mode by other users accesses the Add Remove Dependencies window where you define the libraries used by a project accesses the cross references browser listing and localizing all instances of global variables cross references and I Os declared in a project Checks in a project configuration resource or POU definition not having the read only attribute into a version source control database Views the history of a project configuration resource or POU that has been checked in repeatedly to a version source control database accesses the Events Viewer Debug Download Ctrl M Debug Target Alt F6 Simulation Alt F7 On line Change Download On line Change Update Start Stop Start from code saved on Target Save Code on target Clean Stored Code Diagnosis Refresh Status accesses the Download editor from where you download resources onto target nodes starts the project in debug mode starts the project in simulation mode downloads only the changes made since the last download for the selected running resource The download includes the symbol table complete or reduced as selected in the resource s compilation options updates a resource running on a target to use the latest on line change download code For use when you chose to update the resource code later starts the selected resource while in run mode
175. alues monitoring FBD LD POUs 295 output window clearing the contents of the 24 displaying errors and build information 24 P page numbering specifying in printing options 340 panel of I Os simulating a 320 parallel blocks inserting LD elements 262 parallel contacts inserting LD elements 262 parameters grid described 143 I O wiring and defined words components of 90 network for resources 62 tree described 128 parentheses in ST programs 455 password protection for configuration access control 118 for POU access control 104 for project access control 41 for resource access control 64 paste special applying in LD POUs 277 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index pasting elements variables in the Dictionary grid 138 POUs 100 resources 52 performing online changes 327 popup menus accessing 25 POUs Program Organization Unit accessing details for previous versions of 366 building rebuilding code for 346 checking in 363 cleaning 348 comparing versions of 365 creating history reports for 366 creating in resources 99 defining access control for 104 editing descriptions of 108 finding and replacing elements in 207 getting previous versions of 365 inserting identifiers in 201 inserting operators functions and function blocks in 203 managing 96 manipulating in resources 100 opening from language editors 206 stepping in 302 stopping builds 348 unlocking 104 viewing the history of 364 POW function 554 power rails
176. am For details on SFC actions see page 407 Note Since GKILL is not in the IEC 61131 standard it is preferable to use the R qualifier attached to the child name Example See GSTART DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 469 GFREEZE Statement in SFC Action Name GFREEZE Meaning freezes a child SFC program or function block suspends its execution The suspended SFC POU can then be restarted using the GRST statement Syntax GFREEZE lt child_name gt where child_name represents the name of the SFC child POU Operands the specified SFC program must be a child of the one in which the statement is written Return value none Children of the child program are automatically frozen along with the specified program Note GFREEZE is not in the IEC 61131 standard Example Sasperd_ emd p F ee Ci k G FREEZE tch IH HOT Gaspe ad och C 470 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual GRST Statement in SFC Action Name Meaning Syntax Operands GRST restarts a child SFC program frozen by the GFREEZE statement all the Tokens removed by GFREEZE are restored The extended syntax only applies to SFC child function blocks GRST lt child_name gt or GRST lt child_name input1 input2 inputn gt where child_name represents the name of the SFC child POU inputn indicates the value of the input parameter of the SFC child POU the specified SFC pr
177. an SFC function block in its setting properties accessed by selecting the block then from the Edit menu choosing Properties then the Settings tab When using an SFC function block with an SFC child you can access for read only purposes the local values of the child from its father by entering the child s name and the parameter in an action or transition s code For example to access the Locall parameter of an SFC child named FB Child in an action or transition defined for the SFC function block father you would write the following PB Child Local tl 370 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual FC Sub Programs Any FC program can call one or more FC program The FC Sub program execution is driven by its parent program The parent FC program execution is suspended until the FC Sub program execution ends Parent program FC sub program FC sub program Functions A function execution is driven by its parent program The execution of the parent program 1s suspended until the function ends Main program Function Function Any program of any Section may call one or more functions A function may have local variables The ST LD FBD or IL languages can be used to describe a function DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 371 Warning The system does not support recursivity during function calls A run time error occurs when a program of the Functions Section is called by itself or by one of its called functions
178. an state of the left end is propagated into each of the right ends Example of multiple RIGHT connection inputi output sc ST equivalence CUEpULL lt inputi output2 inputl1 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 437 A multiple connection on the left and on the right combines more than one horizontal line connected on the left side of a vertical line and more than one line connected on its right side The Boolean state of each of the right ends is the LOGICAL OR between all the left ends Example of multiple LEFT and RIGHT connection inputi output Inputs output outputs ST Equivalence outputl inputi OR input2 CUEDUL2 inputi OR putz2 output3 inputi OR input2 438 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Basic LD Contacts and Coils Several symbols are available for input contacts Direct Contact Inverted Contact Contact with Rising Edge Detection Contact with Falling Edge Detection Several symbols are available for output coils Direct Coil Inverted Coil SET Coil RESET Coil Coil with Rising Edge Detection Coil with Falling Edge Detection The name of the variable is written above any of these graphic symbols Name of the associated Boolean variable rl ee Left Connection Right Connection DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 439 Direct Contact A Direct Contact enables a Boolean operation between a connecti
179. and ISaRSI Name x Network Network Z Help protocol based on TCPIF O hame vawe Comment Note ISaRSI is only used to connect the Workbench to the RAS device device ISaRSI does not support projects with multiple configurations Moving Networks The Network can be moved vertically within the workspace This facility is simply a method of providing a preferred view for the user usually the default view is preferred To move a network 1 Select the network The selected network is highlighted DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 121 2 Drag and drop the network as required Note The hardware architecture view is re drawn to tidy up the display Fixed sized gaps are placed between network and configurations 122 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Connections Connections between networks and configurations enable communications to flow DS800 automatically creates connections when creating projects When you link a configuration to a ROCLINK 800 configuration file the IP address 1s automatically assigned A configuration can be linked to many networks Similarly a network can be linked to many configurations E Main F send info to R2 r 2 Test get info from Al Creating Connections When creating a connection make sure to not select the configuration or network Click elsewhere in the workspace to deselect these items In the connection s properties you need to specify the IP a
180. and drop until the required items are hightlighted Alternatively multiple items are selected by holding down CTRL or SHIFT then clicking elements to add to the selection DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 223 Rename You can rename steps and transitions To rename elements 1 Select the element to rename 2 From the Edit menu choose Rename Step Transition OR right click on the element to display the contextual menu The Change Name dialog box appears x New Mame al Cancel 3 Edit the name then click OK OR 1 Select the element to rename 2 Click on the name to edit 3 Edit the name directly in the program element 4 When finished click elsewhere in the workspace 224 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Move To move elements 1 Select the element s to move 2 Drag the ghost to a valid location 3 Drop the elements as required Cut Use the cut command to remove selected elements and move them to the clipboard replacing the clipboard s current contents To cut elements gt Select the element s to cut then from the Edit menu choose Cut CTRL X or on the Standard toolbar Copy Use the copy command to copy selected elements and place them on the clipboard replacing the clipboard s current contents To copy elements gt Select the element s to copy then from the Edit menu choose Copy CTRL C or click iY on the Standard toolbar DS800
181. ansitions by programming these in the level 2 window Only one condition can be attached to a transition When defining conditions you indicate a name a comment optional and the programming language type The available programming languages for transitions are LD and ST When changing the programming language of a transition the code zone must be empty For details on conditions attached to transitions see page 410 You can specify the ST or LD language for use as default for the level 2 programming of transitions To attach conditions to transitions 1 Inthe SFC chart select the transition for which to attach a condition then from the Edit menu choose Edit Level 2 The level 2 window is displayed with the transition s name and set for programming in the ST language 2 To change the name or programming language for the transition double click the level 2 window title bar then in the Properties dialog make the necessary changes and click OK Properties gq X Hame Ti4 Comment Type GT Qualifier P1 Help co To specify the default programming language for transitions gt From the Options menu choose Set Default Level 2 Language then Transition then the desired programming language DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 231 Moving Action Blocks Up or Down You can change the order of the action blocks in a step The displayed order is used during execution To move an action block up 1 Se
182. are not stored and are generally lost from one call to the other A function can be written in ST IL LD FBD and C POU which has input and output parameters and works on internal data parameters A program can call an instance of a function block A function block instance can not be called by a function no internal data for a function A function block can call another function block instantiation mechanism is extended to the function blocks called A function block can be written in ST IL LD FBD and C Scope of a declaration applying to all POUs of one resource A variable whose scope is global The view graphically displaying the configurations of a project and the network links between them DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Glossary 621 Hidden Parameter Hierarchy Identifier IFB IFU IL Initial Situation Initial Step Initial Value Input Input Parameter Instance of a Function Block Instruction Internal 622 Input parameters of a function block that are not displayed in FBD diagrams Hidden parameters are set in the Parameters tab of the Select Block dialog Architecture of a Project divided into several POUs The hierarchy tree represents the links between father programs and children programs See Father Program Parent Program Unique word used to represent a variable or a constant expression in the programming Indicates an IEC 61131 function block Indicates an IEC 61131 func
183. ariable is set to ETCP_ KVB_ ERR TIMEOUT value Custom Resource Parameters You can define specific OEM options for a resource that may be implemented in your target Note DS800 Development Suite standard targets do not have extended parameters Contact your target supplier for specific details Resource Properties i X General Target Code Settings Hetwork Extended Security O hme vawe Commen i gt DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 63 Resource Access Control For resource security you can control access using a password and you can choose to apply the read only mode to an entire resource When resources are password protected users not having the password can change resource properties wire and bind variables modify the memory for retain and add devices to wired variables POUs in a resource can have their own level of access control For instance a POU having its own password remains locked and cannot be viewed without entering its password However a POU using its resource s password also inherits the resource s security properties such as the read only attribute The security state of a resource is indicated by the color of the lower triangle in the resource title bar icon The resource can also be currently opened by another user Resource Security Icon State r Gray The resource has no access control All users have read and write access in the resource POUs in the resource may have
184. art of the resource it can be accessed at any time by other processes via multitasking PLC It is also possible to modify variable values from the Debugger Therefore you cannot add rename or remove a variable online However you can modify the way a variable is used in the application You can also reserve unused internal or I O variables in the first version of the resource so that future modifications can make use of them Target databases contain different styles of variables each having their own limitations Declared Variables Declared variables are declared using the Dictionary You can add new variables with or without initial values and you can remove variables You cannot e Add a variable with the name of a previously removed variable e Add Remove an I O variable e Change the definition of an existing variable The definition of a variable refers to many aspects e Name e Type e Scope e Dimension arrays e String size for string type e Direction Input Output Internal e Address e Retain attribute DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 329 Notes e Renaming variables has the same effect as removing and adding them 1 e their values will be lost in the RAS device e During code generation the Workbench linker keeps information about removed and added variables in the PLC data memory map Therefore before performing complete downloads instead of online changes you should clean the project befo
185. asic graphic rules of the SFC are e SFC Programs must have at least one Initial Step e A Step cannot be followed by another Step e A Transition cannot be followed by another Transition DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 395 SFC Basic Components The basic components graphic symbols of the SFC language are Steps and Initial Steps Transitions Oriented Links and Jumps to a Step Steps and Initial Steps A step is represented by a single square Each step is referenced by a name written in the step square symbol The above information is called the level 1 of the step MyStep At run time a token indicates that the step is active Reference Name Active Step Inactive Step The initial situation of an SFC program is expressed with initial steps An initial step has a double bordered graphic symbol A token is automatically placed in each initial step when the program is started Initial Step 396 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual An SFC program must contain at least one initial step These are the attributes of a step Such fields may be used in any of the other languages StepName x activity of the Step Boolean value StepName t activation duration of the Step time value where StepName is the name of the step When reading a child active step or duration from a father ChildName __S1 x activity of the Step Boolean value ChildName __S1 t activation duration of the Step time value
186. assword The security state of a POU 1s indicated by its icon color in the resource POU Security Icon Color State Yellow The POU has no access control All users have read and write access a in the POU In the dictionary view local variables and parameters are visible and editable Red The POU is locked Users not having the POU password cannot access the POU these users do not have read or write capabilities In the dictionary view local variables and parameters are visible but not editable Blue The POU is in read only mode Users not having the resource password can view the POU these users do not have write capabilities The read only mode for the POU is inherited from the resource to which it belongs In the dictionary view local variables and parameters are visible but not editable Green The POU is unlocked User can access the POU this user has read and write capabilities In the dictionary view local variables and parameters are visible and editable Note While in debug mode or performing builds unlocked POUs as well as POUs having no access control switch to read only mode Locked POUs remain locked 104 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual You can build POUs of all security states When copying pasting importing and exporting POUs having access control password definitions are retained To set access control for a POU You set access control for a POU by setting a password 1 Inthe resour
187. ast ladeaubaciedeebesammaaeanee 48 Resource Window Workspace cccccccsessssccceceeesecccceseessseesssessssssaeeaaaes 49 Creatine RESOULCES sx glesaceshcenaaets ie caedhi a a eae 50 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Table of Contents REMAIN G RESOURCES aiia ease daaainscitee E 51 COPYING RESOUECES srne T O 51 Pastine IRESOULCES acari a a 52 WETTING RESOUECES uera innii aE 53 Editing Resource Propertie Siiami E e ooencneieszease 54 Resoorce Identification 2 5652 25 Sdaransessndosiensecadasersavues ent aaneedendenstuaaseraaeaies 55 Compilaton ODON censa a a A 55 Run time Senes surar a ee a ace aaeatisetnGeheocemens 59 Resource Network Parameters enoo E 62 C stom Resource PAraINOteI S ess arise xi taavessadeuna EEE EREE 63 Resource Access COMO arenai ceestida she toed taieed R AON 64 RESOULCE DESCH PIO M geri esucesevaetsutasssazeaaseseeteetiacsatosnnnaetavionntectesoee eee 66 Variable Bingines 55 6525 isaiior ila Geta cae ea sdaeeteaau oes eee eee 67 Inema MAGUS Saisso semasedsanadsatioresecconcanennseaes daa wevnasaanesGenmenesenseonies 71 AKAN GIR CSOUTCES s2se ots cesas sedan sar cased EA A 74 Deleting Resource Links cscs ccsevacetecnotices vncgss aaa oina 76 Viewing the Internal Bindings Defined for Resources 06 77 Hiding and Showing Resource Links eccceceeeeessseeeseenteeeeees IJ Defining Internal Variable Bindings cececcceeeeeeeeeseteettaeeeees 78 Editing Internal Variable Bindings
188. ates the end of the execution of that block only Example FBD specification of the program programmable counter ST implementation of the program using RETURN statement If NOT CU then O 22 false CV z 0 RETURN terminates the program end if if RESET then CV 0 else if CV lt PV then CV CV 1 end if end if Q CV gt PV 460 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IF THEN ELSIF ELSE Statement Name IF THEN ELSIF THEN ELSE END_IF Meaning executes one of several lists of ST statements selection is made according to the value of a Boolean expression Syntax IF lt Boolean_expression gt THEN lt statement gt lt statement gt ELSIF lt Boolean_expression gt THEN lt statement gt lt statement gt ELSE lt statement gt lt statement gt END IF The ELSE and ELSIF statements are optional If the ELSE statement is not written no instruction is executed when the condition is FALSE The ELSIF statement may be used more than once The ELSE statement if used must appear only once at the end of the IF ELSIF sequence Example ST program using IF statement IF manual AND not alarm THEN level manual level bx126 bil2 OR bi45 ELSIF over_mode THEN level max level ELSE level l1v16 100 scale END IF DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 461 IF structure
189. bles for resources of a project to enable accessing them when defining external variable bindings in consumer resources of other projects Producer groups hold producer variables of a resource to be consumed by consumer variables of one or more resources located in other projects To define a producer variable group You define producer variable groups from the External Binding List 1 Inthe Producer Groups list double click The Producer Binding List editor is displayed Producer binding list l j x Group ID 2 Group comment Groupe comment Network JETCR Variable Type Network varl DINT ETCP var DINT ETCP vara DINT ETCP Cancel 2 Enter a unique Group ID and optional comment 3 Specify the network used for the bindings DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 83 4 Specify each variable making up the producer variable group a In the variable list click The External Binding editor is displayed External binding a X Binding from My Groups Producing variable Info Type Direction Comment Alias Binding Parameters Cancel b Inthe Producing variable field select the variable to include in the group The selected variable s information is displayed as well as the default network binding parameters You can edit the values for the network binding parameters c Click OK 84 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Editing Producer Variable
190. bols FC elements 249 greater than operator 508 greater than or equal operator 507 grid displaying for language editors 197 editing mode for the Dictionary 131 view for I O Wiring 159 groups creating for variables 91 managing for variables 91 of variables opening 91 GRST statement 471 GSTART statement 468 GSTATUS statement 472 guideline areas managing in FBD editor 254 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index hardware architecture view 109 headers footers including as printing option 340 hidden variables computer allocated effect on online changes 330 hiding resource links internal bindings 77 the status bar Workbench 25 toolbars Workbench 14 variable comments in language editors 279 hierarchy changing for SFC child programs 103 restrictions for SFC and FC programs 96 history reports creating 366 HSD network parameter 62 HYSTER function block 589 I O devices adding for I O wiring 169 deleting conversions 171 deleting from I O wiring 171 freeing channels of 174 mapping channels of 172 modifying with online changes 331 opening for I O wiring 170 setting the real or virtual attribute for 171 wiring channels of 172 I O specific actions described 423 inserting in charts 244 I O variable comments displaying or hiding 279 I O wiring adding I O devices to 169 appearance of 156 deleting I O devices and conversions from 171 freeing channels in devices 174 643 grid view of 159 mapping channels of de
191. by vertical lines named left power rail and right power rail respectively left power rail T m ama o J right power rail LD diagram graphic symbols are connected to power rails or to other symbols by connection lines or links Connection lines are horizontal or vertical horizontal connection lines vertical connection lines vertical connection lines with OR meaning Each line segment has a boolean state FALSE or TRUE The Boolean state is the same for all the segments directly linked together Any horizontal line connected to the left vertical power rail has the TRUE state 436 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Multiple Connections The Boolean state given to a single horizontal connection line is the same on the left and on the right ends of the line Combining horizontal and vertical connection lines enables the building of multiple connections The Boolean state of the ends of a multiple connection follows logic rules A multiple connection on the left combines more than one horizontal lines connected on the left side of a vertical line and one line connected on its right side The Boolean state of the right end is the LOGICAL OR between all the left extremities Example of multiple LEFT connection right end state is v1 OR v2 OR v3 A multiple connection on the right combines one horizontal line connected on the eft side of a vertical line and more than one line connected on its right side The Boole
192. cally refreshed elements are placed according to the grid and links are redrawn Select BSE Ve Selections can contain text graphics or both To make a selection e Click the cursor on an element to make change a selection To select multiple elements in LD or ST or IL e Drag the cursor to highlight multiple elements in the workspace OR e Hold down SHIFT then use the cursor keys to extend the current selection To select multiple elements in FBD e Click in a blank area of the workspace then drag to enclose the required elements OR e Hold down CTRL or SHIFT then use the mouse to add to the current selection Note In the FBD editor ESC removes the current selection If the editor is in element insertion mode ESC returns to select mode DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 273 Resize The dimensions of individual programming elements can be changed Resizing elements in the Multi language editor is only valid for FBD POUs To resize an element 1 Select the element to resize 2 Click and hold the cursor over on the edge of the selected element 3 Drag the edge to the desired position The cursor changes during a resize 4 Release the mouse button to complete the operation Note Elements cannot be resized so that they overlap other elements you may need to move elements prior to resizing Undo Redo The Multi language editor provides a multi level Undo Redo facility limited to only one
193. cate the library s PRJlibrary MDB file c Click Open A message stating that the library is not licensed is displayed d Click OK The License Manager is displayed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 287 The 288 Do one of the following To license the third party library project at this time click Send in the License Manager then include all required information and send the email To license the third party library project at a later time click Cancel in the License Manager You can launch the licensing process at any time by selecting the unlicensed third party library project then clicking Browse to locate select and open the library s PRJlibrary MDB file The original setup code and user codes as well as a Registration Key 1 and Registration Key 2 will be returned via e mail Upon reception make sure the setup and user codes are the same as those in the License Manager window then copy and paste the registration keys in their respective fields third party library project is enabled for use DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Debug When developing an application you can choose to debug 1 e detect and remove errors from a project using one of two methods e Simulation mode In this case inputs and outputs are not managed by the target virtual machine The rest i e Binding exchanges and execution of the POUs of each resource is executed by the standard Windows platform Each res
194. cation Operators alo ST equivalence aol0 ail01 ail02 ao5 ai51 ai52 ai53 488 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IL equivalence LD ailol MUL ail02 ST aolo LD ai51 MUL ai52 MUL ai53 ST ao5 fs Note For this Operator the number of inputs can be extended to more than two Arguments inputs SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING output SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING Description can be of any integer real TIME or STRING format all inputs must have the same format addition of the input terms Addition of two or more integer real TIME or STRING variables DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 489 Example FBD example with Addition Operators an a e ais H ST equivalence aol0 ail01 ail02 ao5 ai51 ai52 ai53 IL equivalence LD ADD ST LD 490 ail0 1 ail02 aolo ai51 ai52 ai53 ao5 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Arguments INI SINT DINT REAL TIME can be of any integer real or TIME format IN2 SINT DINT REAL TIME IN1 and IN2 must have the same format Q SINT DINT REAL TIME subtraction first second Description Subtraction of two integer real or TIME variables first second Example FBD example with Subtraction Operators ST equivalence aol0 ail01 ail02 ao5 ai51 1 ai53
195. ccar cuca eg tacac seamen edenn camismaraeeaes 299 Seting Break POmils omcsroneennne n 301 Removina BreakpoiNtS eiaa rere usieeis 301 Stepp OA POUS o a mat eans te acensesa Rese 302 Det Cy Cle TiM Genna a N A 303 Wier Eoek Unlo Rencana an E A 304 Dianos urnen a A 307 SEC Break POMS rennene a n E E T 311 Breakpoint on Step Activation csin A e aiia 312 Breakpoint on Step Deactivation cccccccccceceessessssssssnteeeeeeeeeees 313 Bi akpointon Transition dans Beresaeeastaee 314 Transition Clearing Forcing cccccccccccecsesesssessnsnaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 315 SP Vine V arta Dles x i25 2cicess a E a ennai comamoauians 316 Adding Variables to the Spy List cccccccceccesssssssesesssseeeeeees 316 Selecting Variables in th Spy LiSt 2c icaciercrea tide cies 317 Removing Variables from the Spy List eeeccccessseessseteeeees 318 Reatraneins the Spy Listccciie aie aaa ae 318 DAVIN ASO ISL aotea T maaiaanseeenenees 318 Opening an Existing Spy Dist ssnusiecansidecansimeenae tendo 319 Forcing the Value of a Spy List Variable ccccceeesssesseeeeeeees 319 Simulated Panel or VOS sissniidicu sas ais ican E E RS 320 PPC AE IAC Css ee hse as tnsestse etre ncctue E OE 322 Ment Bar aeniea E EN 323 Toolbar N 324 Conte x ial Meneer a psa cana can d dassicanousenestanenmiavoaanens 325 Displaying I O Device Window Heade S cccccscccccccccceeeceeeeeees 323 Moving or Hiding the Browser ccccccccccccceees
196. ce description 1 Select the resource 2 From the Tools menu choose Edit Description 3 Edit the description as required 66 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Variable Bindings Bindings are directional links i e access paths between variables located in different resources One variable is referred to as the producing variable and the other as the consuming variable The value stored in the producing variable is transferred to the consuming variable The Workbench enables two types of bindings internal bindings and external bindings Internal bindings are between resources within the same project External bindings are between resources belonging to different projects Note Online changes are possible as long as internal and external binding definitions remain the same Binding the variable V1 from resource R1 to the variable V2 of resource R2 means that V1 is periodically copied to V2 using memory sharing or network exchanges Variables coming from bindings consumed variables are refreshed in the resource at the beginning of the cycle each time the producing resource sends them i e on each end of the producing resource cycle The variable is not updated in the consuming resource until the producing resource sends them through the binding media For example Producer Binding Consumer Fe EE OE No update of the variable on that cycle DS800 Development Suite does not impose the read only accessibility f
197. ce emer cere nee errr 126 Wanlablies Tree cic asloaita tee eal etipcae eee ada ciehiad co pias cee ait coon aed 127 PA AMA CUCU ecane re a ea aaimaumcngeOnss Ines 128 Types CC aasekoscctsiatinccnnscan O A nde atiue names ses 129 C reatino SLU CET CS eied EEE O 129 IRGMAMING SIrUCIUTES caponar T tee anes 130 DPeletino SUG C UU S ecnin N a S 130 D np d Words TTE eria R EA eenats 130 Workine withthe Grid iesnisdarensdiue aan a 131 Resiina C oluUMNS snaa acl na ae eran arate et erste att carn Anca 132 Selecting Rows and Blements 3 20 0 0 0 scaasinioehiact iad ae eeesaeeeneses 132 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Table of Contents Editing the Contents of the Gnd iid on e E 133 Adding or Inserting ROWS ccccccccsceeseeensnssnecccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeaas 134 Moving ROWS enren deta ddieateee te sneeteaidausasaneanat aus denavdaatosaaes 135 Expanding or Collapsing Grid Components ccceeeeesseesneeeeees 135 Cutting Copying and Deleting Elements ccccccceeeeesseeeeeeeeeees 136 Finding and Replacing Elements ccccsssscccccccececceeeeeeeeeeesseeeenaas 137 Pastine Feme jai sacc sieks cerca dei Caneel gaia sab daas Monee oaacee RM uheerebouaiadsunatuenss 138 OTS CHS G11 oea tannocdeeaee ooo NEN 138 Duiplicatime IR OWS esse tea sence caea dae E 139 Renumbering Addresses earnen ai a a 140 PUNE aC idesannnissso mn a deat dace atentesaieentaeerna adtuaedaasosaes 141 Variables Crid soseri
198. ce window select the POU for which to set access control 2 From the Edit menu choose Properties The Program Properties window is displayed showing the Security tab Program Properties 4 l X General Security Code Generation Password Use Resource Password Confirm Mew 3 Specify a password To use a unique password in the New field enter a password then reenter it in the Confirm New field To use the same password as set for the resource to which the POU belongs check Use Resource Password DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 105 To unlock a POU When entering a password while in debug mode or performing builds the POU is only unlocked after stopping the debug mode or when the build is completed 1 In the resource window right click the POU then from the contextual menu choose Enter Password 2 Inthe Security dialog box enter the password for the POU Security es Password Cancel The POU is unlocked 106 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Generating Debug and Monitoring Information You can choose to generate debug and symbols monitoring information for POUs Debug information is available for ST IL and LD POUs programs functions and function blocks for use when debugging using the step by step mode Symbols monitoring information is available for ST IL FBD and LD programs and function blocks for use when debugging or simulating to graphically display th
199. cer variable used in the binding no longer exists The project holding the producer variable cannot be accessed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 81 External Binding List Toolbar The External Binding List window toolbar enables you to perform many external binding operations The operations performed by the toolbar items differ depending on whether these are in the Consumer or Producer groups sections i ae Accesses the online help In the Consumer groups section accesses the Consumer Binding list where you define links between resources and define external bindings from the Bindings editor In the Producer groups section accesses the Producer Binding list where you define groups of producer variables for use in bindings with consumer variables of other projects In the Consumer groups section edits an existing external variable binding In the Producer groups section edits an existing group of producer variables In the Consumer groups section deletes an external variable binding In the Producer groups section deletes a group of producer variables To access the External Binding list 1 From the link architecture view select the resource for which to create producer groups 2 From the Project menu choose External Binding List or click D from the Window Buttons toolbar 82 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Defining Producer Variable Groups You define producer groups of varia
200. ch 277 Select All All the elements in the current Program are simultaneously selected with the Select All command To Select All elements e From the Edit menu choose Select All CTRL A Find Matching Name For LD only Find Matching Name finds and selects matched variable names within the current POU You can also find matching names for function blocks or rung labels To find a matching variable name 1 Select a variable with the name to match 2 To select the next element with the same variable name as the current selection press lt ALT F2 gt Find Matching Coil For LD only Find Matching Coil finds and selects matched variable names within the current POU This feature is mainly used while in debug mode to quickly find rungs forcing suspicious variables To find a matching coil 1 Select a variable name to match 2 To select the next coil with the same variable name as the current selection press lt ALT F5 gt 278 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Go to Line The Go To Line command is only valid when editing ST and IL POUs In the Multi language editor you access it from the File menu by choosing Go To Line You enter a line number for the current POU indicating the line to which to move the cursor Display Hide Comments You specify displaying or hiding variable comments at the language editor level However you can also choose to display or hide individual variable comments For instance
201. ch of its initial Steps The abbreviated syntax is equivalent to an SFC Child action block having the S qualifier The extended syntax only applies to SFC child function blocks GSTART lt child_name gt or GSTART lt child_name step_name inputl input2 inputn gt where child_name represents the name of the SFC child POU step name represents the name of the active step step name must be preceded by two underscore characters e g S1 inputl input2 inputn indicate the values of the input parameters of the SFC child POU the specified SFC program must be a child of the one in which the statement is written none Children of the child program are not automatically started by the GSTART statement For details about SFC actions see page 407 Note Since GSTART is not in the IEC 61131 standard it is preferable to use the S qualifier attached to the child name 468 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual GKILL Statement in SFC Action Name GKILL Meaning Kills a child SFC program by removing the Tokens currently existing in its Steps The syntax is equivalent to an SFC Child action block having the R qualifier Syntax GKILL lt child_name gt where child_name represents the name of the SFC child POU Operands the specified SFC program must be a child of the one in which the statement is written Return value none Children of the child program are automatically killed with the specified progr
202. ched to the transitions Level 2 programming for SFC elements can be developed with ST or LD or call an SFC child Special projects made up of configurations and resources in which you define functions and function blocks for reuse throughout DS800 Development Suite projects Libraries also enable you to modularize projects and to isolate functions and function blocks so that these can be validated separately For FBD SFC or LD diagrams a graphic component connecting elements in a diagram The view graphically displaying the resources of a project and the resource data links used for internal bindings between them This is the default view of the Workbench providing a main entry point to all editors A lexical unit that directly represents a value DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Local scope Locked I O Maximum time Memory for Retain Message Method Modifier IL Network Network Driver Non stored Action OEM OEM Parameter Operand IL Operation IL Operator Output Scope of a declaration applying to only one POU Input or output variable disconnected logically from the corresponding I O device by a Lock command sent by the user from the debugger Time of the longest cycle since the Virtual Machine has started the execution of the programs of a resource Run time setting for a resource indicating the location where retained values are stored the required syntax depends on the im
203. chitecture view DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Insert Configuration Resource Network Add Variable Group Add Program Add SFC Sub program DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench inserts a configuration in the workspace This option is only available in the hardware architecture view inserts a resource For the hardware architecture view of a project you insert resources in selected configurations For the link architecture view you insert resources in the workspace inserts a network in the workspace This option is only available in the hardware architecture view adds a variable group to the selected resource This option is only available in the link architecture view adds a program to the selected resource This option is only available in the link architecture view adds an SFC sub program to the selected program When an FC program is selected adds an FC sub program This option is only available in the link architecture view Project Types Variables Function Function Block Parameters External Binding List Internal Binding List Defined Words I O Wiring Build Project Library Rebuild Project Library Clean Project Library Build Resource Clean Resource Build Program Stop Build Ctrl 3 Ctrl G Ctrl 0 Ctrl 1 Ctrl 2 accesses the Types Tree of the Dictionary view accesses the Variables Tree of the Dictionary view accesses the Paramet
204. choose Show Project Tree View DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 393 Cross References Browser The Cross References Browser is a tool that finds in the POUs of a project all references to global variables 1 e cross references defined in a project It provides a total view of the declared variables in the programs of the project and where these are used The aim of the browser is to list all the global variables I Os and instances declared in the project and to localize in the source of each program the parts of source code where those variables are used The browser is very useful for a global view of one variable life cycle This helps localize side effects and reduce the time to understand the project during maintenance The browser is divided into five sections e 6A the list of global objects declared in a project eB the search field where you enter a name to search in the list of objects e C the description of the object selected in the list e D the locations of the object selected in the list in the project POUs For variables the description includes the direction 1 e READING FROM WRITING TO e EE an output window where messages and error messages are displayed BY PROJECTS Browser ie Oj x LEADBUTTON 10 1 CONFIGI MAIN ome S CONSERRFROMR2 CONF Type BOOL a A B Group Start ariables Cc ie Eb CONSERRFROMAS CONF Initial value eal Comment start Lead pr
205. ck 590 internal bindings accessing the list of 71 defining 78 deleting 80 deleting resource links for 76 described 71 editing the contents of 80 viewing for a resource 77 internal variable comments displaying or hiding 279 inverted coils described 444 contacts described 440 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index J JMP operator for IL 480 jumps described FBD elements 431 described LD elements 450 described SFC elements 398 inserting FBD elements 268 inserting LD elements 262 inserting SFC elements 222 K keywords list of reserved 385 L labels described FBD elements 431 described IL elements 474 described LD elements 450 inserting FBD elements 268 inserting LD elements 263 language editors appearance of 182 debug toolbar in 187 FBD toolbar in 195 Flow Chart toolbar in 191 for SFC described 209 IL toolbar in 193 LD toolbar in 194 managing the workspace of 197 multi language described 253 opening POUs from 206 options toolbar in 186 SFC breakpoints toolbar in 189 SFC toolbar in 189 645 ST toolbar in 192 standard toolbar in 185 toolbars summary of available 184 layers toolbar main environment 19 LD Ladder Diagram aligning coils on rungs 264 applying paste special in POUs 277 changing coils and contacts types 263 connection lines described 436 direct coils described 443 direct contacts described 440 displaying cursor coordinates 254 falling edge detection
206. cl arici samen an cudnchc aden Mu nuakaaananuetenape estas anauaemnseanccoutaai acatnese 200 FAS SPO POSTAGE BS soe5 cp ic Peat ata ek es Or a ai TS 201 TASER Blok Scenca EE a 203 Pintine POUS rreraren a ale chia ea ia Sha ett cee ca 205 Openimne the Dictionary 2 534 aie Sea cac eerste Seed nee ee 205 Opening Another POU sesca a laiescers niente wl Malar wee ecu 206 Finding and Replacing in POUS cccccesssssseccceceeeeeeececeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 207 DEC EMO adane iat iycan carn teneeuen dew baad ao eee 209 PIC APA a N one adaatonee 210 Menit AR oh se ocsenls Sa Gras ateaie A Siemens ARS UNA abalone grant 211 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Table of Contents Working with the Edilofnissn a a aoeeacsaananeduaseesesnareaess 214 SC BCC MIS nirera i a O hearer omeee 215 Minal Siepen A 215 US a E E A E E E EAE A A E EE T 216 VRAIS 11 Otis iis iaasige ase Geass ar tdaaecaas ane nares anenanens canteens 216 Divereence ONVEre ene s dssiccinheceeedsodersoeatetaapes Sidenote tiosaaenes 217 Creatine New BranChes erison a 219 Deleting Branches nenien a 220 El E E E A E E A 221 J a crane e O E 222 Manac ine Elemen cesna area eab dened Maca cerca em aden see 223 DCC Cli E A A E E E S T 229 Rename cure nan NN 224 MIONO erone e a a 225 Clainne EO 225 COPY eot a A EO 225 e E E ti E E E E coutsanateecse maces Goaaae 226 Delea E O A T OE Tree ayy 227 COLO aeoe A OO 227 WE SV Cl 2 oiron ee n EN 228 Coding Action Blocks for Steps
207. code Its length cannot exceed 255 characters including spaces DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 383 Empty string constant expression is represented by two apostrophes with no space or tab character between them this is an empty string The dollar special character followed by other special characters can be used in a string constant expression to represent a non printable character Sequence Meaning ASCII hex Example character 16 24 I paid 5 for this apostrophe 16 27 Enter Y for YES L line feed 16 0a next L line R carriage return 16 0d llo R He N new line 16 0d0a This is a line N P new page 16 0c lastline P first line T tabulation 16 09 name Tsize T date hh any character 16 hh ABCD 41 42 43 44 hh is the hexadecimal value of the ASCII code for the expressed character 384 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Variables Variables can be LOCAL to one program or GLOBAL to a resource Local variables can be used by one program only Global variables can be used in any program of the resource Local or Global information is called the Scope of the variable Variable names must conform to the following rules e Names cannot exceed 128 characters e The first character must be a letter e The following characters can be letters digits or the underscore character Reserved Keywords A list of the reserved keywords is show
208. code on the corresponding virtual machine of the configuration a message is displayed To refresh the status of resources gt From the Debug menu choose Refresh Status The status information displayed in the title bars of all resources is updated 292 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Download When simulating a project you do not need to perform a download operation You perfom a download operation for each resource having code to send to a target The Download window shows the list of resources making up a project In this list resources are displayed next to the name of the configuration to which they are attached When the resource code contains debug information generated for ST IL or LD programs the word debug appears in comments Note Each time you perform a download operation the Workbench verifies the coherency between the current resource definitions and the resources code to download The Workbench also verifies the coherency between all versions of the resource code You can access version information for a resource Conditions necessary to download a resource 1 The code corresponding to the resource available on the hardware configuration must first be generated by building the project or resource By default TIC code is generated for a DS800 virtual machine 2 Verify that the Power Switch parameter in the DS800 screen of ROCLINK 800 is set to on 3 The computer where the Workbench is in
209. comments FC elements 245 connector links FC elements 244 contact on the left LD elements 261 contact on the right LD elements 261 contacts LD elements for FBD POUs 270 corners FBD elements 267 DO WHILE structures FC elements 242 flow links FC elements 243 function blocks FBD elements 267 I O specific actions FC elements 244 identifiers in POUs 201 IF THEN ELSE structures FC elements 241 initial steps SFC elements 215 jumps SFC elements 222 jumps to labels FBD elements 268 jumps to labels LD elements 262 labels FBD elements 268 labels LD elements 263 LD vertical connections FBD POUs 270 left power bars LD elements for FBD POUs 270 links LD elements 264 links SFC elements 221 644 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual links connection FBD elements 267 networks 120 operators functions and function blocks in POUs 203 parallel blocks LD elements 262 parallel contacts LD elements 262 resources in configurations 112 resources in the link architecture view 50 returns FBD elements 269 returns LD elements 263 right power bars LD elements for FBD POUs 271 rows in the Dictionary grid 134 rungs LD elements 264 steps SFC elements 216 sub programs FC elements 245 tests FC elements 240 transitions SFC elements 216 variables FBD elements 266 WHILE DO structures FC elements 242 installation directory structure of 29 instance symbols extra bytes 107 INTEGRAL function blo
210. consuming variable bindings for a resource gt In the top row of the Resource binding grid click the corresponding resource number To view the bindings defined for a project gt In the Resource binding grid click le Hiding and Showing Resource Links In the link architecture view you can choose to show or hide the data links between resources In hidden mode links cannot be activated or selected Links appear as short arrows indicating their direction sticking out from the top right corner of resources Main send info ta R2 ol lt _ B Parameters 2 Test get info from R10 HZ g peh Parameters j Variable Groups i g bes Programs P Yariable Groups am 421 Programs am LII Functions H To hide or show data links You can hide or show data links using the main menu or the Options toolbar gt From the Options menu choose Hide Show Links DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 77 Defining Internal Variable Bindings Before defining bindings between variables you must first link the resources to which they belong For bindings one variable is known as the producing variable and the other as the consuming variable You can only define bindings between variables of a same type Producing variables can have any direction attribute i e input output and internal Whereas consuming variables can only have the output or internal attribute and must also have the Free a
211. ction finds and replaces text in a project a configuration a resource or a POU jumps to the indicated step or transition number renames the element renumbers all elements in the chart in sequential order add an action block 211 Edit Delete Action Block Continued Edit Level 2 Enter Edit Level 2 in Separate Ctrl Window Enter Insert Set Identifier Ctrl I Insert New Rung Ctrl R Tools Browser Ctrl B Debug Debug Alt F6 Simulation Alt F7 Debug FB F11 Options Set Level 2 Language Customize Ctrl U Target Code Settings deletes an action block opens the level 2 programming for an element opens the level 2 programming for an element in a separate window accesses the Select Variable dialog box where you can insert a variable inserts a rung accesses the Cross References browser listing and localizing all instances of global variables and I Os declared in a project switches the application to debug mode switches the application to simulation mode opens a selected function block in the language editor with its instantiation values sets the programming language used for level 2 programming For programs possible languages are ST IL and LD For function blocks possible languages are ST and LD accesses the customization properties for Workbench views and editors accesses the compilation options for the POU 212 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Window Help Cascade T
212. ctures If Type is STRING this represents the length maximum 255 characters Dimension Example 1 10 for a one dimensional Array 1 4 1 7 for a two dimensional Array The dimension must be defined as a positive double integer DINT value Comment User comments Free format e Structures Column Details Name Element name maximum 128 characters conforming to the IEC 61131 Standard Element Type Element Type BOOL SINT USINT BYTE INT UINT WORD DINT UDINT DWORD LINT ULINT LWORD REAL LREAL TIME DATE STRING User Arrays Structures If type is STRING this represents the length maximum 255 characters Comment User comments Free format Notes e To create a structure with an element with a dimension first create an array then create a structure with an element of type lt Array name gt e Type recursive use is not allowed e g one field of str1 cannot use the str1 type 144 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Defined Words Grid The columns for defined words are Column Details Word Name used in ST source files first character must be a letter following characters must be letters digits or underscore Equivalent String according to ST syntax that replaces the defined word during compiling Example Word PI Equivalent 3 14159 Comment User comments Free format DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 145 Defining TLP Variables The TLP browser enables
213. d for a project A virtual connection between two software elements See Channel Element grouping several simple devices This provides the means for manufacturers to mix types and directions The implementation of the I O Driver of a complex device corresponds to the implementation of the drivers of all the devices composing it Parameters are also attached to a complex device OEM parameters Element grouping several channels of the same type and same direction INPUT OUTPUT An Array can be connected to a device if all elements are connected to contiguous channels the type of the array must be the type of the Device Variables of the same type can also be connected to channels of a device A device corresponds to a hardware device and an I O Driver in or linked to the Virtual Machine Parameters are also attached to a device the OEM parameters I O devices are defined by the integrator C code which makes the interface between a Virtual Machine and the hardware devices The driver can be statically linked to the Virtual Machine or in a separate DLL such as for the Windows NT target Two types of drivers are available for use in the Workbench generic and advanced Variable connected to an input or output device An IO variable must be connected on a channel of an IO device Definition of the links between the variables of the Project and the channels of the devices existing on the Target system IsaRSI exe Enhanced ser
214. d shows where a binding comes from and where it goes to the type of the variable and the network used for communicating Bet Variable To 7 Variable me ea ian lest a unten Timex Fagg 2isad TneProg ime ET rar pj 3 Flash Stat ie iman Timema _feep 3 Flash___ TimeProg TIME ETCP The column between the variable information indicates the status of the binding 3 The binding does not have parameters and the status is OK gt The binding does not have parameters but the status is bad 72 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual gt The binding has parameters and the status is OK TE The binding has parameters but the status is bad A bad status occurs when the types string sizes or dimensions of variables don t correspond or if the network used for the binding doesn t exist When working in the Variable binding grid you can perform various tasks using the mouse or keyboard commands Description Mouse Keyboard Move into the grid Select cells Arrows keys Switch to the Click in the Resource binding grid Tab Resource binding grid Binding List Toolbar The Binding List window toolbar enables you to perform many resource link and variable binding operations Hides the resource binding grid Accesses the online help Creates a new binding variable Edits an existing binding variable This operation is only available for use in the variable binding grid 7 Deletes selected cells rows or colum
215. ddress of the target for example 192 168 2 36 Note DS800 automatically creates connections when creating projects When you link a configuration to a ROCLINK 800 configuration file the IP address is automatically assigned The list of available parameters depends on the network to which the configuration is connected This list may be empty Some parameters may be read only displayed greyed For the ETCP Ethernet network driver only the IP address of the configuration is required Note A connection may fail if the network protocol is not supported by the configuration s target DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 123 To connect a configuration and network 1 Click and hold the mouse button on the title bar of the configuration to connect The mouse becomes a network connection cursor T 2 Drag and drop the mouse cursor to the required network The connection is created and the Connection Properties dialog box is displayed Connection Properties i X Network Parameters Name vawe Comment PAddress 192 1668 2 65 P address or Computer nam Cancel Apply 3 Inthe Value field enter the IP address then click OK Deleting Connections You can remove existing connections between configurations and networks To delete a connection between a configuration and network 1 Select the connection 2 Do one of the following From the Edit menu choose Delete Connection Press Delete 124 DS8
216. de for 345 checking in 363 cleaning 348 closing 36 comparing versions of 365 controlling access for 41 creating 34 creating history reports for 366 defining dependencies on libraries for 282 editing modes for 32 filenames for 36 getting previous versions of 365 hardware architecture view of 109 link architecture view of 48 managing 32 modes for testing 295 opening 36 opening with a command line 36 previewing printing documents for 342 printing 40 printing items in 337 renaming 39 saving changes to 39 security state of resources within 36 selecting items for printing 338 stopping builds 348 storage location of 29 templates for 34 using libraries in 282 viewing the history of 364 promoting SFC child programs 103 properties for configuration identification 115 for resource custom parameters 63 for resource identification 55 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual for target access configurations 118 for target definition configurations 117 pulse actions within steps 405 R operator for IL 479 R_TRIG function block 591 RAND function 555 real attribute setting for I O devices 171 constant expressions 382 variables 390 real time execution mode resources 298 rearranging variables in spy list 318 rebuilding code for projects 345 POUs 346 refresh rate setting for resources 290 refreshing status of resources 290 reloading of last project when starting setting 26 removing breakpoints for steps and transitions SFC
217. define their mem Resources Functions Se Function I er Function Blocks Grid displays the parameters of the function zk Function Block in the ToolTip Grid displays the parameters of the function block Note When the cursor is positioned over an item the full name and comments are displayed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Types Tree The various tree levels are represented using the following icons Top Level LL Arrays 2 m Structures Level Structures Individual Structures When the cursor is positioned over an item the full name and comments are displayed in the ToolTip Types have a Common Scope they can be used as a type or any variable of any resource Creating Structures To create a structure 1 Right click on the Structures top of tree 2 From the Edit menu choose Add Structure A structure has been created at the end of the tree Its name is displayed and ready for editing Note In addition to a name you can include a comment e g StructName comment DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 129 Renaming Structures You can rename a structure using the main menu or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking a structure To rename a structure 1 Right click on the structure to rename 2 From the Edit menu choose Rename Structure 3 Enter a name and comment in the dialog box Deleting Structures You can delete structures using the main menu or a conte
218. derlined in the menu s title For example to open the File Menu you press lt Alt gt lt F gt shown in this User s Guide as ALT F 2 Choose a menu selection by clicking on it by pressing its underlined letter or by using the cursor keys to highlight it and then pressing lt Enter gt Menu selections that appear in grey are not currently available Control Icon When a Program is open the menu bar has a Control Icon on the left Control Menu Clicking on the Control Icon opens the Control Menu The Control Menu is used to position the Window or to alternate between them Window Buttons The standard window buttons appear at the right end of the menu bar DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 183 Toolbars The language editors holds toolbars performing various functions Displaying the toolbars To show or hide a toolbar 1 From the Options Menu choose Layout The Layout Dialog Box appears 2 Check uncheck the names of the toolbars to show hide Moving toolbars The toolbars can be placed anywhere on the screen To move a toolbar 1 Point the cursor at the toolbar s title bar or main panel Note Do not point at the control icon or one of the window s buttons 2 Press and hold the left mouse button 3 Drag the toolbar by moving the mouse Eee hw elcid COE Je 2 ESC 5 Fes F3 f Fa F5 r F Eve Fa F9 F10 F114 FIZ p ro I 7e E E ON H e T m e b Me T mo 4 a
219. describes a conversion Such a conversion can be attached to any input or output integer or real variable Cyclic redundancy checking A tool that finds all references to variables 1 e cross references defined in the POUs of a project The browser provides a total view of the declared variables in the programs of the project and where these are used Comma Separated Values A delimited data format having each piece of information separated by commas and each line ending with a carriage return The CSV file format can be used for importing or exporting variables data Result of an instruction in an IL POU The current result can be modified by an instruction or used to set a variable DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Cycle Cycle Time Cycle to cycle Mode Database Data Link Debug Information Declared Instance of a function block Defined Word The Virtual Machine executes the programs of a resource as a cycle All programs of the resource are executed following the order defined by the user from the first program to the last and again and again Before the execution of the first program inputs are read After the execution of the last program the outputs are refreshed The time between two input scans on the target It represents the time to execute one cycle The cycle time can differ at each cycle if none is programmed When the cycle time is shorter the Virtual Machine waits until this time has
220. different objects of the same chart cannot have the same name or logical number Programming language for an action can be ST LD or IL An action is always connected with links one arriving to it one starting from it FC Conditions A Condition represents a Boolean test A Condition is identified by a number and a name According to the evaluation of attached ST LD or IL expression the flow is directed to YES or NO path Below are the possible drawings for a Condition symbol NG NO m C YES YES YES f E NO Two different objects of the same chart cannot have the same name or logical number 420 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual The programming of a test is either e an expression in ST or e asingle rung in LD with no symbol attached to the unique Coil or e several instructions in IL The IL register or current result is used to evaluate the Condition When programmed in ST text the expression may optionally be followed by a semi colon When programmed in LD the unique coil represents the condition value A condition equal to e 0 or FALSE directs the flow to NO e or TRUE directs the flow to YES A test is always connected with an arriving link and both forward connections must be defined DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 421 Other FC Components In addition to basic components more complex flow charts are built using FC sub programs You can also use Connectors in
221. directory per resource Common files shared by Emerson products Solobug files for use when reporting errors on Emerson products Online help files for Emerson products Sentinel driver files for use with hardware keys Projects are stored in the Projects directory as MS Access database MDB files lt drive gt Emerson Projects DS800 2 1 Prj lt project name gt PRJLIBRARY MDB For details on the project architecture see page 368 Note Existing projects can be manually moved or copied to the tpl directory to create new project templates Example The panel resource in the main configuration within the proj project is stored in the directory lt drive gt Emerson Projects DS800 2 1 Prj proj1 main panel DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 31 Working with Projects You can work with DS800 Development Suite projects in one of two project editing modes e Normal e Single resource The normal mode provides access for a single user to all resources and POUs making up a project While in the normal mode no other users can access the project or its resources Before opening a project in normal mode multiple users can access the individual resources of the project for editing purposes i e single resource editing mode The single resource mode limits access for an individual user to one resource and its POUs Other users can access other resources of the same project Note Make sure to build the complete project
222. e H Temperature Temperature Temperature E Temperatwefe DINT Temperate T O S o Tempat o 17 o Tempat oT sS o Tempete T O e Tematu o J o o Tempete T S000 g in oo ra in o mn To initialize the elements of an array You initialize an array one element at a time 1 Set the dictionary to grid mode 2 Expand the array by clicking the sign 3 Double click the array element s Init Value column 4 Enter a value corresponding to the element type DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 151 To initialize the fields of a structure The first line with the structure s name displays the list of each field s values You initialize a structure one field at a time 1 Set the dictionary into the grid mode 2 Expand the structure by clicking on the sign 3 Double click on the structure field in the Initial Value column 4 Enter the value that corresponds to the field s type The first line with the structure s name displays the list of field s values The parenthesis display a list of values that correspond to the array s elements 152 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Validation Validation is performed at all levels of input and use of the grid When an error is detected a message box with an error description appears Cell level Validation The system processes cell level validation e IEC 61131 compliance checks of Variable Array and Structure
223. e Operator LD ST S R AND amp OR XOR ADD SUB MUL DIV GT GE EQ LE LT NE CAL JMP RET 476 Modifier N N A Ci Oe Z Z Z Operand Variable constant Variable BOOL variable BOOL variable BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Variable constant Variable constant Variable constant Variable constant Variable constant Variable constant Variable constant Variable constant Variable constant Variable constant Function block instance name Label Description Loads operand Stores current result Sets to TRUE Resets to FALSE Boolean AND Boolean AND Boolean OR exclusive OR Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Test gt Test gt Test Test lt Test lt Test lt gt Calls a function block Jumps to label Returns from function Executes delayed operation DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual In the next section only operators which are specific to the IL language are described other standard operators can be found in the section standard operators Function Blocks and Functions LD Operator Operation Allowed modifiers Operand Example LDex LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LDN loads a value in the current result N constant expression internal input or output Variable false result FALSE Boolean constant true result TRUE Boolean constant 123 result integer constant
224. e started or killed according to the change of the step activity signal An SFC action can have the N Non stored S Set or R Reset Qualifier This is the meaning of the actions on SFC child N on a child starts the child sequence when the Step becomes active and kills the child sequence when the Step becomes inactive S on a child starts the child sequence when the Step becomes active nothing is done when the Step becomes inactive R on a child kills the child sequence when the Step becomes active nothing is done when the Step becomes inactive DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 407 The SFC sequence specified as an Action must be a child SFC Program of the program currently being edited Note that using the S Set or R Reset Qualifiers for an SFC Action has exactly the same effect as using the GSTART and GKILL statements programmed in an ST pulse Action Example SFC Program using SFC Actions The main SFC Program is named Father It has two SFC children called SeqMIx and SeqPump The SFC programming of the father SFC Program is Qualifier Child SFC Name Start Full 10 TEE 5 List of Instructions Actions corresponding to several operations can be written as a program using ST IL and LD syntax Such actions can have N PO or P1 qualifiers 408 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Calling Functions and Function Blocks Functions written in ST LD or FBD or Function Blocks
225. e 2 1 User Manual Creating New Branches Inserting a new branch creates an alternative routing for connections To insert a new branch on a divergence or convergence 1 Select a divergence convergence F3 SS 2 On the SFC toolbar click Note Moving the upper handles on the left or right of a divergence or convergence automatically causes a new branch to be created To create a branch next to existing branches select the divergence OR divergence for transitions AND divergence for steps then press F9 or click the new branch icon and add an element transition or step Example Right click or press F9 to add a branch Add element on new branch DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 219 Deleting Branches Moving non connected branches back onto the nearest connected branch deletes extra branches Select the divergence place the cursor on the upper right handle red square then drag the branch onto the branch with S29 Select branch end and move towards Branch is removed from existing element divergence Deleting an element removes the branch directly above it Select and delete element Element and branch are removed 220 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Link Drawing a link is a drag and drop operation linking one element to another Links always move from a step to a transition or from a transition to a step Links can be moved using drag and drop operations on the handles r
226. e 391 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 377 Based on the above standard IEC 61131 types you can define new user types Furthermore you can define arrays or structures using standard IEC 61131 types arrays or other user types When creating a variable a dimension can be given to define an array The following example shows the MyVar variable of type BOOL having a dimension defined as follows 1 10 FOR i 1 TO 10 DO MyVar i FALSE END FOR 378 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual User Types Arrays You can define arrays of standard IEC 61131 types or user types An array has one or more dimension When an array is defined a variable can be created with this type and a structure can have a field with this type Array dimensions are positive DINT constant expressions and array indexes are DINT constant expressions or variables Note Arrays must be declared in the Dictionary View before using them in Functional Block Diagrams FBD Example 1 One dimensional array MyArrayType is an array of 10 BOOL Its dimension is defined as follows 1 10 MyVar is of type MyArrayType Ok MyVar 4 2 Two dimensional array MyArrayType2 is an array of DINT It has two dimensions defined as follows 1 10 1 3 MyVar2 is of type MyArrayType2 MyVar2 1 2 100 3 Array of an array MyVar3 is an array of MyArrayType Its dimension is defined as follows 1 3 FOR I 1 TO 3 DO FOR J 1 T
227. e current definitions could be overwritten For example getting a project from the control database where a resource and POU have been locally modified since the check in causes the resource and POU to be overwritten with their older definitions contained in the control database When you delete or rename a Workbench element that was checked in to the control database you cannot retrieve any part of the history for this element from the database unless you recreate a new instance of this element having the same name To get a previous version of a Workbench element gt Inthe History list of elements select the version to retrieve then click Get This older version replaces the current version Comparing Current and Previous Versions When viewing the history of a project configuration resource or POU you can choose to compare a previously checked in version of the element with the current version or another checked in version To compare a previous and current version of an element gt Inthe History list of elements select the version with which to compare then click Diff The response indicates whether the files are different or identical To navigate between File Differences windows and the Workbench you need to close the History window DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 365 Ac cessing Details for a Previous Version When viewing the historyof a project configuration resource or POU you can access history det
228. e menu choose Import then Exchange File 2 Inthe Import Exchange File window select the Import from file option then click Next 3 Click Browse to locate the compressed exchange file PXF file then click Next 4 Inthe list at the top of the window select the file name then click Next DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 43 S 6 Ta From the contents of the exchange file select the element to import For resources and POUs you also need to select the import destination Import Exchange File E E x Select elements to import i E Addition simple addition fe E Main simple loop call to ComplesT est EL Project2 Binding error management EL Configi E Bel Main send info to A2 REL ComolesT est Import destination Unselect All Config lt Back Cancel Click Next Assign a name to the new element that will be created Note Before importing elements you should make a back up copy of your project so that you could restore it if the resulting import is unsatisfactory 8 10 44 To create a backup copy of the project check Create a backup copy of the project before importing element The lt prjlibrary BAK gt file is created in the project folder If the results of the import are unsatisfactory you can choose to restore the project Click Next The element import begins When the import is complete do one of the followi
229. e name of the variable in the field at the top left To create a new variable in the top left field type a unique name and click OK then in the New Variable dialog box specify the type and scope for the new variable optionally an alias and comment To specify the local scope select the name of the currently edited POU New Variable 4 l x Hame Booll Type SCOPE Global Alias Comment po Cancel To enter a constant value type the value in the field at the top left 4 Click OK The identifier is inserted in the currently edited POU at the current position 202 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Inserting Blocks You insert blocks 1 e operators functions and function blocks into programs from the Select Blocks window The items displayed in the list depend on the program type For SFC FC ST LD FBD and IL programs the available items are operators OPE standard functions SFU standard function blocks SFB user IEC 61131 Functions IFU user IEC 61131 Function Blocks IFB and all C Functions CFU and Function Blocks CFB supported by the target attached to the current resource x Help z Blocks Parameters Name Type Comment OPE Multiplication of two or more i Addition of two or more integ OPE Subtraction of two integer or User Defined Binary operations Boolean operations i OPE Division of two integer or real
230. e of variable comments gt To display the variable comment select the comment then right click and choose Show Comment gt To hide the variable comment select the comment then right click and choose Hide Comment gt To set the variable comment to use the display hide setting specified for the variable type select the comment then right click and choose Reset Default 280 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Libraries Libraries are special projects made up of configurations and resources in which you define functions and function blocks for reuse throughout DS800 Development Suite projects Libraries also enable you to modularize projects and to isolate functions and function blocks so that these can be validated separately Functions and FBs for Project 1 Projects Libraries Functions and FBs for all projects Functions and function blocks can be written using the IEC 61131 languages FBD LD ST or IL Libraries can also contain POUs global variable definitions and any other item used for testing functions and function blocks Before using libraries you need to create them Creating Libraries You create libraries much the same as you create projects You base a library on a template then develop its elements i e configurations resources programs functions and function blocks Libraries are stored in the same location as projects and are also MS Access database MDB files lt roo
231. e output values of functions and function blocks For details on the graphical display of output values see page 295 You set the generation of debug and symbols monitoring information for a POU on the Code Generation tab of the Program Properties window Program Properties E x General Security Code Generation T Generate debug information Generate symbols monitoring information Instance Symbols Extra Bytes 128 Cancel Apply When generating symbols monitoring information for function blocks you also need to specify the instance symbols extra bytes This indicates the size of memory reserved for each function block instance for adding symbols monitoring information during online changes Note that a string type output takes up 260 bytes You can change the default value for the Generate symbols monitoring information option as well as the nstance Symbols Extra Bytes size Their values are specified in the FunctionMonitoringSupportDefault and MonitoringSpaceDefault parameters of the Settings section of the Diamond ini file located in the Bin folder For details on the location of the bin folder see page 29 The symbols information generated for graphically monitoring output values requires a significant amount of memory space Therefore when compiling an error message stating that the memory limit has been reached may be displayed in the output window In such a case to enable compiling you need to either disab
232. e status is set in the STATUS parameter STATUS can have the following values STATUS Description Send successfully completed Send in progress Invalid identifier Not ready to send Dialog has failed Send has failed NI DA W NO KF D If the send failed a new send is not automatically done a rising edge must be detected on REQ parameter See example in the description of the CONNECT block 614 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Glossary The Glossary contains terms used in the Workbench and their definitions Access Control Access Method Action Activity of a Step Address Alias Array Attribute Automatic Instance of a function block The use of password protection to control access to projects resources POUs and targets For projects resources and POUs access control can also limit access to read only mode Methods to access the Virtual Machine database from a client application programmed in C SMA MIB SID In SFC an action can be on a Boolean variable or a child SFC or a collection of operations written in ST IL LD to perform with an associated SFC step The action is executed when the Step SFC is active In FC an action is a collection of operations written in ST IL LD to perform Attribute of a Step SFC which is activated by an SFC token Optional hexadecimal address freely defined for each variable This address can be used by an external application to acce
233. e where you specify a path for a local or remote computer e client server mode where you specify login information and server location Before setting this mode the repository project must exist The default uses the file mode and saves this information in a VSC folder in the project folder A repository folder defined by the path can hold multiple version source control projects You can choose to clear the version source control status for a project Clearing the version source control status for a project means disabling the version source control for the project The version source control repository must be removed manually Workbench elements are always editable Therefore you do not need to check these out of the control database to modify them At any time you can check in 1 e save changes made to elements in the control database When you check in an element all of its descendants are also checked in For instance when you check in a project all of its configurations resources and POUs are checked in You can only check in or get elements available for edition you cannot check in or get elements having the read only attribute However you can view the history of read only elements When you retrieve 1 e get a Workbench element from the control database this element is automatically updated to the current version Therefore a local element containing more current definitions could be overwritten Before using a retrieved
234. ector always targets a defined Flow Chart symbol The destination symbol is identified by its logical number FC Comments A Comment Block contains text that has no sense for the semantic of the chart It can be inserted anywhere on an unused space of the Flow Chart document window and is used to document the program Below is the drawing of a Comment symbol Oooo i 424 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual FC Complex Structure Examples This section shows Complex Structure examples that can be defined in a Flow Chart diagram Such Structures are combinations of basic objects linked together IF THEN ELSE 1 place for THEN actions to be inserted hm 2 place for ELSE actions to be inserted YES o REPEAT UNTIL 3 place for repeated actions to be inserted WHILE DO 4 place for repeated actions to be inserted DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 425 FC Dynamic Behavior The execution of a Flow Chart diagram can be explained as follows e The Begin symbol takes one Target Cycle e The End symbol takes one Target Cycle and ends the execution of the chart After this symbol is reached no more actions of the chart are executed e The flow is broken each time an item action decision is encountered that has already been reached in the same Cycle In such a case the flow will continue on the next Cycle Note Contrary to SFC an action is not a stable state FC Checking Apart fro
235. ed 81 internal described 71 linking resources for internal bindings 74 modifying for online changes 331 657 variable groups creating 91 managing 91 opening 91 producing for external bindings 83 variables accessing spy list for 316 adding to spy list for 316 attributes and directions for 389 Boolean 390 computer allocated hidden effect on online changes 330 declared modifying in online changes 329 directly represented 387 displaying comments for 279 displaying tooltips for 266 double integer 390 for binding errors 68 forcing the values of 304 forcing values of spy list 319 grid described 142 importing and exporting 93 initial values for 150 inserting FBD elements 266 inserting in POUs 201 locking and unlocking 304 modification of during online changes 329 opening a spy list with 319 real 390 rearranging in spy list 318 removing from spy list 318 rules for 385 saving spy list with 318 selecting in spy list 317 version source control accessing history details for previous versions 366 checking in Workbench elements for 363 clearing the status of 359 creating history reports 366 described 359 getting previous versions of Workbench elements 365 repository path for 359 toolbar in main environment 20 viewing history of Workbench elements 364 for variable bindings 67 of the Dictionary 125 of the hardware architecture 109 of the I O wiring 155 of the link architecture 4
236. ed squares displayed when the link is selected For information about oriented links see page 398 To insert a link Inserting a link with a single click on the link origin or dropping the link in an empty area of the workspace displays the Jump to a Step dialog The Jump to a Step dialog is only displayed when the link origin is a transition ump toa step E r 5 Cancel 53 55 30 e Choose the required step name then click OK DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 221 Jump You can insert jumps between transitions and steps For information about jumps to steps see page 398 To insert a jump 1 On the SFC toolbar click ji The cursor changes to a Jump cursor 2 Click on the workspace immediately below the transition to jump from 3 Inthe Jump to a Step dialog select the required step name then click OK x ooo 5 Cancel 53 55 58 The step name is indicated next to the jump symbol 222 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Managing Elements SFC elements can be cut copied and pasted within a Sequential Function Chart or if more than one is open between different charts When an element is moved removed or added the chart is automatically refreshed elements are placed according to the grid and links are redrawn Select To select an item simply click on it with the left mouse button Multiple selections are made by clicking a blank area of the workspace then drag
237. ed to blocks by connection lines An output of a block may also be connected to an input of another block Function Inputs Outputs An entire function operated by an FBD program is built with standard elementary blocks from the standard library or from the function or function block section Each block has a fixed number of input connection points and a fixed number of output connection points A block is represented by a single rectangle The inputs are connected on its left border The outputs are connected on its right border An elementary block performs a single function between its inputs and its outputs The name of the function to be performed by the block is written in its rectangle symbol Each input or output of a block has a well defined type Function Name Inputs Outputs DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 429 Input variables of an FBD program must be connected to input connection points of blocks The type of each variable must be the same as the type expected for the associated input An input for FBD diagram can be a Constant Expression any internal or input variable or an output variable For information on constant expressions see page 381 Output variables of an FBD program must be connected to output connection points of blocks The type of each variable must be the same as the type expected for the associated block output An output for FBD diagram can be any internal or output variable or the name of
238. ed with the C code of the application DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 289 Status Information When running a project in Debug mode status information for resources from the target is updated at a regular interval indicated by the debug refresh rate The status information is displayed in resource title bars as e resource icons e text information You can also choose to refresh the status information for resources at any time The debug refresh rate applies to all resource data including variables and status information while in debug mode its default value is 300 milliseconds You set the refresh rate in the DefaultRefreshTime property in the REFRESH section of the Dta ini file located in the Workbench s Bin folder You can also set refresh rates for individual resources by adding the following entry for a resource in the same section RefreshTime X Y YY where X indicates the resource number and YYY indicates the refresh time in milliseconds Note For a project in normal editing mode refreshing the status of resources will not refresh the status of resources previously opened by other users for single resource editing To refresh the displayed status for these resources you need to reopen the Workbench project Resource Icons The resource icons appear in the left most corner of the title bar Icon Description The resource belongs to the current project and is running on the configuration The resource belongs
239. eesssscccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 326 Online CHANG eSa thane copsaceeidedactanssden eee 327 Code SEQUENCES araia a ieee eaacdeeesdaasdeeoeaaeueanrenmnseaaa es 327 WV dIMADICS sce nites cout E Sreeoun E A ONT 329 Declared Variables ccend in hiuestbainenamemsiiceaees 329 Function Block Instances ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeseesesesesssaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 330 Compiler Allocated Hidden Variables ccccccccscccccccccesceceeeeeees 330 TD ADS VCC Sess se se tis a EAR R one iaans teerdenen Gaaheanariodonees 331 Memory Reguire meS inisin nessa dad AE 331 Miscellaneous Limitations cccccssssscccceeeeeeecececeeeeeseessssssssssseaeeaes 331 Opera ONS eaa canes a ead bees a oad ee 332 Debug Function Block Instances cccccccceeeessessseccceeeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 334 Clean sored C Ode ix 28a sass saton dent damn belated A E A N 336 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Table of Contents WOCUME NE GC CHCEALOL ecg ish oa Se hte aah 337 Table or Tei Soesan E E T O OOA 338 Printe OpioNnS izsenis A L 340 PONIO Werts Sr A O 342 Code eneral OPa a a A N NANA 345 MUNG ate ccd E A EEEN E E E E AE AT 345 Bukra POU inan a toast sii aratedind Mend saded eesteaee Need Ga alk 346 Building Resources Projects cccccccccceccsccssssessnssseccecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 347 PLOP PING Bus 435 45c3 sic6 kde as aseai cag E Na 348 C leanna Projectos N Ee 348 Compiler OPU OMS aiena A A A 349 C Sonce Code oroe a E E E E 351 Project Tree Vie
240. elapsed When the cycle time is longer the Virtual Machine immediately scans the inputs but signals with the overflow that the programmed time has been exceeded When the cycle time is 0 the Virtual Machine does not wait to start a new cycle Execution mode In this mode cycles are executed one by one according to the orders given by the user of the debugger The collection of definitions making up a Workbench project The version source control feature stores checked in information in a separate database A directional link between resources across which variable bindings data is conveyed For use when debugging using the step by step mode with ST IL and LD POUs programs functions and function blocks Debug information includes call stack information which tracks stepping between POUs and called functions You can only generate debug information for resources producing TIC code A function block having assigned instances 1 e declared in the dictionary Declared instances of function blocks can be added to a POU during online changes See also Automatic Instance of a function block Word that is an expression This word can be used in POUs At compiling time the word is replaced by the expression A defined word can not use a defined word DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Glossary 619 Delayed Operation IL Dependency on a library Device Dictionary Dimension Direction Directly Represented Variable
241. elete Action Block DBR 0 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Flow Chart Tools Select Insert Action Insert I O Specific Action Insert Test Insert Flow Insert Connector IF THEN ELSE DO WHILE Fg ie WHILE DO Insert Sub Program Renumber Flow Chart Insert Comment DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 191 ST Tools This toolbar is displayed when editing an ST POU an Action or a test of an FC or SFC POU written in ST Clicking on one button of this toolbar inserts the corresponding word at the caret position in the text of the current POU Assignment Boolean True A oHe Boolean False AEALSE Boolean AND operator Boolean OR operator ag Boolean XOR operator F RETURN statement RETURN TULL IF Statement mn Lat T Ey THEN Statement THEM rg ELSIF Statement ELSE Fg ELSE Statement ELSEIF iri 192 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Cc F40 END _IF Statement EMD_IF Hd EJ CASE Structure CASE F12 END END_CASE Structure IL Tools This toolbar is displayed when editing an IL POU or an action or a test of an FC or SFC POU written in IL Clicking on a button of this toolbar inserts the corresponding word at the caret position in the text of the current POU Fz L FS cT AND OR KOR ADD SLB MUL Dy F4 LT F5 LE DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 193 a5 E Pe o F11 Pizpey ce ale LD T
242. elp locating the Title Bar see the Appearance diagram The Title Bar displays the application name and the filename of the active project if any are open along with the current view Hardware Architecture Link Architecture Dictionary or I O Wiring Control Icon At the left end of the Title Bar is the Control Icon which is used to access the Control Menu see following section Double clicking on the Control Icon closes the Workbench Control Menu Clicking on the Control icon opens the Control Menu The Control Menu is used to position the Main Window or to exit Window Buttons The standard window buttons appear at the right end of the Title Bar Use these to resize or close the Window 4 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Menu Bar The options available from the menu bar differ slightly for the hardware architecture and link architecture views of a project Some options are available as keyboard commands File New Project Library Ctrl N Open Project Library Ctrl O Save Project Library Ctrl S Rename Project Library Project Properties Import Export Print Ctrl P Exit Ctrl Q DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench creates a new project or library opens an existing project or library saves the current project or library renames the current project or library sets project access control imports three types of information PLC definitions using text files generated with the Target Definition Builde
243. els of programming SFC editor 214 libraries creating 281 described 281 licensing third party 282 using in projects 282 license request REQUEST LICENSE function block 592 licensing third party libraries 282 LIMIT function 539 line editing mode Dictionary 131 link architecture view 48 linking configurations and networks 123 resources for external bindings 86 resources for internal bindings 74 646 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual links inserting FBD elements 267 inserting LD elements 264 inserting SFC elements 221 list of external bindings 81 of instructions for actions within steps 408 of internal bindings 71 locating current step step by step mode 302 locked variables locking 304 unlocking 307 LOG function 540 logging system events opening log file 175 starting 175 viewing 176 magnification factor adjusting in workspace 23 main format of SFC programs 395 managing configurations 110 external bindings 81 I O wiring 160 internal bindings 71 POUs Program Organization Unit 96 projects 32 resources 48 the hardware architecture view of a project 109 the link architecture view of a project 48 the workspace for language editors 197 manipulating POUs in resources 100 manual input of names variables or blocks 265 mapping channels I O wiring 172 margins including as printing option 340 MAX function 541 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index memory defining size for on line changes 59 requi
244. em then while holding down the lt SHIFT gt key click the last one All the elements between the first and last are selected 3 To select many individual items click each one while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key 132 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Editing the Contents of the Grid You can edit the contents of individual cells or complete rows depending on the selected editing mode To edit the contents of a cell gt While in Grid mode double click an element within the row To edit the contents of a row 1 While in Line mode double click a row The variable dialog is displayed Name fo Alias Type Ent O esl fo Init value 0 Dimension Group Fermente Attribute Fee Scope Glob O Direction lIntemal Retain No Winn a Address 0 Comment P Or Cancel 2 Make the necessary changes to the variable fields For the Type field you can also access the Select Data Types browser by clicking DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 133 Adding or Inserting Rows You can edit the contents of existing rows add rows at the end of the grid or insert rows at a specific location in the grid You can perform these tasks from the main menu or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking in the grid To add a row gt From the Edit menu choose Add Row The grid dialog box appears r a Name fo Alias 0 Type eon O c Init value 0 Dimension Group Fermente Attribute Fee x
245. en N 391 Sine Vanables STRING Feness ETE 391 COMMEN soi ea a e N A Gace 392 Denied Words eacsensen ar e N r easeeaetaess 392 SFE Lano yago o ccenudsenssuandaameacenalsnussaasacnned 395 SEC Mam BOT at ic 2 acct Sapue Gadeacsadebieaacus A oeneaegtaendeareane eae 395 SFC Basic Components croind A e a 396 Seps ANC Inal Se DS canre a a 396 TADS TEI OINS sexed a pad oui on hacia canoer Pec acees 397 Oric ned EINE peepee eee Rea ne ane ee ee ae ee 398 SUED 107A Slepa ana sennencacena eeu ennena eae eneedenendees 398 Divergences and Convergences vicidccneceenscvsesetensdeesesnded Gnvariaieeasertanenuniweenaest 400 sinesle Divercences OR aaea a ch ice eg tal le 400 Double Diversences AND 2 2 0 cccte scence ute oats ea 402 Actions W IGS SIEDS crre bh eel ech oer adenine S RE A 404 Boolean ACHOS i 8ceexcetiucasedelcatiuenspasesbaetinueenahadassieaicesesteetiatneee 404 Pulse ACION 25625 cere Seeks 8 cats ha ltae iS aoarlnrat eG Fea eet tatu Ta 405 1S Fe a etc 8 a d 61 6 6 8 ee ne ee eo Pe eee eee ee 406 DEG ACO OINS 5a si a ets or E E 407 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Table of Contents XI PASTOL MSTHUCHIONS sch E E E A T S S scene E 408 Calling Functions and Function BlocKS ennnnsesesssssononoeeeeeeeesseesse 409 Conditions Attached to Transitions 0 ccccccccccccscssessssssnccccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 410 Condition Programmed in ST cccccceesssssscceeeeeeececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 410 Condition Prog
246. en window browse to select the resource holding the device then click Open e gt lt e gt lt Configurations Resources MASTER The devices defined for the selected resource are displayed in the I O Wiring View 170 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Deleting Devices and Conversions You can delete devices and conversions from the I O wiring view You cannot delete Parameter Gain or Offset elements You remove a current conversion by replacing it with None You can also disconnect variables attached to selected channels When deleting devices all variables are unwired from the device as with Free I O device channels To delete a device or conversion You can delete devices or conversions using the main menu or the I O Wiring toolbar gt From the Edit menu choose Delete Device or click the I O Wiring toolbar Setting the Real or Virtual Attribute This command sets the Real Virtual attribute for the currently selected device To toggle the Real Virtual attribute 1 Select the device in the Tree View 2 From the Edit menu choose Real Virtual I O Device or click amp on the I O Wiring toolbar The Tree View icon for a virtual device is In Real Mode I O variables are directly linked to the corresponding I O devices Input or Output operations in the programs correspond directly to the input or output conditions of the actual I O device fields In virtual mode I O variables are processed
247. ench 19 Version Source Control Toolbar Checks in a project configuration resource or POU definition not having the read only attribute into a version source control database Views the history of a project configuration resource or POU that has been checked in repeatedly to a version source control database a Options Toolbar Shows or hides the data links between resources Sets the magnification factor for the workspace 100 I O Wiring Toolbar Opens a device Saves the I O Wiring Accesses the document generator Adds a device Deletes a device i i gt o 20 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Undoes the last operation Redoes the last operation Frees all I O device channels Frees an I O device channel Real Virtual I O device Maps logical and physical channels Accesses help on selected I O device in Tree view 8 e e 2 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 21 Workspace The Workspace can be split into a maximum of four simultaneous views File Edit Insert Project Tools Debug Options Window Help Bg Project3 demo project Link architecture 1 Main main process nel E B Parameters FR Variable Groups z startyariables to run 58 Programs H oo Grain main a Hg 2 Lead simple sue l H j i Parameters A Defined Words B 28 Variable Groups outputs a By Programs Admin Administrator Note Sub windows are zoomed independen
248. ential number before the function block s name At debug time you can select instances within a program to open and visualize their diagram The following examples show the LIB_FB1 function block used as an automatic instance and a declared instance in the P2 program The upper diagrams show the instances in the program whereas the lower diagrams show the individual instances open Automatic Instance Declared Instance LIB_FB INSTANCE _LIB_FB1 334 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual INST FLIB_FB1 PS INSTANCE _LIB_FB1 mar The automatic instance is assigned the INST7LIB_FB1 P2 name and the declared instance retains its defined name INSTANCE LIB FB1 P2 For automatic and declared instances a suffix consisting of the symbol and scope is added to the instance name To debug declared instances of function blocks You can debug variables declared instances of function blocks either from the dictionary in the LD and FBD diagrams and in the resource window However when declared instances are from a library you can only debug these from the dictionary or from the LD and FBD diagrams Note You cannot debug function block instances declared as parameters of function blocks gt To debug a declared instance do one of the following From the dictionary view select the block then from the Debug menu choose Debug FB In the function blocks section of a resource window locate the block then double click it
249. ep L 1 On the SFC toolbar click E 2 Click in the Workspace at the desired position Note To link a step to an existing transition place the mouse cursor on the grid cell above or below the transition Le F T 8 m Transition Transitions are given sequentially numbered default names e g T2 T4 T6 For information about transitions see page 397 ctrl flag TRUE 7 216 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To place a Transition a 1 On the SFC toolbar click 2 Click in the workspace at the desired position If you want to link the transition to an existing step click the mouse with the cursor on the grid cell above or below the step Divergence Convergence To place a divergence click on the button on the SFC Toolbar then click in the chart workspace at the desired position Pa g e To link an OR divergence ile to an existing step place the mouse cursor on the grid cell below the step Kits R Tr Ero e To link an AND divergence to an existing transition click grid cell below the transition i T_T DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 217 e To place a convergence and attach it to previous elements click the left most branch OR re dot convergences are attached to the preceding transitions AND convergences Fe LL ian are attached to preceding steps J TA T11 m is R 218 DS800 Development Suit
250. er you can perform online changes for OEM parameters For I O channels also when supported by the driver you can perform online changes for the Gain Offset Direct and Conversion parameters as well as the mapping of logical and physical channels You cannot add connect or remove an I O variable or modify the description of an I O device online Operations such as modifying device parameters may be available using specific functions provided by the integrator Memory Requirements In order to support the Online Change capability the target PLC must have free memory space to enable the storage of e The modified version of the code sequences Original code and modified code have to be stored in PLC memory e The addition of new data variables Online changes will be denied if there is not enough memory space You specify the available memory for online changes in the Advanced settings for resource properties For details about advanced settings for resources see page 59 Miscellaneous Limitations As described before you can change code sequences and add or remove variables with some limitations However you cannot change the descriptions of I O devices Other limitations exist for various items of a project e Types you cannot add remove or change types definitions When required you could define extra types Such extra types could then be used for future changes DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 331 e Bindings f
251. er of milliseconds STRING number of milliseconds for example a value of 300032 represents 5 minutes and 32 milliseconds time value represented by IN A value of 1193h2m47s295ms indicates an invalid time Converts any variable other than a time or date type to a timer variable The SUB DATE _ DATE function enables the conversion of a date type to a time format For details on the SUB_DATE DATE function see page 567 502 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD example with Convert to Timer Operators AMY TO_TIME ANY _TO_TIME 1256 3 ro a res ST Equivalence ares lt ANY TO TIME 1256 ares t 1ls256ms LEGS ANY TO TIME 125623 7 rres t ls256ms IL equivalence LD 1256 ANY TO TIME ST ares LD 1256 3 ANY TO TIME ST rres DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 503 ANY_TO_STRING ANY TO STRIN Arguments IN BOOL SINT DINT REAL any non string value TIME Q STRING If IN is a Boolean FALSE or TRUE If IN is an integer or a real decimal representation If IN is a TIME TIME time STRING s1 timel 13 ms sl ANY TO STRING timel1 s1 0s13 Description Converts any variable to a string variable Example FBD example with Convert to string Operators ANY TO STRING ANY TO STRING Po aq ares ST Equivalence bres ANY TO STRING TRUE bres is TRUE ares z ANY TO STRI
252. er refers to which of the 6 MVS sensor points is being used The I O module wiring in DS800 software is NOT self identifying as it is in ROCLINK 800 software Before wiring each variable must be defined in the Dictionary View Variables Grid Select the appropriate variable from the unwired variables list The Name tag should identify the I O module The direction can be set three ways If defined as I Input then the variable will have to be wired to an Input module if defined as O Output then the variable will have to be wired to an Output module or if defined as Internal then it cannot be wired to a ROC I O module The Attribute should be R read for Inputs W write for Outputs or Free for Inputs or Outputs that will be used as Inputs in other locations in the algorithm DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 165 E File Edit Options Window Help ro Se pl mp EM 4 FH pb E55 Be A 0 EPMFCO ROCES MY SModule Multi YVarable Sensor CAO DP Ch1 5P Ch2 TMP e a Parameters _ H Board Number 1 Board module i on E Slot_Number 1 Location of module on board He E Foint_Number 1 Identifies MWS on module He XIAO H zRo HS XIRO2 i 1 EPMFCD ROCSOS DO Module_SPt 5 Pt Discrete Output FA jo 2 EPMFCD ROCSOS AlModule_4Pt 4 Pt Analog Input FH oo 3 EPMFCD ROCSOS DlModule_8Pt 8 Pt Discrete Input FA joo 4 EPMFCD ROCSOS A0Module_4Pt 4 Pt Analog Output FH jo 5 EPMFCD ROCSOS PlMod
253. erands index internal integer variable increased at each loop mini initial value for index before first loop maxi maximum allowed value for index step index increment at each loop The BY step statement is optional If not specified the increment step is 1 Warning Because the virtual machine is a synchronous system input variables are not refreshed during FOR iterations This is the WHILE equivalent of a FOR statement index mini while index lt maxi do lt statement gt lt Statement gt index index step end while Example ST program using FOR statement this program extracts the digit characters of a string length mlen message target empty string FOR index 1 TO length BY 1 DO code ascii message index IF code gt 48 amp code lt 57 THEN target target char code END IF END_ FOR DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 465 EXIT Statement Name EXIT Meaning exit from a FOR WHILE or REPEAT iteration statement Syntax EXIT The EXIT is commonly used within an IF statement inside a FOR WHILE or REPEAT block Example ST program using EXIT statement this program searches for a character ina string length mlen message found NO FOR index 1 TO length BY 1 DO code ascii message index IF code searched char THEN found YES EXIT END IF END FOR 466 DS800 Developmen
254. ers Tree of the Dictionary view This option is only available in the link architecture view accesses the External Binding list window where you can define external variable bindings between producer variables of a source resource in a given project with consumer variables of a destination resource in a different project accesses the Binding List window for the selected binding This option is only available in the link architecture view accesses the Defined Words Tree of the Dictionary view compiles the current project or library recompiles the complete current project removes files created during the last build of the current project or library compiles the selected resource removes files created during the last build of the selected resource compiles the selected program This option is only available in the link architecture view stops a build in progress DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Tools Compact Database Edit Project Description Ctrl K Edit Description Unlock Resource Add Remove Dependencies Browser Ctrl B Check in View History Events Viewer DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench optimizes the current project s database accesses the description editor for the current project or library accesses the description editor for the selected item unlocks a resource currently locked by another user This option is only available when editing a project in norm
255. es Starts a stopped resource Stops all running resources Stops a running resource Switches the application to Real time mode Switches the application to cycle to cycle mode Executes one cycle Steps to the next line of code or rung Steps into the next line of code or rung i B g 7 6 6 o o DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 187 5 E O 8 x 188 Locates the current step Sets the cycle timing Sets or removes a breakpoint For LD programs only Removes breakpoints For LD programs only Shows Hides output values For FBD programs only Debugs a function block Displays the spy variable list Stops the debug simulation mode Refreshes the status of resources Clears the output window DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SFC Breakpoints Toolbar H Sets a breakpoint on step activation Sets a breakpoint on step deactivation Sets a breakpoint on transition Removes a breakpoint Removes all breakpoints Clears a transition SFC Tools Select Insert Initial Step Add a Step F4 IR Add a Transition Fa _ Add an OR Divergence DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 189 CO Add an OR Convergence a Add an AND Divergence T 7 Pe Add an AND Convergence e equa New Branch Add a Link FAO fa Fase Jump dl Renumber Fi A Add Action Block MESE TE Move Action Block Up wich a Move Action Block Down OA amp n D
256. es of the variables of the Instance are stored from one cycle to the other ST Programming Function Block Implementation FB1 is a declared Instance of the SAMPLE Function Block likugh value low 1 0 RIE The interface of a function block must be explicitly defined with a type and a unique name for each of its calling or Input Parameter or return parameters or output parameters A function block can have more than one output parameter The following information shows how to set the value of an output parameter in the body of a function block in the various languages ST assign the output parameter using its name concatenated with the function block name FunctionBlockName OutputParaName lt expression gt IL use LD and ST operator LD FunctionBlockName OutputParaName ST 20 value of Parameter 20 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 373 FBD set the return parameter using its name OutputParaName LD use a coil symbol with the name of the return parameter OutputParaName Warning When you need a loop in your function block you must use local variable before doing the loop This will not work This is OK IntResult SFC function block instances as their SFC child blocks have a maximum number of tokens unlike SFC programs whose dynamic behavior limits are set at the resource level You specify the tokens limit for an SFC function block in its setting properties acc
257. esource having its own password without the read only option remains locked and cannot be viewed without its password While in read only mode you cannot build a project When importing and exporting projects having access control password definitions are retained The DS800 Workbench enables monitoring a project 1 e debugging as well as viewing TLP variables and parameters when a project is opened with access control or in read only mode You can open projects in read only mode when opening the Workbench or open projects in read only mode using a command line While in monitoring mode a banner indicating this mode is displayed above the status bar To set access control for a project When a password is set for a project you can choose to enable users not having the password to open the project in read only mode The read only mode for a project is applied to all resources and POUs making up the project However individual resources and POUs may have their own access control 1 From the File menu choose Project Properties The Project Properties Security editor is displayed Project Properties aa xj Security Version Control Password Old Mew Confirm Mew T Read Only Cancel Apply DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 41 42 In the New field enter the password for the project In the Confirm New field reenter the password To enable users not having the password to open the project in
258. esource in a configuration You can insert resources using the main menu or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking the empty space in the configuration s window 1 Select a configuration 2 From the Insert menu choose Resource 112 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Moving Resources Between Configurations When moving resources from one configuration to another you need to make sure several aspects of the destination configuration are compatible with those of the source configuration e Network Information when both configurations are connected to the same networks resource information remains intact Otherwise you will need to change the binding network information for the moved resource e C function or C function block calls when the list of available C functions or function blocks is different for both configurations when proceeding to build the resource some errors may occur when the functions called do not point to the functions declared in the target e I O Wiring when the I O device list is different for both configurations the I O wiring of the moved resource 1s deleted To move a resource from one configuration to another 1 Click and hold the mouse button on the required resource 2 Drag and drop the resource to the new configuration M Config ko 2 Test get info from A7 E Main send info to R2 e 2 Test get info from Al DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench
259. esource in the configuration window 1 Select a configuration to paste the resource into 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste Resource Note Links coming from or arriving to a resource are not copied and pasted 52 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Deleting Resources You can delete a resource from the workspace of the link architecture view or from a configuration in the hardware architecture view The delete command is available from the main menu the Delete keyboard command the main toolbar or a contextual menu Note Before deleting click in a blank area inside the resource window to deselect individual programs or Groups To delete a resource You can access the contextual menu by right clicking the resource title bar 1 Select the resource 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 53 Editing Resource Properties You need to define several properties at the resource level intimately linked to targets and their implementation These properties determine the behavior of the programs and hardware such as the type of code generated the timing and Hardware specific properties To access the Resource Properties window 1 From the Window menu choose project _name Link Architecture 2 Select a resource 3 From the Edit menu choose Properties The Resource Properties window is displayed 54 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Resource Identification The reso
260. essed by selecting the block then from the Edit menu choosing Properties then the Settings tab 374 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Description Language A program can be described with any of the following graphic or literal languages Sequential Function Chart SFC for high level operations al Flow Chart FC for high level operations fa Function Block Diagram FBD for cyclic complex operations Ladder Diagram LD for Boolean operations only Structured Text ST for any cyclic operations Instruction List IL for low level operations A program cannot contain multiple languages However you can combine FBD and LD ina single program The language used to describe a program is chosen when creating the program and cannot be changed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 375 Execution Rules The system is Synchronous All operations are triggered by a clock The basic duration of the clock is called the cycle timing 1 Scan input variables 2 Consume bound variables 3 Execute POUs 4 Produce bound variables 5 Update output devices Programmed Cycle Time In the case where bindings Data Links between resources have been defined variables consumed by this resource are updated after the inputs are scanned and the variables produced to other resources are sent before updating the outputs If a cycle time is programmed the virtual machine waits until this time has elapsed before startin
261. ete Insert Set Identifier Insert Set Black J Toggle Breakpoint T Breakpoints HE Soy Selection z Debug FE Output Window To view the output window e From the Window Menu choose Show Output Window The output window appears docked to the status bar DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 199 Note The output window is moved like a toolbar It is automatically displayed when Building and Debugging a Program Compilation errors are displayed in the output window To clear the output window e From the Window Menu choose Clear Output Window Status Bar The Status Bar appears at the bottom of the Main Window Information about commands operations and POUSs is given on the Status Bar 200 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Inserting Identifiers You can insert identifiers 1 e variables previously declared in the Dictionary You can also create new variables and enter constant values into a POU as well as access the parameters of functions or function blocks When creating a new variable you need to assign a unique name not corresponding to an existing variable as well as specify its type and scope global or local to the POU These variables are added to the project database with default values for their other attributes Internal Free For new variables of the STRING type a string of 80 characters is automatically defined You insert identifiers using the Select Variable dialog You
262. evel 2 option is available from the main menu and the contextual menu accessed by right clicking a step or transition 1 Select the step or transition 2 From the Edit menu choose Edit Level 2 3 To display a second level 2 window for another step or transition do one of the following Right click an element without selecting it then choose Edit Level 2 in separate window from the contextual menu Drag to select an element then press Ctrl Enter 228 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Coding Action Blocks for Steps You attach action blocks to steps by adding them in the level 2 window then defining their name comment optional type and qualifier Comments are displayed after the action block name in the level 2 window for a step for example InitAction initialize all When changing the type of an action block the code zone must be empty For details on actions within steps see page 404 You can specify the ST IL or LD language for use as default for the level 2 programming of steps The available action block types are the following e Boo e IL e LD e SFC child e ST Boo action blocks require the selection of a Boolean variable from the variable selector These action blocks take the name of the selected variable SFC child action blocks require assigning the name of the SFC child to the action block You cannot program Boo or SFC child action blocks The available qualifiers for all actio
263. for Ladder diagrams 436 preferences setting for opening and exiting 26 previewing project printing 342 previous versions accessing history details for 366 printing defining options for 340 previewing project document 342 project items 337 projects 40 selecting project items for 338 649 specifying document range for 342 the Dictionary grid 141 process control DERIVATE function block 587 HYSTER function block 589 INTEGRAL function block 590 STACKINT function block 600 producer groups external bindings defining 83 deleting 85 editing 85 producing variables viewing for internal bindings 77 production error variables 68 programming languages for use with function blocks 99 for use with functions 98 for use with programs 96 used with the multi language editor 260 programming levels SFC editor 214 programs changing hierarchy level for SFC child 103 creating in resources 99 defining access control for 104 described 368 hierarchy in the SFC language 415 inserting comments in literal language 392 manipulating in resources 100 working with 96 project architecture child SFC POUs 370 cyclic and sequential operations 369 description languages for programs 375 execution rules for cycles 376 FC sub programs 371 function blocks 373 functions 371 overview of 368 programs 368 project tree view 353 650 projects accessing details for previous versions of 366 adding descriptions to 40 browsing POUs of 357 building rebuilding co
264. function Example Input output z a ST Equivalence G tpu ti lt inputi output2 inputl1 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 443 Inverted Coil Inverted Coils enable a Boolean output according to the Boolean negation of a connection line State Left Connection Right Connection The associated variable is assigned with the Boolean negation of the state of the left connection The state of the left connection is propagated into the right connection Right connection may be connected to the right vertical power rail For information on variables see page 389 The associated Boolean variable must be OUTPUT or MEMORY The associated name can be the name of the program for Function only This corresponds to the assignment of the return value of the function Example inputi output ea ae ST Equivalence CuepuEl x NOT input output2 inputl1 444 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SET Coil Set Coils enable a Boolean output of a connection line Boolean state Left Connection Right Connection The associated variable is SET TO TRUE when the boolean state of the left connection becomes TRUE The output variable keeps this value until an inverse order is made by a RESET coil For information on variables see page 389 The state of the left connection is propagated into the right connection Right connection may be connected to the right vertical power r
265. g of a Transition simultaneously leads to the active state of the immediately following Steps and to the inactive state of the immediately preceding Steps Simultaneous clearing of Transitions All Transitions of all SFC Programs that can be cleared enabled and condition to true are cleared simultaneously 414 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SFC Program Hierarchy The system enables the description of the vertical structure of SFC Programs SFC Programs are organized in a hierarchy tree Each SFC Program can control start kill other SFC Programs Such Programs are called children of the SFC Program which controls them SFC Programs are linked together into a main hierarchy tree using a father child relationship Father Program Child Program The basic rules implied by the hierarchy structure are e SFC Programs which have no father are called main SFC Programs e Main SFC Programs are activated by the system when the application starts e A Program can have several child Programs e A child of a Program cannot have more than one father e A child Program can only be controlled by its father e A Program cannot control the children of one of its own children The basic actions that a father SFC Program can take to control its child Program are Start GSTART Starts the child Program activates each of its Initial Steps Children of this child Program are not automatically started Kill GKILL Kills the ch
266. g state THEN result valuel value2 END LF eno rung_state continue rung with eno state DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ST Language ST Structured Text is a high level structured language designed for automation processes This language is mainly used to implement complex procedures that cannot be easily expressed with graphic languages ST language can be used for the description of the actions within the Steps and conditions attached to the Transitions of the SFC or the Actions and Tests of the FC Language ST Main Syntax An ST program is a list of ST statements Each statement ends with a semi colon 3 separator Names used in the source code variable identifiers constants language keywords are separated with inactive separators space character end of line or tab stops or by active separators which have a well defined significance for example the gt separator indicates a greater than comparison Comments may be freely inserted into the text A comment must begin with and ends with These are basic types of ST statements e assignment statement variable expression e function call e function block call e selection statements IF THEN ELSE CASE e iteration statements FOR WHILE REPEAT e control statements RETURN EXIT e special statements for links with other languages such as SFC When entering ST syntax basic coding is black while other ite
267. g the execution of a new cycle The POUs execution time varies depending upon the number of active steps in SFC Programs and on instructions such as Jump IF and Return 376 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Common Objects These are main features and common objects of the programming data base Such objects can be used in any POU Program Organization Unit programs functions or function blocks written with any of the SFC FC FBD IL ST or LD languages Data Types Any constant expression or variable used in a POU written in any language must be characterized by a type Type coherence must be followed in graphic operations and literal statements Types are known by any resource of a Project types have a common Scope These types are e Standard IEC 61131 Types e User Types based on standard IEC 61131 types Standard IEC 61131 Types You can program objects using 17 standard IEC 61131 types e BOOL logic true or false value e SINT short integer continuous value 8 bit e DINT double integer continuous value 32 bit e REAL real floating continuous value 32 bit e TIME time values less than one day these value types cannot store dates 32 bit e STRING character string having a defined size representing the maximum number of characters the string can contain For example to define MySt ring as a string containing 10 characters enter MyString 10 For information on using string variables see pag
268. ge ETCP exe DS800 Development Suite network driver that uses the TCP IP stack A logger that receives events from DS800 Development Suite targets You view these events using the Events Viewer Events are stored in a log file in Unicode format A new log file is automatically created each day at 00 00 00 hours DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Events Viewer Execution Mode External Binding List Expression Falling Edge Father Program FBD FC Function Function Block Global Scope Global Variable Hardware Architecture A viewer that displays run time system events logged with the Events Logger The mode in which a resource is executed real time cycle to cycle and step by step The list of consumer groups holding external producer variables having bindings with consumer variables defined in the project and producer groups holding outgoing producer variables for consumption in external bindings defined in another project Set of operators and identifiers A falling edge of a Boolean variable corresponds to a change from TRUE 1 to FALSE 0 For SFC and FC program which controls other programs called its children See Child Function Block Diagram Programming language Flow Chart Programming language POU which has input parameters and one output parameter A function can be called by a program a function or a function block A function has no instance It means that local data
269. ge Reference 441 ST Equivalence Outpull inputi AND input2 AND NOT input2prev input2prev is the value of input2 at the previous cycle Contact with Falling Edge Detection A Contact with Falling Edge detection negative enables a Boolean operation between a connection line state and the falling edge of a Boolean variable xk Left Connection Right Connection The state of the connection line on the right of the Contact is set to TRUE when the state of the connection line on the left is TRUE and the state of the associated variable falls from TRUE to FALSE It is reset to FALSE in all other cases Example Input input outo uti H iiey ST Equivalence outputl inputi AND NOT input2 AND input2prev input2prev is the value of input2 at the previous cycle 442 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Direct Coil Direct Coils enable a Boolean output of a connection line Boolean state TOT Left Connection Right Connection The associated variable is assigned with the Boolean state of the left connection The state of the left connection is propagated into the right connection The right connection may be connected to the right vertical Power Rail For information on variables see page 389 The associated Boolean variable must be OUTPUT or MEMORY The associated name can be the name of the proram for Function only This corresponds to the assignment of the return value of the
270. gram using DERIVATE Block sensor value t 1U0rms derivated value ST Equivalence DERIVATE 1 instance of DERIVATE block DERIVATE1 manual mode sensor value t 100ms derivated value DERIVATE1 XOUT DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 587 EVENT EVENT Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments TAG STRING A brief textual description of the event Description The EVENT function places a time stamped user event in the event log of the device F_TRIG Arguments CLK BOOL Any Boolean Variable Q BOOL TRUE when CLK changes from TRUE to FALSE FALSE if all other cases Description Detects a falling edge of a Boolean Variable 588 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD Program using F TRIG Block ST Equivalence We suppose F TRIG is an instance of F TRIG block F_TRIG1 cmd nb edge ANY TO DINT F_TRIG1 Q nb edge HYSTER Arguments XINI REAL Anyreal value XIN2 REAL _ To testif XIN1 has overpassed XIN2 EPS EPS REAL Hysteresis value must be greater than zero Q BOOL TRUE if XINI has overpassed XIN2 EPS and is not yet below XIN2 EPS Description Hysteresis on a real value for a high limit DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 589 Example Example of a timing diagram SINZ EPS HINA 1N2 EPS ALM 1 s INTEGRAL Arguments RUN BOOL Mode
271. gs 78 printing options for project items 340 producer groups external bindings 83 search options for finding cross references 358 TLP variables 146 delayed operations described IL elements 475 DELETE function 532 deleting action blocks from SFC charts 233 configurations from a project 111 638 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual connections between configurations and networks 124 data links internal bindings 76 external bindings 89 I O devices and conversions from I O wiring 171 internal bindings 80 POUs 100 producer groups external bindings 85 resources 53 structures 130 variables Dictionary grid elements 136 demoting SFC child programs 103 dependencies projects on libraries 282 DERIVATE function block 587 descending order sorting for Dictionary grid 138 description languages programs 375 descriptions adding to projects 40 adding to resources 66 editing for configurations 119 diagnostic information accessing 307 diagram format FBD 429 Dictionary accessing the 125 adding and inserting rows 134 appearance of the 126 cutting copying and deleting elements variables in the 136 defined words grid described 145 described 125 duplicating rows in the 139 editing contents of cells and rows in the 133 expanding collapsing grid components in the 135 finding and replacing elements in the 137 moving rows in the 135 parameters grid described 143 parameters tree described 128 pasting elements variables in the
272. h a block type to a block double click on it or press lt Return gt when it is selected The Select Block dialog box is displayed You can also use the Insert Identifier button on the Standard toolbar If you want to enter a variable name or block type when you place the element check Auto input in the Option menu If you want to do it at a later time uncheck this option Contact on the Left ines tk The contact is inserted to the left of the current position highlighted in black Note Pressing F2 on the keyboard has the same effect Contact on the Right Fs irr The contact is inserted to the right of the current position highlighted in black Note Pressing F3 on the keyboard has the same effect DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 261 Parallel Contact F4 y Lel Inserts a contact parallel to the current selection le Note Pressing F4 on the keyboard has the same effect Coil Pag Inserts a coil on the current rung H Note Pressing F5 on the keyboard has the same effect Block on the Left Fai a The block is inserted to the left of the current position highlighted in black Note Pressing F6 on the keyboard has the same effect Block on the Right Fe el The block is inserted to the right of the current position highlighted in black Note Pressing F7 on the keyboard has the same effect Parallel Block Fie i kap Inserts a block parallel to the current selecti
273. han one SFC symbols to one other symbol Divergences and convergences can be single or double Single Divergences OR A single divergence is a multiple link from one step to many transitions It allows the active token to pass into one of a number of branches A single convergence is a multiple link from many transitions to the same step A single convergence is generally used to group the SFC branches which were started on a single divergence Single divergences and convergences are represented by single horizontal lines Single Divergence Single Convergence Warning The conditions attached to the different Transitions at the beginning of a single divergence are not implicitly exclusive The exclusivity has to be explicitly detailed in the conditions of transitions to ensure that only one Token progresses in one Branch of the divergence at run time 400 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example SFC Program with single divergence and convergence Normal OR divergence Ack nowedge 02 M1 stopped DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 401 Double Divergences AND A double divergence is a multiple link from one transition to many steps It corresponds to parallel operations of the process A double convergence is a multiple link from many steps to the same transition A double convergence is generally used to group the SFC branches started on a double divergence Double divergences and
274. hannel of a Boolean output I O device QBs c free Channel of a Short Integer output I O device QDs c free Channel of a Double integer output I O device QRs c free Channel of a Real output I O device QTs c free Channel of a Time output I O device QSs c free Channel of a String output I O device The naming conventions of a directly represented variable for a Channel of a complex device s is the slot number of the device b is the index of the single I O device within the complex device c is the number of the Channel IXs b c free Channel of a Boolean input I O device IBs b c free Channel of a Short Integer input I O device IDs b c free Channel of a Double integer input I O device IRs b c free Channel of an Real input I O device DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 387 olTs b c ISs b c QXs b c QBs b c QDs b c QRs b c QTs b c QSs b c Example free Channel of a Time input I O device free Channel of a String input I O device free Channel of a Boolean output I O device free Channel of a Short Integer output I O device free Channel of a Double integer output I O device free Channel of a Real output I O device free Channel of a Time output I O device free Channel of a String output I O device QX1 6 6th channel of the I O device 1 boolean output o1D2 1 7 7th channel of the I O device 1 in the device 2 integer input 388 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Information
275. he Add Function option The contextual menus are also affected by selections within the resource window Creating Resources When you create resources in the link architecture view these resources are automatically assigned to the first configuration You can also choose to create 1 e insert resources directly in configurations while in the hardware architecture view After having created resources you can move them For details on moving resources see page 113 To create a new resource You can create resources using the main menu or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking the empty area of the link architecture view s workspace gt From the Insert menu choose Resource 50 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Renaming Resources You can rename an existing resource by editing its properties When a resource is selected the Properties option is available from the main menu or a contextual menu From the resource s Properties window you can also edit the comments for the resource To rename a resource 1 Select the resource 2 From the Edit menu choose Properties The Resource Properties dialog box appears on the General Tab 3 Edit the resource name as required 4 Edit the comment as required 5 Click OK Copying Resources You can copy a resource and place it on the clipboard When copying resources password definitions are copied whereas step by step debug information is not copied When copying
276. he I O module The direction can be set three ways If defined as I Input then the variable will have to be wired to an Input module if defined as O Output then the variable will have to be wired to an Output module or if defined as Internal then it cannot be wired to a ROC I O module The Attribute should be R read for Inputs W write for Outputs or Free for Inputs or Outputs that will be used as Inputs in other locations in the algorithm Thermocouple Input 5 Point This Wiring is set in the I O Wiring View The parameters are Board number and Slot number Board number is always set to 1 and the Slot number refers to the slot in the RAS device housing in which the T C module resides The I O module wiring in DS800 software is NOT self identifying as it is in ROCLINK 800 software Before wiring each variable must be defined in the Dictionary View Variables Grid Select the appropriate variable from the unwired variables list The Name should identify the I O module The direction can be set 3 ways If defined as I Input then the variable will have to be wired to an Input module if defined as O Output then the variable will have to be wired to an Output module or if defined as Internal then it can not be wired to a ROC I O module The Attribute should be R read for Inputs W write for Outputs or Free for Inputs or Outputs that will be used as Inputs in other locations in the algorithm 168 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 U
277. he Replace with field enter the element then click Replace To replace all occurrences of the element click Replace All DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 137 Pasting Elements You can paste the contents of the clipboard above the currently selected row s if one or more rows have been copied or cut To paste 1 Click on the required insertion point 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste lt CtrIl V gt or on the Standard toolbar click J OR 1 Right click the required insertion point 2 From the contextual menu choose Paste Sorting the Grid You can sort the contents of individual columns of the grid from the main menu from the toolbar or by clicking the individual column headers To sort the grid 1 Do one of the following From the Tools menu choose Sort Ascending or Sort Descending i A On the toolbar click ay to sort in an ascending manner or to sort in a descending manner 2 Inthe Sorting dialog box choose the criteria column to use for sorting then click OK 138 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Duplicating Rows You can duplicate rows automatically generating sequentially numbered name copies To duplicate a row L 2 Select the row to Duplicate Do one of the following From the Tools menu choose Duplicate lt Ctr1 U gt On the Standard toolbar click The Duplicate dialog box is displayed x Range of number from E to fo
278. he negation of a variable Example FBD example with Negation Operators al IH a ST equivalence a023 ey a110 rol00 ril ri2 IL equivalence LD ailo MUL eL ST ao23 LD ril ADD riz MUL 1 0 ST ro100 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 913 Arguments IN Any Boolean variable or complex expression Q TRUE when IN is FALSE FALSE when IN is TRUE Description Returns the negation of a complete Boolean expression Example FBD example with NOT Operator ST equivalence polo HILOL XOR NOT bi102 IL equivalence LD bil01 XORN bil02 ST bo10 514 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Not Equal Arguments INI BOOL DINT REAL TIME STRING both inputs must have the same type IN2 BOOL DINT REAL TIME STRING Q BOOL TRUE if first lt gt second Description Test if one value is NOT EQUAL TO another one on integer real time date and string variables Example FBD example with Is Not Equal to Operators ST Equivalence aresult 10 lt gt 25 aresult is TRUE mresult ab lt gt ab mresult is FALSE IL equivalence LD 10 NE 25 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 515 ST aresult LD ab NE ab ST mresult Note For this Operator the number of inputs can be extended to more than two Arguments inputs BOOL output BOOL B
279. he right connection Right connection may be connected to the right vertical power rail The associated Boolean variable must be OUTPUT or MEMORY Example input output i mH ST Equivalence IF inputi and NOT inputilprev THEN outputl TRUE ELSE outputl FALSE END IF inputl prev is the value of input at the previous cycle DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 447 Coil with Falling Edge Detection Coils with falling edge detection or Negative coils enable Boolean output of a connection line Boolean state O Left Connection Right Connection The associated variable is set to TRUE when the Boolean state of the left connection falls from TRUE to FALSE The output variable resets to FALSE in all other cases For information on variables see page 389 The state of the left connection is propagated into the right connection Right connection may be connected to the right vertical power rail The associated Boolean variable must be OUTPUT or MEMORY Example inputi output 1 mH ST Equivalence IF NOT input1 and inputlprev THEN outputl TRUE ELSE outputl FALSE END IF inputl prev is the value of input1 at the previous cycle 448 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual RETURN Statement The RETURN label can be used as an output to represent a conditional end of the program No connection can be put on the right of a RETURN symbol If the left connecti
280. hen from the contextual menu choose Remove All Breakpoints Breakpoint on Step Activation When the step goes from the inactive no token to the active token state then breakpoint mode is set for the next cycle The current cycle goes on executing normally In particular around the step where the breakpoint is placed before breakpoint mode is really set e All PO actions linked to all previous steps that become inactive are executed e All P1 S R N actions linked to the step that becomes active are executed The following illustrates cycle execution when a breakpoint on step activation is encountered E Breakpoint on step act vation Cycle samples Run Break Resource mode Actions SO Po 1 P1 5 R H To set a breakpoint on step activation You can set breakpoint commands from the Breakpoints toolbar or from the contextual menu gt Select the step then from the toolbar click 312 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Breakpoint on Step Deactivation When the step goes from the active token to the inactive no token state then breakpoint mode is set for the next cycle Current cycle goes on executing normally In particular around the step where the breakpoint is placed before breakpoint mode is really set e All PO actions linked to the step that becomes inactive are executed e All P1 S R N actions linked to all successor steps that become active are executed The following illus
281. i ee ai ort ard This generates a standard IF THEN ELSE structure in the Flow Chart Examples of Flow Chart complex structures are available on page 425 Begin End Actions can be added on both Branches before the Connection Example Begin p nu foe sian ia lest WIE m 05 7 x Oa TR Ov FALSE En end DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 241 DO WHILE Fe z This generates a standard DO WHILE structure in the Flow Chart Examples of Flow Chart complex structures are available on page 425 Begin End Note The difference between this structure and the WHILE DO is the location of the action s to repeat WHILE DO Fa Ee This generates a standard WHILE DO structure in the Flow Chart The difference between this structure and the DO WHILE 1s the location of the action s to repeat Examples of Flow Chart complex structures are available on page 425 Begin 242 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Flow F3 Prew A Flow indicates a link between two elements For details about FC flow links see page 419 To insert a flow 1 On the Flow Chart Tools toolbar click Fa i 2 Click on the elements to flow from 3 Drag the link to a point on another link or a non connected element E 01 Action Yes mo 02 Action ae End 4 Drop the Flow link en Onl Test Yes 02 Action OLA Action End DS800 Development Suite
282. ial port driver The network driver that provides communication with the workbench on a serial port Similar to ETCP Indicates an array Indicates a structure DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Glossary 623 IXLSma Server Jump to a Step Keyword Label LD Level 1 of the FC Level 1 of the SFC Level 2 of the FC Level 2 of the SFC Library Link Link Architecture Literal 624 IxlSmaServer exe Provides service for performing XL read operations using the HSD driver with the SMA method This method is independent from the virtual machine cycle and is thus faster SFC graphic component representing a link from a Transition to a Step SFC The graphic symbol of a jump is an arrow identified with the reference of the destination step Reserved identifier of the language For FBD IL or LD identifier identifying an instruction Labels can also be used for jump operations Ladder Diagram Programming language Main description of an FC program Level 1 groups the chart actions and tests and the attached comments Main description of an SFC program Level 1 groups the chart steps and transitions and the attached comments Detailed description of an FC program It is the description of the actions and tests Level 2 programming for FC elements can be developed with ST or LD Detailed description of an SFC program It is the description of the actions within the steps and the Boolean conditions atta
283. ibrary s path The IFB type indicates an IEC Function Block and the IFU type indicates an IEC Function 284 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Help Blocks Parameters Boolean operations Communications Comparators Counter Data conversion Data Manipulation Lib STO_1499_L1B Process Control Signal generation String manipulation Time Inputs 2 Instance Cancel In the dictionary when declaring an instance of a function block from a library the pathname of the library is also displayed together with the function block s type aat MyFunctionBlock When a project has dependencies an icon indicating the status of its dependencies appears at the bottom right hand corner of both the hardware and link architecture views The status of the project s dependencies is OK The project dependencies refer to an invalid library This can happen if a library has been removed renamed or moved DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 285 When a project has a dependency on an invalid library to retain all associations between the project and library upon renaming or moving you need to reestablish the library path Upon deleting a library all associations are broken To define a project s dependencies You can access the Add Remove Dependencies window from the menu or the main toolbar You can only define the dependencies for the currently opened project 1 From
284. ield can be a basic type a basic structured type a structure or an array A field of a variable with a structure type can be accessed using the following syntax VarName a VarName b 3 VarName c d Programs written in SFC or FC language and called by a father program A sub program is also called a child program To call sub programs written in another language use a function A function can be called by any POU The file corresponding to the variables and function blocks defined for a resource This file is downloaded onto the target The symbol table is set to one of two formats complete table or reduced table The complete table contains all defined variables whereas the reduced symbol table only contains the names of variables having a defined Address cell When debugging or simulating code required to enable graphically displaying the output values of functions and operators in FBD and LD diagrams Events occurring on the development platform Such events can be logged using the Events Logger and viewed using the Events Viewer DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Glossary 629 System Variable Target Target Definition Builder TIC Code Timer TIME Token SFC Top Level Program Transition Type 630 System variables hold the current values of all system variables for a resource You can read from or write to system variables These variables are defined in the dsysOdef h file For example the current cycle t
285. iew LD editor and FBD editor You can also unlock variables from the Diagnosis window 304 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual For simple type members of a complex variable such as a structure or array locking or unlocking any member affects the entire complex variable For structure type variables you can display one simple type field The write mechanism automatically displays the first field of the structure For function blocks you need to instantiate these before locking their parameters For locked variables the values displayed in the Logical Value and Physical Value columns of the dictionary view differ depending on their direction Locked Variable Logical Value Physical Value Direction Input Locked Updated by the field value Output Updated by the running TIC code Locked Internal Locked Updated by the consumer binding when one exists or else updated by the running TIC code The following diagram shows the lock unlock process Applicative data Electrical data Logical data i i Physical data comersin t Mot Locked Output devices Driver job To lock variables Locking operates differently for simple variables array and structure elements and function block parameters For simple variables individual variables are locked directly For array and structure elements locking a single element causes all other elements to be locked For function block parameters locking a parameter affects onl
286. iguration Properties dialog box appears 110 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual AHH Config2 3 On the Hardware Tab choose a Target to attach to the configuration Configuration Properties Deleting Configurations You can delete configurations using the main menu or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking a configuration s title bar You cannot delete the last configuration of a project projects must have at least one configuration To delete a configuration val 1 Select the hardware architecture view z 2 Select a configuration Note To deselect resources in the configuration window click an empty space in the configuration window 3 From the Edit menu choose Delete lt DEL gt DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 111 Moving Configurations When you move configurations the hardware architecture view is re drawn to tidy up the display Fixed sized gaps are placed between network and configurations To move a configuration 1 Select the configuration The selected configuration s title bar is highlighted 2 Drag and drop the configuration as desired Inserting Resources You can choose to insert 1 e create resources directly in a configuration while in the hardware architecture view of your project You can also create resources in the link architecture view However in the link architecture new resources are automatically assigned to the first configuration To insert a r
287. ild Program by deactivating each of its active Steps All the children of the child Program are also killed Freeze GFREEZE Deactivates each of the active Steps of the Program and memorizes them so the program can be restarted All the children of the child Program are also frozen DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 415 Restart GRST Restarts a frozen SFC Program by reactivating all the suspended Steps Children of the Program are not automatically restarted Get status GSTATUS Gets the current status active inactive or frozen of a child Program Refer to SFC Actions or to the ST sub sections GSTART GKILL GFREEZE GRST and GSTATUS for more details 416 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual FC Language Flow Chart FC is a graphic language used to describe sequential operations A Flow Chart diagram is composed of actions and tests Between actions and test are oriented links representing data flow Actions and tests can be described with ST LD or IL languages Functions and Function blocks of any language except SFC can be called from actions and tests A Flow Chart program can call another Flow Chart program The called FC program is a sub program of the calling FC program FC Basic Components The basic components of the Flow Chart language are e beginning of chart e ending of chart e actions e tests conditions e oriented links and connectors DS800 Development Suite
288. ile Split Show Output Window Ctrl 4 Clear Output Window Contents Fl Search Help On About Support Info DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench sets the different views of the project to appear in a cascading manner sets the different views of the project to appear in a tiled manner splits the workspace into two simultaneous views displays the output window below the workspace clears the contents of the output window accesses the online help not currently supported displays product and version information not currently supported 213 Working with the Editor The SFC language is used to represent sequential processes The SFC programming is usually separated into two different levels e Level 1 shows the graphic chart the reference names of the steps and the transitions and the comments e Level 2 is the ST LD or IL programming of the actions within the steps or the conditions attached to the transitions Actions or conditions may refer to functions written in other languages FBD LD ST or IL The level 2 programming of a step includes action blocks programmed in ST LD or IL The level 2 programming of a transition describes a Boolean condition entered in ST LD or IL Individual elements are automatically linked if the SFC editor considers them to be in a valid position From the editor you can e Build the current program code to check your program and prepare the code for building the
289. ill have to be wired to an Input module if defined as O Output then the variable will have to be wired to an Output module or if defined as Internal then it can not be wired to a ROC I O module The Attribute should be R read for Inputs W write for Outputs or Free for Inputs or Outputs that will be used as Inputs in other locations in the algorithm DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 163 Discrete Input 8 Point This Wiring is set in the I O Wiring View The parameters are Board number and Slot number Board number is always set to 1 and the Slot number refers to the slot in the RAS device housing in which the DI module resides The I O module wiring in DS800 software is NOT self identifying as it is in ROCLINK 800 software Before wiring each variable must be defined in the Dictionary View Variables Grid Select the appropriate variable from the unwired variables list The Name should identify the I O module The direction can be set 3 ways If defined as I Input then the variable will have to be wired to an Input module if defined as O Output then the variable will have to be wired to an Output module or if defined as Internal then it can not be wired to a ROC I O module The Attribute should be R read for Inputs W write for Outputs or Free for Inputs or Outputs that will be used as Inputs in other locations in the algorithm Discrete Output 5 Point This Wiring is set in the I O Wiring View The parameters a
290. ime is a system variable that can only be read by a program The hardware platform on which Virtual Machines run resources of a project You download configurations Configs onto a RAS device target The Target Definition Builder enables the description of targets main definition and options of the embedded software complex data types such as defined in IEC languages C functions function blocks and conversion functions I O devices or network drivers for IXL communication and or data binding Target Independent Code produced by the DS800 Development Suite compiler for execution on virtual machines Unit of a timer is the millisecond Basic type that can be used to define a Variable a Parameter POU or a Device Graphical marker used to show the active steps of an SFC program Program put at the top of the hierarchy tree A top level program is activated by the system See also Parent Program Father Program Basic graphic SFC component A transition represents the condition between different SFC steps A transition is referenced by a name A Boolean Condition is attached to each transition Data types are defined for many items in DS800 Development Suite projects variables function or function block parameters devices See Standard IEC 61131 Types Basic Structured Types User Types DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual User Data User Types Validity of a Transition Variable Variable Bi
291. in a Flow Chart or if more than one Flow Chart is open between different Flow Charts When an element is moved removed or added the chart is automatically refreshed elements are placed according to the grid and links are redrawn Select To Select an item simply click on it with the left mouse button Multiple selections are made by clicking a blank area of the workspace then drag and drop until the required items are hightlighted The shift key combined with a mouse click selects multiple distant elements Begin 01 Action US Action Ue Action End 246 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Cut Use the cut command to remove selected elements and move them to the clipboard replacing the clipboard s current contents To cut elements 1 Select the element s to cut 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut CTRL X OR 1 Select the element s to cut 2 On the Standard toolbar click Copy Use the copy command to copy selected elements and place them on the clipboard replacing the clipboard s current contents To copy elements 1 Select the element s to copy 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy CTRL C OR 1 Select the element s to copy 2 On the Standard toolbar click in DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 247 Paste Use the Paste command to place the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Any existing selected items are automatically unselected To paste
292. indings for the producer resources you need to define producer groups holding the producer variables for consumption by the consumer resources and link the consumer and producer resources To define an external variable binding You define external variable bindings from the consumer resource L 88 In the Consumer Binding List double click The External Binding editor is displayed External binding Binding from group MyGroup Producing variable MyDintt Info Type DINT Direction INTERNAL Comment Alias Network ETEF Binding parameters Cancel to resource Resourced Consuming variable MyDintg Info Type DINT Direction INTERNAL Comment Alias Consummation error behavior Use last value issued from binding f Use default value Default value li g Specify the producing variable and consuming variable from their respective lists of available variables Indicate whether to use the last value issued from the binding or a default value When using a default value specify the value to use Click OK DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Editing External Variable Bindings You edit the contents of existing external variable bindings from the consumer resource To edit an existing external binding L In the External Binding List window select the binding link to edit in the Consumer groups section From the Consumer Group
293. individual access control F Red The resource is locked Users not having the resource password cannot access the resource or its POUs these users do not have read or write capabilities These users can change resource properties wire and bind variables modify the memory for retain and add devices to wired variables nd Cyan The resource is in read only mode Users not having the resource password can view the resource and its POUs these users only have read capabilities These users can change resource properties wire and bind variables modify the memory for retain and add devices to wired variables POUs in the resource may have individual access control Green The resource is unlocked User can access the resource and its POUs n this user has read and write capabilities However POUs in the resource may have individual access control T The resource is currently opened by another user in single resource project editing mode User can only access the resource properties in read only mode Note While in debug mode or performing builds unlocked resources as well as resources having no access control switch to read only mode Locked resources remain locked For projects having read only access control the resources and POUs making up the project are also set to the read only mode except for those having individual access control 64 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual When copying pasting importing and exporting reso
294. ing Elements You can cut copy or delete either rows or individual cells in the grid depending on the selected editing mode The Cut command removes selected elements and places them on the clipboard The Copy command places the selected item on the clipboard The clipboard holds only one item at a time To cut elements 1 Select an element 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut lt Ctr1 xX gt To copy elements 1 Select an element 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy lt Ctr1 C gt Deleting elements gt Select an element then press Delete 136 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Finding and Replacing Elements You can search for and replace elements in the grid however you can only replace the following elements in the respective grids Variables Parameters Types Defined Words Name Name Name Word Alias Short Name O Equivalent Comment Comment Comment Init Value Dimension Dimension Address Comment To differentiate between upper and lower case characters during a search check Match Case To search or replace an element a character word or phrase 1 From the Edit menu choose Find Replace lt Ctrl F gt The Find Replace dialog is displayed Find what E Replace with Replace Replace All Match whole word only Cancel Match case 2 To search for an element in the Find what field enter the element to search for then click Find Next 3 To replace an element in t
295. int Type T The point type opens a list of logical numbers and parameters belonging to that Point Type 146 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual e Logical Number L In the configuration screens the Logical Number is generally referred to as Point Number or Number e Parameter P These are usually called by the same term as the Tag on the configuration screen The display field at the bottom left of the TLP browser displays the numeric point location of the TLP point and its data type as well as the point s read write attribute You also set the read write attribute of the TLP variable for the DS800 Workbench The ROCLINK 800 data types are matched to the corresponding DS800 data type Correspondence of Data Types ROCLINK 800 DS800 FL REAL UINT8 DINT UINT16 DINT INT16 DINT UINT32 DINT ACx STRING x TIME STRING 22 TLP tlp Address HOURMI DINT BIN DINT Softpoint Softpoint In the dictionary the Comment field indicates the TLP numeric point definition and location DS800 automatically generates the correct wiring for TLP variables entered in the dictionary When a TLP variable is deleted from the dictionary its assigned device is also deleted Also when a TLP device is deleted its wired TLP variable is also deleted When importing TLP variables the automatic wiring is not executed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 147 When selecting a Softpoint Parameter point type with the 0 parameter the TLP vari
296. ion Functions are also known as POUs Functions can only be programmed in ST LD or FBD In all cases the return parameter of a function must be assigned You can only declare local variables in functions However these local variables cannot be function block instances Also you cannot retain the values of variables declared in functions Each time a function is executed its local variables are reset to their initial values zero when none 1s provided in the dictionary When a large structure or array is declared as local variable for a function the compiler generates code to reset the initial values of each simple variable contained in the structure or array The order in which functions appear within their section is not important functions are called from a POU You can move or copy functions to the Function Blocks and Programs sections You can also move or copy function blocks and programs written with languages supported by functions to the Functions section When moving or copying a program to the Functions section all local variables defined in the program are converted to function parameters Example if Fl is programmed as if inl then Fl 10 end it in the case inl is FALSE F1 will not be assigned and it can take any value in the calling program MyVar F1 TRUE leads to MyVar 10 this is OK MyVar2 F1 FALSE you can not predict what will be the value of MyVar2 98 DS800 Development Suite 2 1
297. ion of a step is executed The qualifier can be N S R PO or P1 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Real Real Device Real Time Mode Reference Name SFC Register IL Resource Resource Name Retain Return Return Parameter Rising Edge Rung Run time Error Scope Section Security State Type of a variable stored in a floating IEEE single precision 32 bit format Basic type that can be used to define a variable a Parameter POU or a Device I O Device physically connected to an I O device on the target machine See Virtual Device Run time normal execution mode the Target cycles are triggered by the programmed cycle timing Name which identifies an SFC Step SFC or Transition in an SFC program Current result of an IL sequence The POUs and definitions making up a Virtual Machine The unique identifier of a resource within a configuration Attribute of a variable The value of a retain variable is saved by the Virtual Machine at each cycle The value stored is restored if the Virtual Machine stops and restarts Graphic component of an LD program representing the conditional end of a program See Output Parameter A rising edge of a Boolean variable corresponds to a change from FALSE 0 to TRUE 1 Graphic component of an LD program representing a group of circuit elements leading to the activation of a coil in an LD diagram Application error detected by the Target system at r
298. itecture view 50 linking for external bindings 86 linking for internal bindings 74 managing 48 general between internal 651 moving between configurations 113 operative states of 48 pasting 52 properties options for modifying using online changes 331 real time execution mode for 298 renaming 51 run time settings for 59 running modifying using online changes 332 setting cycle time debug mode 303 setting cycle time edition mode 59 starting and stopping execution of resources 297 status information for 290 stopping builds 348 unlocking 64 viewing the history of 364 window workspace of described 49 RET operator for IL 481 return statements for FBD 431 for LD 449 for ST 460 return symbols inserting FBD elements 269 inserting LD elements 263 reusing functions and function blocks 281 RIGHT function 558 right power bars LD elements for FBD POUs inserting 271 rising edge detection positive coils described 447 contacts described 441 ROL function 559 ROR function 560 row level validation 153 rows duplicating in the Dictionary grid 139 RS function block 593 rules for variables 385 RUN resource state 291 run time logging of system events 175 settings for resources 59 viewing of system events 176 rungs inserting LD elements 264 S S operator for IL 478 saving before exiting setting to prompt 26 changes to projects 39 changes to spy lists 318 search options defining for finding cross references 35
299. ition ae e Functions Pisin e Function blacks Admin Administrator Resource 1 Config Main send info to Re NUM A DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 33 While in normal mode you can perform the following tasks e Creating Projects e Renaming Projects e Adding a Project Description While in the normal or single resource project editing mode you can perform the following tasks with limitations depending on the mode e Opening and Closing Projects e Saving Projects e Printing Projects You can also control access to projects Creating Projects When you create projects you use one of four templates e SingleROC800 SingleROC800E and SingleFB107 containing one resource in one configuration e MultipleROC800E containing two resources in two different configurations linked by an Ethernet network This template is not available for use with non networked versions of the Workbench The SingleROC800 SingleROC800E and MultipleROC800E templates are all RAS device target specific The LibSingleROC800 LibMultipleROC800 and LibSingleFB107 templates are available for use with librairies To create a new project 1 From the File menu choose New Project lt Ctr1 N gt 2 Enter the project name max 128 characters 34 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual 3 Enter comments optional 4 Choose a template 5 Click OK The project is created using the chosen template and the link archi
300. itor Selection in FBD editor Boxes in FBD editor Foreground a Color LD editor E AaBbryz Default Background sd Cancel 2 On the Customize editor select the Colors and Fonts tab then select the item to modify 3 To change the font used select a font and size You can choose to bold the font 4 To change the foreground or background colors click the respective button then from the color editor choose a pre defined color or specify a custom color To set working preferences 1 From the Options menu choose Customize 2 On the Customize editor select the Preferences tab DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 27 Customize 3 Make the desired changes 28 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Directory Structure The installation process creates the following directory structure Emerson DS800 2 1 Bin Simul Tmp User Projects E DS800 2 1 5 Prj j Sproject gt lt ion gt configuration lt resource E Tpl Bi EmptyLibmonoresource B j lt configuration gt lt gt resource DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench Root directory for all Emerson products DS800 Workbench files Executable files Simulator target files Temporary files User profile files Emerson projects DS800 Workbench projects Projects Individual Project Directories A directory per hardware configuration A directory per resource DS8
301. l Function Chart Programming language Indicates a standard function Signed integer 8 bit format Basic type that can be used to define a Variable a Parameter POU or a Device The project editing mode limiting access for an individual user to one resource and its POUs Other users can access other resources of the same project Indicates a Standard IEC 61131 type Structured Text Programming language Boolean Bool Short Integer SINT Double Integer DINT Real Timer TIME STRING See Type Basic ST complete operation DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Step SFC Step FC Step by step Mode STRING Structure Sub program Symbol Table Symbols Monitoring Information System Events Basic graphic component of the SFC language A step represents a steady situation of the process and is drawn as a square A step is referenced by a name The activity of a step is used to control the execution of the corresponding actions The word step may be used for Flow Chart actions See Action A mode used while debugging ST IL and LD POUs where you set breakpoints at specific lines of code or rungs causing the application to stop when reached Character string Basic type that can be used to define a Variable a Parameter POU or a Device Corresponds to a type which has previously been specified to be a data structure i e a type consisting of a collection of named elements or fields Each f
302. l S se Sis 8a et cae Si dasa res teed dae a 487 esc E EA N EE AEE AE E EE T E E A TE 488 E T R EA EE EE E N EA E EATA 489 A EA E S I EEE A EIN E TE EE AE A no nen ouet 491 EEA E AE AS ETA AAE IAE A EEA E Mace E ETE 492 KOGAN cs E O E E 494 AND e coated sees aie sates A O 495 ANY TOSBOO gs eesespeca ahaa a E O sone aesaanay 496 ANY TOSIN oroe a a A 498 ANY TO DINT orree Eie E TA E E NEE 499 ANY TO READ a a A A A AE 501 ANN TO TIME srar EEE 502 ANY TO SIRING ea a uiamnecound pmaiteadid deiasana dees 504 FE UA EE E E EEE T E E E A A A E oes 505 Greater Than Or Qual sisne a TAA 507 Greater Thai aoirean ron E AE O 508 Less Than Or E gualia a AA 510 EE A e a E E A IO E RE E N E A O T apa O TE 511 NEC oia E O a cutest cma tiaeauay 512 NO E tech clara lade sions nate uamedniaauanececnnuls 514 IN OC Equaliser a ES tia salar eat headed de Seat 515 OR ali A A E E E ies 516 TMR ce 517 OR a T E Manned te Gaden dua aslauasantetires comao suis aninetusatetmnnaan stance 518 Standard F Un CHONS merr coc bargeie ce E A eiec ented soes 521 AB e E E tal deters nitedena E E sient 522 ACOS care A inate caiimeaiaors den Cements 523 ANDMAS E ants datt a T A 524 XiV DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual PSTN setae et ees ca ea ecb cee vtec tala cated zara aes 526 PN E teen oink 527 E E canted xen aise vtec eae teem E T 528 CO AEE EEE E E TE E 530 CURRENT ISA DATE iiisiiisiniiisreisereiiireitrreniiriuttreniireitiredin inti oenernnniras 531 DIE AN E SE
303. l operation The N modifier indicates a Boolean negation of the operand For example the instruction ORN IX12 is interpreted as result result OR NOT 1X12 The parenthesis modifier indicates that the evaluation of the instruction must be delayed until the closing parenthesis operator is encountered The C modifier indicates that the attached instruction must be executed only if the current result has the Boolean value TRUE different than 0 for non Boolean values The C modifier can be combined with the N modifier to indicate that the instruction must be executed only if the current result has the Boolean value FALSE or 0 for non Boolean values 474 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Delayed Operations Because there is only one IL register current result some operations may have to be delayed so that the execution order of the instructions can be changed Parentheses are used to indicate delayed operations iC is a modifier indicates the operation to be delayed is an operator executes the delayed operation The opening parenthesis modifier indicates that the evaluation of the instruction must be delayed until the closing parenthesis operator is encountered Example AND IX12 OR 1X35 is interpreted as result result AND IX12 OR IX35 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 475 IL Operators The following table summarizes the standard operators of the IL languag
304. lace the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point e For ST and IL if text is selected before a paste it is replaced by the contents of the clipboard e For LD the elements on the clipboard are pasted in parallel with selected elements To paste before or after a selection use the Paste Special command The Paste command may fail when placing a coil in parallel with a contact or a contact in parallel with a coil e For FBD using the ghost keeping the mouse button depressed enables moving pasted elements to the desired position To paste elements e From the Edit menu choose Paste CTRL V or click o on the Standard toolbar 276 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Paste Special This command is only valid for LD POUs The Paste Special command places the contents of the clipboard in a specified position Notes e The standard Paste command has the same effect as a Parallel Paste Special command e The Paste command may fail because a coil can not be put in parallel with a contact or a contact can not be put in parallel with a coil To paste elements 1 From the Edit menu choose Paste Special A dialog box appears to choose the paste location x Before selection After selection f Parallel Cancel 2 Choose the desired paste location 3 Click OK Delete To delete elements 1 Select the element s 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workben
305. lared in the project or in attached libraries plus C and standard functions available for the corresponding RAS device target Function Blocks all function blocks declared in the project or in attached libraries plus C and standard function blocks available for the corresponding RAS device target Defined Words aliases defined in the Defined Words section of the dictionary in the project or in attached libraries The options specifying what objects to listed in the browser window are Unused list unused variables Used list variables used in POUs To define search options Changes only take effect during the next scan 1 From the Browser s toolbar click y 2 Inthe list of available options check the desired options 358 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Version Source Control You can manage the changing versions of Workbench elements including projects configurations resources and POUs by saving them to a version source control database Saving these elements to a control database enables you to retrieve older versions of the elements at a later time The information saved in the database also includes advanced options definitions such as alarms and events field communications fail over mechanisms trending and Web HMI data servers Version source control also applies to projects opened in single resource mode You save version source control information to a repository using one of two modes e file mod
306. le menu choose Open The Open Project dialog box is displayed 36 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual _ Basicbema J Cemo _ Demo 1499 il Fermberna 1 File name PriLibrary mab Files of type Project Library files prilibrary mdb Cancel T Open as read only Open in single resource mode T Open with advanced options 2 Locate the required project file name 3 Do one of the following To open the project in normal editing mode click Open The project is open in the normal editing mode having access to all resources and POUs To open the project in single resource editing mode check Open in single resource mode then click Open The Resource Selection window is displayed with all project resources showing their security states or non availability Resource Selection x Uk F Bersel A 2 Test get info from A1 lanai 1 Main send info toa A2 Cancel DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 37 4 From the list of available resources select the resource to open then click OK The project is open in the single resource editing mode where only the selected resource is editable To open a project using a command line You can open projects in single resource editing mode or in read only mode using a command line gt To open the project in single resource editing mode from a command line use the following syntax DPM exe project_path res resource
307. le monitoring for the POU remove elements from the POU or clean the project DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 107 To generate debug information for a POU You can also generate debug information for POUs at the resource level 1 Inthe resource window select the POU for which to generate debug information 2 From the Edit menu choose Properties The Program Properties window is displayed showing the Code Generation tab 3 Check Generate debug information To generate monitoring information for a POU 1 Inthe resource window select the POU for which to generate monitoring information 2 From the Edit menu choose Properties The Program Properties window is displayed showing the Code Generation tab 3 Check Generate symbols monitoring information 4 For function blocks specify the size of Instance symbols extra bytes Editing a POU Description You can add a free format text description for a POU To edit the POU Description 1 Select a POU 2 From the Tools menu choose Edit Description 3 Edit the description as required 108 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Hardware Architecture View at Ea The hardware architecture view graphically displays the configurations of a Project and the network links between them From the hardware architecture view you manage many aspects of a project creating configurations attaching targets to configurations inserting resources into configurations moving resou
308. lect the step in the SFC chart then from the Edit menu choose Edit Level 2 2 Inthe level 2 window click the action block to move up then do one of the following Right click the action block then from the contextual menu choose Move Up On the SFC toolbar click To move an action block down 1 Select the step in the SFC chart then from the Edit menu choose Edit Level 2 2 Inthe level 2 window click the action block to move up then do one of the following Right click the action block then from the contextual menu choose Move Down ges On the SFC toolbar click 232 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Deleting an Action Block You delete action blocks from a step from within the level 2 window To delete an action block 1 Select the step in the SFC chart then from the Edit menu choose Edit Level 2 2 Inthe level 2 window click the action block to delete then do one of the following From the Edit menu choose Delete Action Block From the SFC toolbar click Renumbering Charts Renumbering of SFC elements takes place from top to bottom then from left to right Renumbering is only applied to steps and transitions having the standard default names Sx and Tx Before Renumbering After Renumbering I r I E aye Lo _ C A is BEB 5 T E T E T T i To renumber a cha
309. log file is in the Events Logger folder of the current project s directory gt Locate and double click the txt file The file opens in the associated text editor Viewing Events The Events Viewer displays run time system events logged with the Events Logger The Events Viewer displays the contents of the log file created daily by the Events Logger In the viewer events appear as they occur You can sort events according to the categories at the top of the viewer window e Date and time when the event took place e Level the level of the event Possible values include Error Warning and Info e Module the module sending the event e Sub module the sub module sending the event e Error the code number of the error e Description a textual description of the event 176 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual e Value a number relating to target development values e Configuration the name of the configuration running on the target that sent the event When the event is related to a resource the resource name is added to the configuration name for example Config1 Res1 You can choose to view events for a day other than the current day You can also view events for a day in a different month and year as long as the log file for the specified date is available Furthermore you can sort the contents of the viewer according to individual columns in ascending or descending order by clicking a column heading a first time for
310. lt a2 a3 a4 a5 execute delayed ADD result al a2 a3 a4 a5 ADD a6 result al a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 ST res store current result in variable res 482 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Calling Functions A Function call from IL written in any of the ST LD FBD or C language uses its name as an operator Operation executes a Function the value returned by the function is stored into the IL current result Allowed none modifiers Operand The first calling parameter must be stored in the current result before the call The following ones are expressed in the operand field separated by commas Example Calling Function converts an integer value into a time value Main LD bio MY FUNC bil bi2 ST result GT vmax RETC LD result MUL 1000 ANY TO TIME ST tmval call function to get integer value result value returned by function test value overflow return if overflow converts seconds in milliseconds converts to a timer stores converted value ina timer Called Function named MYFUNC evaluates the integer value given as a binary value on three Boolean inputs in0 inl in2 are the three Boolean input parameters of the Function DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 483 LD ANY TO DINT MUL ST LD ANY TO DINT ADD MUL ST LD ANY TO DINT ADD 48
311. lting import is unsatisfactory 9 10 11 To create a backup copy of the project check Create a backup copy of the project before importing element The lt prjlibrary BAK gt file is created in the project folder If the results of the import are unsatisfactory you can choose to restore the project Click Next The element import begins When the import is complete do one of the following To import another element from the exchange file click Next To exit the dialog click Close DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 47 Link Architecture View ral The link architecture view graphically displays the resources of a Project and the resource data links between them This is the default view of the Workbench providing a main entry point to all editors In the link architecture view you manage many aspects of a project e creating resources e linking resources data links for bindings between resources e defining variable groups e creating and manipulating POUs Program Organization Units e setting up I O wiring To access the link architecture view gt From the Window menu choose project name Link Architecture Resources Each resource is displayed as a separate window within the link architecture view The resource window title bar includes E 4 Resourcel Resource Number 1 BB Variable Groups Ly Programs Ly Functions Function blocks e Anicon indicating the operative s
312. m attached ST LD or IL programming some other syntactic rules apply to Flow Chart itself The following are the main rules e All connection points of all symbols must be wired connection to End symbol may be omitted e All symbols must be linked together no isolated part should appear e All connectors should have valid destinations 426 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual FC Examples Two examples of Flow Chart are provided A structured chart using IF THEN ELSE and REPEAT UNTIL structures This first example shows a structured chart using IF THEN ELSE and REPEAT UNTIL Structures DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 427 A non structured chart using a Connector This example shows a non structured chart using a Connector The use of Connectors in such a case avoid the drawing of very long links that could be hard to follow in the case of a large chart when source and destination of a link cannot be visible together on the screen 428 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual FBD Language The Functional Block Diagram FBD is a graphic language It allows the programmer to build complex procedures by taking existing functions from the standard library or from the function or function block section FBD Diagram Main Format FBD diagram describes a function between input variables and output variables A function is described as a set of elementary blocks Input and output variables are connect
313. mat Arguments IN REAL Any signed real value Q REAL Absolute value always positive Description Gives the absolute positive value of a real value Example FBD Program using ABS Function ST Equivalence over ABS delta gt range IL Equivalence LD delta ABS 522 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual GT range ST over ACOS aACOS Arguments IN REAL Must be inset 1 0 1 0 Q REAL Arc cosine of the input value in set 0 0 PI 0 0 for invalid input Description Calculates the Arc cosine of a real value Example FBD Program using COS and ACOS Functions angle cosine ST Equivalence cosine COS angle result ACOS cosine result is equal to angle DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 523 IL Equivalence LD angle COS ST cosine ACOS ST result AND_MASK Arguments IN DINT Musthave integer format MSK DINT Musthave integer format Q DINT Bit to bit logical AND between IN and MSK Description Integer AND bit to bit mask Example FBD example with AND MASK Operators 524 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ST Equivalence parity AND MASK xvalue 1 1 if xvalue is odd result AND MASK l abc 16 f0f equals 16 a0c IL equivalence LD xvalue AND MASK J ST parity LD 16 abc AND MASK 16 f0f ST result ASCII ascii I
314. me This single expression has the same data type as its operands and can be used in a more complex expression For example boo varl AND boo var2 has BOOL type not boo varl has BOOL type sin 3 14 0 72 has REAL type t 1s23 1 78 is an invalid expression For information on data types see page 377 Parentheses are used to isolate sub parts of the expression and to explicitly order the priority of the operations When no parentheses are given for a complex expression the operation sequence is implicitly given by the default priority between ST operators For example 23 6 equals 2 18 20 because multiplication operator has a higher priority 2 3 6 equals 5 6 30 priority is given by parenthesis DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 455 Functions or Function Block Calls Standard ST function calls may be used for each of following objects e Functions and function blocks written in IEC 61131 languages e C functions and function blocks Calling Functions Calling Functions from ST Name name of the called function written in IEC 61131 language or in C Meaning calls a ST IL LD or FBD Functions or a C function and gets its return value Syntax lt variable gt lt funct gt lt par1 gt lt parN gt Operands The type of return value and calling parameters must follow the interface defined for the function Return value value returned by the function Function calls may be used in
315. meters can be used to control which parameters in the input data actually get written to the soft point The hidden parameters are of type BOOL The default value for each parameter is TRUE changing this value to FALSE prevents the corresponding soft point parameter from getting over written with the input data DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 597 Double clicking the function block in the Function Block Diagram opens up a dialog box from which you access the hidden parameters Click on the Parameters tab to display the hidden parameters SOFT_POINT_ WRITE Help Blocks Parameters Comment ieemee TRUE Setto TRUE to allow parameter to be written to soft point float write TRAUE Set to TRAUE to allow parameter to be written to soft point BOOL float write TRAUE Setto TRAUE to allow parameter to be written to soft point BOOL floats write TRAUE Setto TRAUE to allow parameter to be written to soft point BOOL floatt write TRAUE Set to TRAUE to allow parameter to be written to soft point BOOL floath write TRAUE Setto TRAUE to allow parameter to be written to soft point BOOL float6 write TRAUE Set to TAUE to allow parameter to be written to soft point BOOL float write TRAUE Setto TRAUE to allow parameter to be written to soft point BOOL Hoata write TRAUE Setto TRUE to allow parameter to be written to soft point al F Value TRUE Arguments SET1 BOOL _ If TRUE sets Q1 to TRUE domina
316. ms are displayed using color e Keywords are pink e Numbers are brown e Comments are green DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 453 Inactive separators may be freely entered between active separators constant expressions and identifiers ST inactive separators are Space blank character Tabs and End of line character Unlike line formatted languages such as IL end of lines may be entered anywhere in the program The rules shown below should be followed when using inactive separators to increase ST program readability e Do not write more than one statement on one line e Use tabs to indent complex statements e Insert comments to increase readability of lines or paragraphs Example Low Readability High Readability imax max ite cond X12 imax number of iterations if not cond alarm i FOR statement index then return end if cond process validity for i Index J 1 tO max Ite n d o if i es 2 then Speall gt Sete E eee cond X12 end if end for if not cond then no effect if alarm return end if process loop for i 1 to max_ite do if i lt gt 2 then Spcald iy end ri end Tor 454 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Expressions and Parentheses ST expressions combine ST operators and variable or constant operands For each single expression combining operands with one ST operator the type of the operands must be the sa
317. ms to change their order of execution or to change them to functions or function blocks You can move functions to change them to programs or function blocks and move function blocks to change them to programs or functions Changing a function or function block s order within its section has no effect on its execution since it 1s called Note Before manipulating POUs you should save the changes made to your project To move a POU 1 Select the POU in the resource window 2 Drag and drop the POU to its new location 100 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Note You can only move POUs between sections supporting the same language You cannot move a program Child SFC or FC to change its hierarchy level you can only move it to change its position as a child within the same level To change the hierarchical level of an SFC or FC program to become a child see Changing Hierarchy Level on page 103 To cut copy or paste a POU The cut copy and paste commands use the clipboard as temporary storage Once copied or cut a POU can be pasted more than once You can only paste POUs between sections supporting the same language SFC programs are pasted at the same hierarchical level as the selected program When copying and pasting POUs having access control password definitions are retained 1 Inthe resource window select the POU 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut lt Ctr1 X gt or Copy lt Ctr1 C gt or use the contextual
318. n below Such Identifiers cannot be used to name a POU or a variable A ABS ACOS ADD ANA AND AND MASK ANDN ARRAY ASIN AT ATAN B BCD TO BOOL BCD TO INT BCD TO REAL BCD TO STRING BCD TO TIME BOO BOOL BOOL TO BCD BOOL TO INT BOOL TO REAL BOOL TO STRING BOOL TO TIME BY BYTE C CAL CALC CALCN CALN CALNC CASE CONCAT CONSTANT COS DATE DATE AND TIME DELETE DINT DIV DO DT DWORD E ELSE ELSIF EN END_CASE END FOR END FUNCTION END IF END PROGRAM END REPEAT END RESSOURCE END STRUCT END TYPE END VAR END WHILE ENO EQ EXIT EXP EXPT F FALSE FIND FOR FUNCTION G GE GFREEZE GKILL GRST GSTART GSTATUS GT I IF INSERT INT INT_TO BCD INT TO BOOL INT TO REAL INT_TO STRING INT _TO_ TIME DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 385 5 ozz W X JMP JMPC JMPCN JMPN JMPNC LD LDN LE LEFT LEN LIMIT LINT LN LOG LREAL LT LWORD MAX MID MIN MOD MOVE MSG MUL MUX NE NOT OF ON OR OR MASK ORN PROGRAM R READ ONLY READ WRITE REAL REAL TO BCD REAL TO BOOL REAL TO INT REAL TO STRING REAL TO TIME REPEAT REPLACE RESSOURCE RET RETAIN RETC RETCN RETN RETNC RETURN RIGHT ROL ROR S SEL SHL SHR SIN SINT SQRT ST STN STRING STRING TO BCD STRING TO BOOL STRING TO INT STRING TO REAL STRING TO TIME STRUCT SUB SUB DATE DATE SYS ERR READ SYS_ERR_TEST SYS_INITALL SYS_INITANA SYS INITBOO SYS INITTMR SYS _RESTA
319. n block types are None Store Action N Set S and Reset R The qualifiers for IL LD and ST action block types also include the Pulse on Deactivation Action PO and Pulse On Activation Action P1 To add action blocks to steps You can add action blocks using the main menu the SFC toolbar or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking in the level 2 window 1 In the SFC chart select the step for which to add an action block then from the Edit menu choose Edit Level 2 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 229 2 Click in the level 2 window then from the Edit menu choose Add Action Block or click METE Ee from the SFC toolbar 3 Inthe Add Action Block dialog enter a name and comment optional then select a type and qualifier for the action block For the Boo type the selected variable s name is automatically entered in the Name field For the SFC child type enter the name of the SFC child in the Name field Add Action Block g X Mame Comment Type GT Qualifier Py Help a 4 Click OK 5 In the editor window enter the code for the action block You cannot program Boo and SFC child action blocks To specify the default programming language for steps gt From the Options menu choose Set Default Level 2 Language then Step then the desired programming language 230 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Coding Conditions for Transitions You attach conditions to tr
320. n choose to include the header or footer on the cover page of the project documentation You can also choose to add a printing history When the printing starts up a dialogue box is displayed where you can enter a note describing the actual print command Such notes are stored in a history file and are printed on the first page of any future document including the present one e Margins You can choose to include visible margins on all pages When checked the width of each margin top bottom left right is user definable using the corresponding edit boxes e Fonts You can change the font used to print text by clicking Text font and making the desired changes You can change the font used to print all titles corresponding to items listed in the table by clicking Title font and making the desired changes DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 341 Preview You can choose to preview a document with the selected items before printing You can scroll the complete document You can also print previewed pages Document generator T able Options Preview 342 1 PROJECT 1 demo pm pot 141 Configuration 1 Condgi t Thicicthe Contig 1 11 1 Pe oume 2 Teot getinto tum Pi 4 1 1 1 Decon pon and Propertes Target Mi 1 SIGE Lacurce Maks crk phirnikhr a Valdiky Some 0 Erce rimau 000 1 1 1 3 Recourse oontent D regreia O tmuble 16 Mulgieszton inguls come tom FInd 1 1 1 3 Wanables Tuk vula rype BOOL
321. n hysteresis on difference of reals Integration over time Stack of integer Blinking Boolean signal Signal generator On delay timing Off delay timing Pulse timing Note When new function blocks are created these can be called from any language 574 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments TAG STRING A brief textual description of the alarm SET BOOL TRUE enables alarm FALSE disables alarm VAL REAL Numerical value associated with the alarm SRBX BOOL Alarm is a spontaneous report by exception alarm Description The ALARM function places a time stamped alarm in the alarm log of the device Setting the SET input to TRUE logs an alarm set whereas setting this input to false logs an alarm clear The SRBX input allows for the device to contact a host to report an alarm condition Further setup is required in ROCLINK if this input is set to TRUE AVERAGE average Arguments RUN BOOL TRUE run FALSE reset XIN REAL Any real Variable N DINT Application defined number of samples DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 575 XOUT REAL Running average of XIN value Note When setting or changing the value for N you need to set RUN to FALSE then set it back to TRUE Description Stores a value at each cycle and calculates the average value of all already stored values Only the N last values are stored
322. n of debug information for the resource and the individual POUs When switching an application to debug mode to use step by step mode defined breakpoints are sent to the target When you stop debug mode you can choose to remove the breakpoints from the target Breakpoints remaining on a running target may interfere with its cycle In the language editor while in step by step mode defined breakpoints that have been successfully sent to the target appear as red circles to the left of the line of code or rung breakpoints that are disabled on the target appear as lt The current line is indicated with a yellow arrow at its left When stepping passes beyond the last line or rung of a POU the arrow points downward lt 4 A Call Stack window shows stepping information such as the name of the POU from which a Step Into command jumped from upon execution i DGE Test Simulate read only 2 ioj x File Edit Tools Debug Options Window Help 5 lel x E CPA RA LOA E O FH 6 x B i 21 B 51 C i A B x ST_FCT 12 7 LD_FCT 13 8 C IL_FCT 114 9 ST_FB_1 15 10 C ST_FB_1 C LD FB_1 16 11 c ST FB 1 C Ready 1 28 NUM E 300 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Setting Breakpoints You set breakpoints for ST IL and LD POUs in the POU editor Before setting breakpoints in a POU you need to specify the generation of debug information for the re
323. n the FBD and LD Editors for display only max 4 chars BOOL SINT USINT BYTE INT UINT WORD DINT UDINT DWORD LINT ULINT LWORD REAL LREAL TIME DATE STRING Array Type Structure Type Function Block Type see Glossary If Type is STRING is the length max 255 chars Example 1 4 1 7 for a two dimensional Array see Glossary Input Parameter Output Parameter or Local User comments Free format Note Parameters are sorted within the database Input then Output then Local Functions have only one output parameter which must be a simple type 1 e no arrays or structures Function block instances can only be defined as local parameters of function blocks To call a function block in a function block nested function blocks you may create the instance of the called function block as a local parameter of the calling function block This enables you to spy the local parameters of the called block DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 143 Types Grid In the Types grid you create complex types that will then be available for variable declaration i e new types will appear in the Type selection in all grids The columns for types are e Arrays Column Details Name Array name maximum 128 characters conforming to the IEC 61131 Standard Element Type Array Element Type BOOL SINT USINT BYTE INT UINT WORD DINT UDINT DWORD LINT ULINT LWORD REAL LREAL TIME DATE STRING User Arrays Stru
324. n the producer project then in the consumer project link the consumer resource with the producer resource then define the external bindings between the producer variables and the consumer variables You define external bindings from the External Bindings List This list is made up of the Consumer groups and Producer groups sections The Consumer groups section lists the groups holding external producer variables having bindings with consumer variables defined in the project The Producer groups section lists the groups holding outgoing producer variables for consumption in external bindings defined in another project Resource1 external binding list i x m Consumer groups r Producer groups jm e aris Group Group Comment Res Project Group Group Comment When defining producer groups of variables you group variables of a resource to be consumed by consumer variables of one or more resources located in other projects Individual variables of a resource can belong to a one or more producer groups For producer groups and external bindings indicates errors that can occur for different situations such as the following Producer groups The project of a producer group cannot be found The producer group cannot be found within the specified project A confict exists between the consumer and producer resources One of the bound producer variables no longer exists External bindings The produ
325. n unlock variables in the Diagnostic window You can also unlock variables from the from the dictionary view LD editor and FBD editor DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 309 When viewing locked unwired IO channels these are displayed with their directly represented variable naming To unlock variables e To unlock a single variable select its name in the list then click Unlock e To unlock all variables click Unlock All Breakpoints You can view a list of all breakpoints defined for ST IL and LD POUs of a resource for use with the step by step mode IL_prg line 10 IL_ pra line 21 LO pro line 6 ST_pro line 6 Version Information You can view version information including the compilation version number the compilation date and the CRC Cyclic Redundancy Checking of the data the resource works on for three sources of resource code e the compiled code for the resource in the Workbench project e the code for the resource running on the target e the code for the resource stored on the target Version Date CAC Compiled 8 14 35 3921 Feb 2003 F23EAFAC Running A 14 31 35 21 Feb 2003 TBBEE SIA Stored 4 i 4 31 35 21 Feb 2003 166EE914 310 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SFC Breakpoints While in Debug mode you can place SFC breakpoints on SFC steps or transitions When a breakpoint is encountered the resource is set to the BREAK state This mode is equivalent to the cycle to
326. nce result SHR register 1 register 2 1100 1101 0011 0101 result 2 1110 0110 1001 1010 IL Equivalence LD register SHR 1 ST result SIN sin Arguments IN REAL Any REAL value Q REAL Sine of the input value in set 1 0 1 0 Description Calculates the Sine of a real value DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 565 Example FBD Program using SIN and ASIN Functions ST Equivalence Sine SIN angle result ASIN sine result is equal to angle IL Equivalence LD angle SIN ST sine ASIN ST result SQRT sart Arguments IN REAL Mustbe greater than or equal to zero Q REAL Square root of the input value Description Calculates the square root of a real value 566 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD Program using SQRT Function root ST Equivalence xpos ABS xval xroot z SORT xpos IL Equivalence LD xval ABS ST xpos SQRT ST xrout SUB_DATE_DATE SUB CATE DATE DATI DATI Arguments DATI DATE First date in a comparison DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 567 DAT2 DATE Second date in a comparison TIME TIME Difference in TIME format between DAT1 and DAT2 The possible date difference values range from t 0h to t 1193h2m47s294ms inclusively A value of 1193h2m47s295ms indicates an error for either of the following c
327. nction or function blocks In the case of a function the return value is the only output from the box Function blocks can have more than one output Example net weigh C iare wegh weight ___ DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 433 ST Equivalence in ST we have to define an intermediate variable net_ weight net weight Weighing mode delta call function If net weight 0 Then Return End if weight net weight tare weight 434 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual LD Language Ladder Diagram LD is a graphic representation of Boolean equations combining Contacts input arguments with Coils output results The LD language enables the description of tests and modifications of Boolean data by placing graphic symbols into the program chart LD graphic symbols are organized within the chart exactly as an electric Contact diagram LD diagrams are connected on the left side and on the right side to vertical Power Rails These are the basic graphic components of an LD diagram Left vertical power rail Right vertical power rail Horizontal connection line Vertical connection line Multiple connection lines all connected together Contact associated with a variable Coil associated to an output or to an internal variable Heo DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 435 Power Rails and Connection Lines An LD diagram is limited on the left and right side
328. nding Variable Group Variable Name Version Information Version Source Control Virtual Device Virtual Machine User Data are any data of any format file list of values which have to be merged with the generated code of the resource in order to download them into the RAS device target Such data are not directly operated by the Virtual Machine and is commonly dedicated to other software installed on the target PLC Types that the user can define using basic types or other user types User types can be arrays or structures Attribute of a Transition A transition is validated or enabled when all the preceding steps are active Unique identifier of elementary data which is used in the programs of a Project See Binding Grouping of variables enabling managing and logically sorting these within a resource Variable groups are displayed in the dictionary s variables tree A unique identifier defined in the Workbench for a storage location containing information used in exchanges between resources The information indicating the compilation version number the compilation date and the CRC of the data the resource works on for three sources of resource code the compiled code for the resource in the Workbench project the code for the resource running on the target the code for the resource stored on the target A tool that manages the changing versions of Workbench elements including projects configurations
329. negative coils described 448 falling edge detection negative contacts described 442 finding matching coils in POUs 278 finding matching names in POUs 278 inserting block on the left 262 inserting block on the right 262 inserting coils 262 inserting contact on the left 261 inserting contact on the right 261 inserting jumps to labels 262 inserting labels 263 inserting links 264 inserting parallel blocks 262 inserting parallel contacts 262 inserting returns 263 inserting rungs 264 inverted coils described 444 inverted contacts described 440 jumps described 450 labels described 450 monitoring output values in POUs 295 multiple connections described 437 power rails described 436 reset coils described 446 return statements described 449 rising edge detection positive described 447 coils rising edge detection positive contacts described 441 set coils described 445 toolbar language editor 194 usage of blocks functions and function blocks described 451 working with POUs multi language editor 261 LD elements for FBD POUs inserting coils 271 inserting contacts 270 inserting LD vertical connections 270 inserting left power bar 270 inserting right power bar 271 LD operator for IL 477 LEFT function 537 left power bars LD elements for FBD POUs inserting 270 less than operator 511 less than or equal operator 510 level 2 windows editing SFC elements 228 viewing FC elements 250 lev
330. ng To import another element from the exchange file click Next To exit the dialog click Close DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To restore a project from a backup 1 2 Close the workbench Replace PrjLibrary mdb with PrjLibrary bak Remove or rename the lt element_name gt directory Rename lt element_name BAK gt directory into lt element_name gt directory DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 45 Uploading Workbench Elements from Targets You can upload Workbench elements from any project into another when the resources code has been stored on the target if non volatile storage exists for the platform The element source file is compressed and contains all data for the element The file is in the same format compressed exchange file PXF used when importing and exporting Workbench elements from one project to another For details on importing and exporting elements see page 43 Before uploading an element s source file you need to download its source code onto the target Furthermore when setting up the resource s Compilation Options properties you need to check the Embed Zip Source option and select the element type To upload an element from sources on a target The element upload process consists of uploading the source file containing the element from the target onto the local computer for access then importing the element into the project from the source file Before impo
331. ng blocks in an LD diagram leads to the addition of new parameters EN ENO to the block interface The EN input On some operators functions or function blocks the first input does not have Boolean data type As the first input must always be connected to the rung another input is automatically inserted at the first position called EN The block is executed only if the EN input is TRUE Below is the example of a comparison operator and the equivalent code expressed in ST IF rung state THEN q valuel gt value 2 ELSE valued q FALSE END IF value continue rung with q state The ENO output On some operators functions or function blocks the first output does not have Boolean data type As the first output must always be connected to the rung another output is automatically inserted at the first position called ENO The ENO output always takes the same state as the first input of the block Below is an example with AVERAGE function block and the equivalent code expressed in ST AVERAGE rung state Signal 100 RUN OutSignal AVERAGE XOUT eno rung_state Signal Dut Signal HIM HOUT continue rung with eno state 100 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 451 The EN and ENO parameters On some cases both EN and ENO are required Below is an example with an arithmetic operator and the equivalent code expressed in ST value value 452 IF run
332. ng editing Furthermore for each resource you could also verify the target type and the type of code to generate Build Before downloading code onto your RAS device target systems you must first build the code of the whole project This operation builds the code of all resources of the project and builds information used to recognize your systems on networks You cannot build projects open in the read only mode Once a project has been built subsequent builds only recompile the parts of the project needing recompilation You can choose to rebuild a project 1 e recompiling a whole project to ensure that the complete compiled version is up to date with the current Workbench project You can rebuild projects following a date change on a system or relocation of a project onto a different computer You can choose to clean projects However after cleaning a project you cannot perform online changes Therefore to retain the ability to perform online changes you can rebuild a project rather than cleaning then building it While performing builds the security state of unlocked resources and resources having no access control switches to read only mode The security state of unlocked POUs and POUs having no access control also switches to read only mode Locked resources and locked POUs remain locked To build the project e From the Project menu choose Build Project or click _ _ on the Standard toolbar DS800 Development Suite 2 1
333. ng on it 2 On the right hand side of the LD toolbar click The new link is inserted to the left of the position highlighted in black To align coils on all rungs n 0 justifies the coils on each rung so that coils are aligned vertically on the right 264 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual FBD Elements When programming in FBD choose the element to be inserted from the FBD toolbar and place it in the Program Workspace Place all elements blocks and variables then link them by using links An element is automatically linked to another element if it is placed next to it such that their connectors meet When wiring intersects or diverges the junction is indicated by a dot Before using arrays in FBD these must be declared in the Dictionary View Ladder elements are also available for use in FBD programs To show the order of execution of an FBD program You can show the order of execution in the form of numerical tags for the following elements in an FBD program coils returns jumps instances of function blocks declared or not and variables where a value is assigned in the program When the order cannot be determined the tags display question marks You can perform this task from the menu bar the toolbar or keyboard shortcut Ctrl W gt From the Tools menu choose Show Hide Execution Order or click L on the Standard toolbar To assign a name to a variable or block graphic symbol
334. ngle variable click at the beginning of the line holding the variable To select more than one line contiguous lines select the lines holding the variables while holding down the Shift key To select more than one line non contiguous lines select the lines holding the variables while holding down the Ctrl key DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 317 Removing Variables from the Spy List You remove variables from the Spy List window To remove a variable from the spy list 1 Inthe Spy List window select the variable by clicking on the very beginning of the line 2 Press Delete Rearranging the Spy List You can change the position of a variable within the spy list To change the position of a variable in the spy list gt Inthe Spy List window select the variable then drag and drop it to its new position Saving a Spy List You can save a spy list created for your projects These lists are saved with the SPY extension To save a spy list 1 Inthe Spy List window right click in the grid 2 From the contextual menu choose Save Spy list 3 Inthe dialog box enter a name for the file and choose a location then click Save Warning You need to save your list each time you make changes 318 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Opening an Existing Spy List You can choose to open a previously created spy list To open a previously created spy list 1 Within the Spy List window right click in the grid 2 F
335. nitions not having the read only attribute into a version source control database For elements having access control the check in process encrypts the element in the version source control database making them accessible upon entering a valid password To check in a project 1 With the project open in the Workbench from the Tools menu choose Check In then Project 2 Inthe Check In dialog enter a comment optional then click OK The project definitions including all of its configurations resources and POUs is saved in the version source control database To check in a configuration resource or POU You can check in configurations and resources from the hardware architecture view You can check in resources and POUs from the link architecture view You can check in configurations resources or POUs using the main menu or from a contextual menu available by right clicking the element 1 Inthe applicable view select the element to check in 2 From the Tools menu choose Check In then the respective option 3 Inthe Check In dialog enter a comment optional then click OK The element s definitions are saved in the version source control database For configurations these definitions include all of its resources and POUs For resources these definitions include all of its POUs DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 363 Viewing the History of Workbench Elements You can view the history of projects configuration
336. ns 2 Note If the two resources are distant they must be located in configurations that are attached to the same target Heterogeneous bindings are not yet supported DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 73 Linking Resources You need to link resources before binding variables belonging to them Data links between resources are directional All bindings using a data link must use the same network You can link resources from the Binding List window You can also link resources from the link architecture view In the Resource binding grid you create links between resources by locating the resource holding the producing variable in the first column and the resource holding the consuming variable in the top row then selecting the grid cell where both meet In the grid resource links appear as one of two types E The linked resources belong to the same configuration Ala The linked resources belong to different configurations In the link architecture view you create links by physically joining the resource holding the producing variable with the resource holding the consuming variable In this view data links appear as directional arrows linking the resources The color of data links depend on the type of bindings using it Black The data link is only used for internal bindings Blue The data link is used for internal bindings When bindings have an error the Q symbol is displayed on the data link used by the binding 74
337. nt RESET BOOL _ If TRUE resets Q1 to FALSE Ql BOOL Boolean memory state Description Set dominant bistable Seti Reset Q1 Result QI 0 0 0 0 598 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual e e O 5D ED e O O me m e OD O e e O eme ODO m e e O O m Example FBD Program using SR Block auto mode command ST Equivalence We suppose SR1 is an instance of SR block SR1 auto_ mode amp start cmd stop cmd command SR1 0Q1 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 599 STACKINT stackirit PUSH Arguments PUSH BOOL Push command on Rising Edge only add the IN value on the top of the stack POP BOOL Pop command on rising edge only delete in the stack the last value pushed top of the stack RI BOOL Resets the stack to its empty state IN DINT Pushed value N DINT Application defined stack size EMPTY BOOL TRUE ifthe stack is empty OFLO BOOL Overflow TRUE if the stack is full OUT DINT Value at the top of the stack Description Manage a stack of integer values The STACKINT Function Block includes a rising edge detection for both PUSH and POP commands The maximum size of the stack is 128 The application defined stack size N cannot be less than 1 or greater than 128 Note OFLO value is valid only after a reset R1 has been set to TRUE at least once and back to FALSE 600 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD Program u
338. nual eqry cdl cd2 vqry verl verl lic Description DINT DINT DINT DINT STRING STRING Query options for application code Application code 1 Application code 2 Query options for version Version 1 Version 2 LicenseInfo Identifies license returned The REQUEST LICENSE function requests a license from the license server Arguments SET RESET1 Ql Description Reset dominant bistable Set O gt o BOOL BOOL BOOL Resetl QI 0 0 0 1 l 0 1 l 0 0 If TRUE sets Q1 to TRUE If TRUE resets Q1 to FALSE dominant Boolean memory state Result Q1 5O O DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 593 l 1 0 l l l Example FBD Program using RS Block stop cmd alarm command ST Equivalence We suppose RS1 is an instance of RS block RS1l start_ cmd stop cmd OR alarm command RS1 0Q1 SET_PRIORITY SET_PRIORITY pri Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments pri DINT Priority of the operating system Possible values range between 10 and 31 Description Sets the priority of the operating system 594 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SIG_GEN zig qen PULSE RUA LP PERO END MAXIM SINE Arguments RUN PERIOD MAXIMUM PULSE UP END SINE Description BOOL TIME DINT BOOL DINT BOOL REAL Mode TRUE running FALSE reset to
339. ocess a S CONSERRR2FROMA1 CO i it b CONSERRA3FROMA1 CO i ie FLASHBUTTON 20 2 Cl i FLASHRUN CONFIG1 USE i FLASHSTART CONFIG1 M lt SFC gt CONFIGT MAIN DRIVE 11 48 37 1 2 perpen SFC gt CONFIGT MAIN DRIVE 72 48 61 1 Sie lt SFC gt CONFIGT MAIN DRIVE T amp 36 37 1 NEN LEADFRUN CONFIG1 USEF CONFIG1 MAIN OS imnB ooN 1 1 1 1 1 1 LEADSTART CONFIG1 MA D NBCYCLE Sea Browsing successtully terminated DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 395 When viewing global objects in the browser the 2 symbol indicates that the object is not used in any POUs You can perform many tasks from the Browser s toolbar keeps the browser always on top locates the name entered in the Find field B from the list of global objects declared in the project A browses 1 e parse the POUs to re calculate the cross references prints the cross references clears the output window shows or hides the list of declared objects shows or hides the output window accesses the available options for the calculation of cross references To access the browser You can access the browser using the menu the toolbars or from a contextual menu available by right clicking in a language editor gt From the Tools menu choose Browser or from the Window Buttons toolbar click 356 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Calculating Cross References When you calculate cro
340. ock 596 SOFT POINT WRITE function block 597 sorting run time system events 176 the Dictionary grid 138 source control for versions of Workbench elements 359 splitting workspace of language editors 197 spreadsheets importing variables data using 93 653 spy lists CTD 581 accessing variables list for 316 CTU 582 adding variables to 316 CTUD 583 forcing values of variables in 319 DBG CLR GET ERR 585 opening 319 DBG CLR_SET ERR 585 rearranging variables in 318 DBG GET ERR 586 removing variables from 318 DBG_ SET ERR 586 saving 318 DERIVATE 587 selecting variables in 317 EVENT 588 SQRT function 566 F_ TRIG 588 SR function block 598 HYSTER 589 ST Structured Text INTEGRAL 590 assignment basic statements for 459 R_TRIG 591 calling function blocks from 457 REQUEST LICENSE 592 calling functions from 456 RS 593 CASE OF ELSE END CASE basic SET PRIORITY 594 statements for 462 SIG_GEN 595 EXIT basic statements for 466 expressions and parentheses in 455 extensions for SFC child execution 467 FOR TO BY DO END FOR basic statements for 465 go to line for POUs 279 IF THEN ELSE ELSIF END IF basic statements for 461 main syntax of programs in 453 REPEAT UNTIL END REPEAT basic statements for 464 return basic statements for 460 toolbar in the language editors 192 SOFT POINT READ 596 SOFT POINT WRITE 597 SR 598 STACKINT 600 TLP_GET DINT 601 TLP_GET REAL 602 TLP_GET SINT 603 TLP_GET STRING 604 TLP GET TLP 605 TLP
341. ogram must be a child of the one in which the statement is written Return value none Children of the child program are automatically restarted by the GRST statement GRST is not in the IEC 61131 standard DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 471 GSTATUS Statement in SFC Action Name GSTATUS Meaning returns the current status of an SFC program Syntax lt var gt GSTATUS lt child_name gt where child_name represents the name of the SFC child POU Operands the specified SFC program must be a child of the one in which the statement is written Return value 0 Program is inactive killed 1 Program is active started 2 Program is frozen Note GSTATUS is not in the IEC 61131 standard Example Run om GSTART Schild if GSTAT US schild 0 then Mstat Stopped else NOT Run_ermd Mstat Running end ff Po KillChild GEILL Schild Run cmd 472 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IL Language Instruction List or IL is a low level language Instructions always relate to the current result or IL register The operator indicates the operation that must be made between the current value and the operand The result of the operation is stored again in the current result IL Main Syntax An IL program is a list of instructions Each instruction must begin on a new line and must contain an operator completed with optional modifiers and if neces
342. older of the current project s directory A new log file is automatically created each day at 00 00 00 hours The name of the log file is Events YYYYMMDD txt where YYYY is the year MM is the month and DD is the day on which the file is created You can open the log file in text format using a text editor When starting the Events Viewer from the Workbench while an application is running the Events Logger automatically points towards the application s project and the logger is started You can also choose to start the Events Logger from a command line To start the Events Logger from a command line You can set the Events Logger to start for a given Workbench project from a command line using the following syntax EventsLogger P full directory path The executable file for the Events Logger is installed in the following location Program Files Emerson DS800 bin EventsLogger exe DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 175 When manually starting the Events Logger you may need to provide the location of the Workbench project The Events Logger needs to be started in it s location directory For example C gt cd Program Files Emerson DS800 Bin C gt EventsLogger P Program Files Emerson Projects DS800 Prj MyProject You can also start the Events Viewer from a command line To open a log file You can view the log of events as a text file by opening the log in a text editor such as Notepad The default location for the
343. olean state TRUE the Program ends no further part of the diagram is executed No connection can be put on the right of a RETURN symbol For more details about return statements see page 431 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 269 LD Elements The LD elements available for use in Function Block Diagrams are the following Left Power Bar I Contacts of the Ladder Diagram language must be connected on the left to a left power bar which represents the initial TRUE state The editor also allows the connection of any Boolean symbol to a left power bar You can resize the height of a left power bar Contacts Fea las als A contact can be connected on the left to a left power bar or another contact A contact can be connected on the right to any other Boolean point another contact a coil a Boolean input of a block By default a direct contact is inserted To change the contact type select the contact and press the lt spacebar gt Repeatedly pressing the lt spacebar gt cycles between all contact types LD Vertical OR Connection Zj LD vertical connection accepts several connections on the left and several connections on the right Each connection on the right is equal to the OR combination of the connections on the left You can resize the height of an OR Connection 270 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Coils FIT ra lt gt A coil represents an Action It must be connected on the left
344. ollapses GMAIN sub tree 5 74 GMAIN main control time control Description Local VWarnables Parameters Clicking here expands Drive sub tree 44 0 Drive drive Lead or Flash You select items for printing by checking the box at their left You deselect items by unchecking them Checking an item at the top of a sub tree automatically selects all items below it for printing In the following example only the Main resource was checked for printing i Main Main process w Description and Properties v Resource content wf LO wiring y YW arlables wv Detailed binding G MAIN F man control time control vf Drive drive Lead or Flash 338 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual When some but not all items within a tree are selected the check box at the top of the structure is grayed 4 Resource 1 Resourcel Resource Number 1 Description and Properties Resource content 10 wiring Variables Detailed binding W CallBlink just to test Block call wv Description W Source Local Yarables Parameters Blink Sequence When items such as projects resources or POUs are password protected locked these are unavailable for printing and appear grayed G p Resource 1 Main send info to A2 ou Description and Properties Resource content 0 wiring F Vanables P P Detailed binding E Addition simple addition E Main simple loop
345. on G Note Pressing F8 on the keyboard has the same effect Jump Fa gt Inserts a jump to a label Note Pressing F9 on the keyboard has the same effect 262 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Label In Ladder the label indentifies a rung To enter a label identifying a rung 1 Press Enter or double click the header cell of the rung 2 Inthe dialog box enter a name for the label 3 Press OK to confirm Return F40 RET Inserts a return symbol Note Pressing Shift F9 on the keyboard has the same effect Change Coil Contact Type 1 bye Nt The available types of coils and contacts are listed in the Language Reference For LD elements in FBD diagrams you can also change the type of contact or coil To change the type of a coil or a contact 1 Select the coil or contact 2 Do one of the following From the Edit menu choose Change coil contact type On the LD toolbar click 1 bine Press the lt space bar gt DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 263 Insert New Rung To insert a rung between two existing rungs e From the Edit menu choose Insert New Rung The new rung is inserted above the rung that contains at least one selected element The rung is composed of one contact and one coil When you press any button on the LD toolbar at the end of the diagram a new rung is created Other Operations To insert a link 1 Select the desired part of the rung by clicki
346. on Gives the real result of the operation base Real number to be raised Power exponent IN p 1 0 if IN is not 0 0 and EXP is 0 0 0 0 if IN is 0 0 and EXP is negative 0 0 if both IN and EXP are 0 0 0 0 if IN is negative and EXP does not correspond to an integer sa ponem base being the first argument and exponent the second one The exponent is a real value Example FBD Program using POW Function 554 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ST Equivalence result POW xval power IL Equivalence LD xval POW power ST result RAND Arguments base DINT _ Defines the allowed set of number Q DINT Random value in set 0 base 1 Description Gives a random integer value in a given range Example FBD Program using RAND function DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 555 ST Equivalence selected MUX4 RAND 4 1 4 8 16 random selection of 1 of 4 pre defined values the value issued of RAND call is in set 0 3 so selected issued from MUX4 will get randomly the value 1 if O is issued from RAND or 4 if 1 is issued from RAND or 8 if 2 is issued from RAND or 16 if 3 is issued from RAND REPLACE replace Arguments IN STRING Any string Str STRING String to be inserted to replace NbC chars NbC DINT Number of characters to be deleted 556 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual
347. on Group Attribute Scope Dir Resourcel YarDint DINT vdinx 0 1 5 Free Global Inti Resourcel WarDint 4 Resourcel VarDint 1 Resourcel VarDint 2 Resourcel VarReal REALI vrea 0 12 34 Free Global Inti Resource fiddint FLDIODINT 0 1 3 Read Global Inp Config Resourcel fiddint2 FLDIODINT 0 1 4 Read Global Inp Pirih export ef o gt Ready NMI T F DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 93 An example of a CSV file holding variables data The first line holding the title of each column headings in the same order as they are defined for each variable Config Resource Name Data Type Alias StringSize InitValue Dimension Group Attribute Scope Direction Retain Address Comment TODriverIDNum IOFieldEquipIDNum IODeviceIDNum TOChannel DriverWiring AlarmEnable AlarmTransFilter AlarmDeadBand AlarmHHEnable AlarmHHValue AlarmHEnable AlarmHValue AlarmLEnable AlarmLValue AlarmLLEnable AlarmLLValue AlarmHysteresis AlarmROCEnable AlarmROCValue AlarmROCPeriod AlarmHHDevEnable AlarmHHDevValue AlarmHDevEnable AlarmHDevValue AlarmTransient0O 1 EventEnable EventAutoDetection EventDeadBand EventTransiento 1 EventTransient1 0 TrendEnable TrendCABSize TrendFileSize TrendHistorical The next line holds the data for the first variable in the same order as the columns in the first line Empty spaces between commas indicate that no information is present for the specific field The data for each variable starts at the configu
348. on Process Managemen f Format 4 Format B Cancel Header Footer l X amp EMERSON Process Manag ement Bitmap file CAProgram FilesiEmerson Process Managemen OF Format A Format B Cancel DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual When replacing the bitmap for the format B option you need to use one consistent with the resolution of your printer For example the default bitmaps are consistent with a 600 dpi printer e Page numbering You can specify the page numbering method used for the project document printing page count total number of pages page number or section number 4 For page count the page section in the header footer displays the page number out of the total number of pages and the table of contents starts count at 1 For page number the page section in the header footer displays the page number and the table of contents starting count at the Start Page value When no value is specified page numbering begins at 1 For section number the page section in the header footer displays the page number and the table of contents starting count at the Start Section value after the table of contents page the header and table of contents pages use the lower case Roman numerals 1 and ii then section numbering begins When no value is specified section numbering begins at 1 You can only include page numbering in a header or footer e Cover page You ca
349. on line has the TRUE Boolean state the program ends without executing the equations entered on the following lines of the diagram When the LD program is a function its name has to be associated with an output coil to set the return value returned to the calling program Example anual mode RETURN Input input re sult Inputs ST Equivalence If Not manual mode Then RETURN End if result inputl OR input3 AND input2 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 449 Jumps and Labels Labels conditional and unconditional jumps symbols can be used to control the execution of the diagram No connection can be put on the right of the label and jump symbol The following notations are used gt gt LAB jump to label named LAB LAB definition of the label named LAB If the connection on the left of the jump symbol has the TRUE Boolean state the program execution is driven after the label symbol Example Mandal mode J oH input 1 result i END OTHER inputi result EHD IL Equivalence ldn manual mode jmpc OTHER ld input1 st result jmp END OTHER ta input2 st result END end of program 450 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual BLOCKS in LD Using the LD editor you connect function boxes to Boolean lines A function can actually be an operator a function block or a function As all blocks do not have always a Boolean input and or a Boolean output inserti
350. on line state and a Boolean variable Left Connection Right Connection The state of the connection line on the right of the Contact is the Logical AND between the state of the left connection line and the value of the variable associated with the Contact Example Inputl input output H H ae ST Equivalence outputl inputi AND input2 Inverted Contact An Inverted Contact enables a Boolean operation between a connection line state and the Boolean negation of a Boolean variable Yrs Left Connection Right Connection 440 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual The state of the connection line on the right of the Contact is the Logical AND between the state of the left connection line and the Boolean negation of the value of the variable associated with the Contact Example Inputl input output ST Equivalence outputl NOT inputl AND NOT input2 Contact with Rising Edge Detection A Contact with rising edge detection positive enables a Boolean operation between a connection line state and the rising edge of a Boolean variable Atk Left Connection Right Connection The state of the connection line on the right of the contact is set to TRUE when the state of the connection line on the left is TRUE and the state of the associated variable rises from FALSE to TRUE It is reset to FALSE in all other cases Example Input input outo uti H kemo DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Langua
351. onditions DATI is less than DAT2 The difference between DAT1 and DAT2 is greater than 1193h2m47s294ms Description Compares two dates and gives the difference in TIME format Example FBD Program using SUB DATE DATE Function SUB_OATE_DATE DATI DATE ST Equivalence timResult SUB DATE DATE datVall datVal2 IL Equivalence LD datVal1 SUB DATE DATE datVal2 ST timResult 568 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Arguments IN REAL Cannot be equal to PI 2 modulo PI Q REAL Tangent of the input value 1E 38 for invalid input Description Calculates the Tangent of a real value Example FBD Program using TAN and ATAN Functions tangent result ST Equivalence tangent TAN angle result ATAN tangent result is equal to angle IL Equivalence LD angle TAN ST tangent ATAN ST result DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 569 TRUNC trung Arguments IN REAL Any REAL value Q REAL IfIN gt 0 biggest integer less or equal to the input If IN lt 0 least integer greater or equal to the input Description Truncates a real value to have just the integer part Example FBD Program using TRUNC Function 2 0591 ST Equivalence result TRUNC 2 67 TRUNC 2 0891 means result 2 0 2 0 0 0 IL Equivalence LD 2 67 TRUNC OT temporary
352. only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments point type t DINT Refers to point type that contains the parameter to be set logical 1 DINT Instance of specified point type parameter p DINT Parameter to set vin SINT New value for specified parameter Description Sets parameter referenced by a TLP Any numerical data type can be set with this function Vin is converted to the data type of specified TLP before parameter is set 608 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual TLP_SET_STRING TLP_SET_STRING Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments point type t DINT Refers to point type that contains the parameter to be set logical 1 DINT Instance of specified point type parameter p DINT Parameter to set vin STRING New value for specified parameter Description Sets parameter referenced by a TLP Any string type can be set with this function String will be padded with spaces if vin is shorter than string being set String will be truncated if vin is longer than string being set TOF TOF IM a PT Arguments IN BOOL If Falling Edge starts increasing internal timer If Rising Edge stops and resets internal timer PT TIME Maximum programmed time DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 609 Q BOOL _ If TRUE total time is not elapsed ET TIME Current elapsed time Description Increase an internal timer up to a given value Timing diagram IH pr H
353. oolean OR of the input terms Description Boolean OR of two or more terms Example FBD example with OR Operators bi ee bot bod 516 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ST equivalence bo10 bil01 OR NOT bil02 bos z bi51 OR bi52 OR DI53 IL equivalence LD bil01 ORN bil02 ST bo10 LD bi51 OR 152 OR bi53 ST bo5 TMR ThiR IH P Arguments IN DINT A non TIME value IN or integer part of IN if it is real is the number of milliseconds Q TIME Time value represented by IN Description Converts an integer or real variable to a time one DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 517 Example FBD example with Convert to Timer Operators 756 E ares E Se ee 1256 3 L HA res ST Equivalence ares TMR rres TMR 1256 ares t 1s256ms 1256 3 rres t 1s256ms IL equivalence LD TMR ST LD TMR ST XOR OR IH1 IH P Arguments INI BOOL IN2 BOOL Q BOOL 518 1256 ares 1256 3 rres Boolean exclusive OR of the two input terms DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Description Boolean exclusive OR between two terms Example FBD example with XOR operators ST equivalence bolo s HIO XOR NOT bi02 DoS bi51 XOR bi52 XOR bi53 IL equivalence LD bil01 XORN bil02 ST bo10 LD bi51 XOR bi52 XOR bi53 ST bo5
354. ools This toolbar is displayed when editing an LD POU or an Action or a test of an FC or SFC POU written in LD F gt Insert Contact before Insert Contact after Insert parallel Contact Insert Coil Fest Insert Block before F7 T Insert Block after Insert parallel Block 194 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Insert a Jump F40 RET Insert RETURN EHIN Change Coil Contact Type pressing the lt spacebar gt has the same effect Insert link Align coils FBD Tools The FBD tools bar is displayed when editing a POU written in the FBD language Selects items F Adds a variable F2 Adds a function block Draws a link Draws a link with negation FE Adds a corner Inserts a jump to label DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 195 ca Inserts a label Inserts a return Adds a left power bar r Adds a contact mn A T Adds an LD vertical connection 4 Adds a coil aN a k J Change Coil Contact Type pressing the k ge tN lt spacebar gt has the same effect 4 Adds a right power bar F2 Adds a comment ma Shows or hides the execution order z 196 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Workspace When you open a POU it appears in a window This windows appear within the Editor s Workspace For the FBD and LD language editors you can also change the foreground and background colors The Workspace of the FC Flow Chart and
355. op to bottom contents of a cell the edition mode 1s retained in the next cells Shift Tab Moves from one grid cell to the next Moves from one line to the next from from right to left When editing the bottom to top contents of a cell the edition mode is retained in the next cells End Moves to the bottom of the variables list Moves to the line at the bottom of the variables list Home Moves to the top of the variables list Moves to the line at the top of the variables list Note When defining TLP variables you need to set the variables grid to the line editing mode To switch editing modes gt Directly above the grid click El DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 131 Resizing Columns You can resize columns or rows To resize a column or row 1 Click and hold a cell header divider Hame Alias Type Init value BOOL jO 2 Drag and drop it as required drag to the left in the above example to shrink the Name column Selecting Rows and Elements You can select either rows or individual cells in the grid depending on the selected editing mode To select rows gt While in the Line editing mode click on the row gt While in the Grid editing mode click the left most edge of the row To select items in the grid While in the Line editing mode you can select one or more items in the grid 1 To select a single item click the item 2 To select more than one consecutive item click the first it
356. or consumed variables However it is highly recommended to declare consumed variables with read only attribute in order to avoid conflicts between Binding and execution of POUs DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 67 This behavior is applied in both HSD and ETCP Binding drivers This behavior may change when using other network drivers implemented according to different conventions Binding error variables Binding error variables enable the management of binding errors at the consumer resource level one error variable for one consumer resource for each resource that produces to this resource The virtual machine gives specific values to these error variables Note DS800 does not support producer error variables Example Production errors The variable A of the R1 resource represents the producer error variable for all binding links starting from R1 and using the HSD driver in the example only link from R1 to R3 The variable B of the R1 resource represents the producer error variable for all all binding links starting from R1 and using the ETCP network links from R1 to R4 and from R1 to R5 Consumption errors The variable F of the R5 resource represents the consumer error variable for the unique binding link that comes from R1 and using ETOP The variable G of the R5 resource represents the consumer error variable for the unique binding link that comes from R2 and using ETCP Depending on the drive
357. or individual FB and LD programs and function blocks before building You can choose to show or hide the output display values To start Debug mode You can start Debug mode from the link architecture view hardware architecture view or from a language editor gt From the Debug menu choose Debug Target or click cal on the Standard toolbar To start Simulation mode You can start Simulation mode from the link architecture view hardware architecture view or from a language editor gt From the Debug menu choose Simulation or click on the Standard toolbar To show or hide output values You can choose to display the values of non boolean outputs in the FBD and LD editors F gt From the Tools menu choose Show Hide Output Values or click Pal on the Debug toolbar To stop Debug or Simulation mode gt From the Debug menu choose Stop Debug Simulation Or gt On the Debug toolbar click 6 296 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Start Stop a Resource The Start command on the Debug menu enables you to start a resource which has been stopped It launches the DS800 virtual machine on the RAS device system and the resource is executed The resource code must be available on the RAS device system To stop the execution of a resource and kill the corresponding virtual machine gt From the Debug menu choose Stop Or gt On the Debug toolbar click x To stop all resources of the project gt
358. or some changes made to bindings no warning message appears during compilation and modifications are not taken into account by the target at online change e Resource properties for some changes made to other options no warning message appears and the modification is not taken into account by the target at on line change During compilation changes that are not allowed are detected result in the generation of warning outputs Online changes are denied The target also does some extra checks However this function should be used with care DS800 Development Suite may not detect all possible conflicts generated by user defined operations as a result of these online changes Operations Modifying a running resource consists of the following operations 1 Modifying the resource source code on the Workbench 2 Generating the new resource code 3 Downloading the new resource code using Online change download command on the Debug menu instead of download 4 Switching from the old resource code to the new one in between PLC execution cycles using the Online change update command on the Debug menu This procedure guarantees that the RAS device Target always has a complete and reliable running resource and enables you to control the timing of the sample operations in a very safe and efficient way It also enables the user to modify the project when required Regardless to the process itself the Online Change is essentially the same a
359. ose without the express written permission of Emerson Process Management 2002 2008 Remote Automation Solutions division of Emerson Process Management All rights reserved Product or company names included in these pages are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders All logos and links used in this guide are to the best of our knowledge included with the permission of the owner if this is not the case please let us know immediately Any changes made to documentation issued by Emerson Process Management without prior permission of Emerson Process Management in writing will void any responsibilities and liabilities normally associated with its contents 21080227ENGFM70W WP70HC13 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Copyright 661
360. ou can customize the colors and fonts for the following items e For the dictionary you can set the font and the colors used for text scope and instances e For the ST and IL editors you can set the font and the colors used for background and text basic syntax e For the FBD editor you can set the font and the colors used for background text connection and element outline lines line shadows and selected elements as well as the fill for main elements e For the LD FC and SFC editors you can set the font and the colors used for background and text as well as the fill for main elements e For the FBD and LD editors you can set the color for comments and for Boolean values TRUE and FALSE displayed while in debug mode You can also set the colors for resource data links used with bindings You can set the following working preferences e The number of recent project files to display in the File menu e Reload the last project at startup e Always prompt before saving changes to the project To customize colors and fonts Resetting the default for an item restores the colors and fonts to those when the Workbench was installed 1 From the Options menu choose Customize 26 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual x Colors and Fonts Preferences Font Dictionary Scope color Meir MS Caesa Dictionary Instance color ST editor IL editor Size E Bold FED editor Lines in FBD editor Shadows in FBD ed
361. ounter Cycle counter Kernel variable binding producing error production error Not supported in DS800 Kernel variable binding consuming error consumption error Programmed cycle time Current cycle time Maximum cycle time since last start Number of cycle overflows DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Variable Name Type Read Write Description __SYSVA RESMODE SINT Read Resource execution mode Possible modes are 1 Fatal error 0 No resource available 1 Stored resource available NOT USED CMG 2 Ready to run 3 Run in real time 4 Run in cycle by cycle 5 Run with SFC breakpoint encountered 7 Stopped in stepping mode SYSVA CCEXEC BOOL Write Execute one cycle when application is in cycle to cycle mode __ SYSVA_WNGCMPTNM STRING Read Warning component name __ SYSVA_WNGCMD SINT Read Write Warning command Set it to 1 to get next warning _ SYSVA_WNGARG DINT Read Warning Argument _ SYSVA_WNGNUM DINT Read Warning Number Warning For the SYSVA CCEXEC system variable its use in an ST program is not significant because resources run in cycle to cycle mode Therefore programs are not executed Locked Variables Locked variables are input output and internal variables that have been locked When deleting locked variables through an online change these deleted locked variables remain displayed but are preceded by the DEL prefix To remove these variables from the list you need to unlock them You ca
362. ource will be executed by one virtual machine on the PC running the Workbench e Online mode In this case each resource is executed by one DS800 Development Suite virtual machine on the real platform A download operation is required to download the code of each resource to the corresponding platform For details on downloads see page 293 Note To enable the debugging of a Project you must first build it using the Build Project command For details on building projects and resources see page 347 Before simulating a resource the code for the simulation has to be generated for each resource By default this option is checked in a resource s compilation options For details on compilation options see page 55 When switching an application to Debug mode the Workbench verifies the coherency between the current resource definitions and the resources compiled code The Workbench also verifies the coherency between all versions of the resource code You can access version information for a resource While in debug mode the security state of unlocked resources and resources having no access control switches to read only mode The security state of unlocked POUs and POUs having no access control also switches to read only mode Locked resources and locked POUs remain locked To test a resource online its TIC code must be produced and downloaded to the target system otherwise the corresponding virtual machine may have been generat
363. ource window hierarchy 2 From the Insert menu choose Add Child SFC 102 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Changing Hierarchy Level You can promote or demote child SFC FC POUs depending on their relative position in the hierarchy To change the level of an SFC FC POU 1 Select the SFC FC POU 2 Do one of the following From the Edit menu choose Move to lower Level or Move to upper Level From the Main toolbar click gt to move the program to a lower level or to move it to the upper level Example Consider the following two SFC POUs Sequential Function Chart SFC Sequential Function Chart SFC Selecting the second SFC POU and moving it down a level would produce Sequential Function Chart SFC Child Sequential Function Chart SFC DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 103 Selecting the Child SFC POU and moving it up a level would result in i Sequential Function Chart SFC Sequential Function Chart SFC Controlling Access to POUs You can control access to user defined POUs using a password When you set a project with the read only access control the resources and POUs making up the project are also set to the read only mode except for those having individual access control For instance a POU having its own password remains locked and cannot be viewed without entering its password When moving or copying a POU using its resources password the POU retains this p
364. pace is a tree like hierarchical structure of either variables parameters types or defined words The right side of the workspace displays a grid like table Titlebar ew S300 FermDemo Dictionary ariables ye Menu Bar Fe File Edit Debug Tools Options Window Help x Toolbars ry edt AL ed L gt Workspace Emene ee REAL vat o vaz om opervars L_fermertertemp REAL _ va om Sl a croup fermenter ph RE blower eoo het eo C mosses eo O amoria o vitamins eo o acd o wa o o Statue Bar Admin Administrator NLM 5 126 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Variables Tree The branches provide different ways to access the variables of each resource Top Level mem Resources Variable Group Grid displays only variables in that group Any Grou aoe All Variables Grid contains all variables in the resource Global Variables Grid contains all global variables Programs Grid contains global variables and variables local to the program Functions Grid contains global variable and variables local to the function g m m E Note When the cursor is positioned over an item the full name and comments are displayed in the ToolTip DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 127 128 Parameters Tree parameters in the corresponding grid im Top Level T The branches in each resource show all functions and function blocks in order to
365. plementation See STRING See Access Method Single character put at the end of an IL operation keyword which modifies the meaning of the operation The means of communication between configurations and their clients C code which makes the interface between the Target network layer and the network SFC Action it is a list of statements executed at each Target cycle when the corresponding Step SFC is active Original Equipment Manufacturer Parameters attached to an IO device or an I O Complex Device A parameter is characterized by a type An OEM parameter is defined by the designer of the Device It can be a constant or a variable parameter entered by the user during the I O connection Variable or constant expression processed by an elementary IL instruction Basic instruction of the IL language An operation or operator is generally associated to an operand in an instruction Basic logical operation such as arithmetic boolean comparator and data conversion Direction of a variable or a device An output variable is connected to an output channel of an output Device DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Glossary 625 Output Parameter Overflow Parameter POU Parent Program PLC POU Power Rail Producer Group Program Project Project Updater PROPI Pulse Action Qualifier 626 Output argument of a function or function block These parameters can only be written by a function or f
366. ppears 2 Do one of the following If you are using a template load the template In the browser check the data fields to export To create a template using the selected fields in the Export Templates section click Save 3 Click Set File to locate the file xls or cvs format to which to export the data then click Open 4 Select the resource from which to export the fields You can also select all resources 5 Click Export The defined field data is stored in the specified file DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 95 POUs Program Organization Units A POU Program Organization Unit is a set of instructions written in one of the following languages SFC FC IL ST FBD and LD POUs can be programs functions or function blocks You can perform many tasks when managing POUs e Creating POUs e Manipulating POUs e Creating FC Sub programs e Creating SFC Child POUs e Changing Hierarchy Level e Controlling Access to POUs Programs Programs constitute the target Cycle Programs are also known as POUs POUs defined as Programs are executed on the Target system respecting the order shown in the Program section You need to respect the hierarchy of programs within resources Available graphical programming languages are Sequential Function Chart Flow Chart Functional Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Available literal programming languages are Structured Text and Instruction List The language of each
367. presents for each executed cycle e The maximum number of transitions that can be valid That is to say transitions with at least one of their previous steps being active 60 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual A simpler but more approximate definition 1s e The maximum number of steps that can be active e The maximum number of actions that can be executed Here an action refers to an N P1 or PO action linked to a step If the available memory is not enough at a specific moment e If the target is generated with check mode ITGTDEF SFCEVOCHECK defined in dsysOdef h The target kernel generates a warning to signal an SFC token moving error or an action execution error and the resource is set in ERROR mode i e cycles are no longer executed Otherwise kernel behavior may be unpredictable Memory Size for Online Changes The memory size for online changes defines the amount of memory that is reserved on the PLC for managing online changes e Code Size the amount of memory reserved for code sequence changes e User Variable Size the amount of memory reserved for adding variables data When generating symbol monitoring information for a POU the same amount of memory is also reserved for the POU When performing downloads and online changes parts of the User Variable Size memory space is used to store project data such as variables values This memory space becomes free when you clean the project DS800 Development Suite
368. program may appear several times in the father chart A Flow Chart sub program call represents the complete execution of the sub chart The father chart execution is suspended during the child chart is performed The sub program calling Blocks must follow the same Connection rules as the ones defined for an action FC I O Specific Actions An I O specific action symbol represents actions to be performed As other actions an I O specific action is identified by a number and a name The same semantic is used on standard actions and I O specific actions The aim of I O specific actions is only to make the chart more readable and to give focus on non portable parts of the chart Using I O specific actions is an optional feature The drawing of an I O Specific Action symbol is nn Mame I O specific actions have exactly the same behavior as standard actions This covers their properties ST LD or IL programming and connection rules DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 423 FC Connectors Connectors are used to represent a link between two points of the diagram without drawing it A Connector is represented as a circle and is connected to the source of the flow The drawing of the Connector is completed on the appropriate side depending on the direction of the data flow by the identification of the target point generally the name of the target symbol Below is the standard drawing of a connector nn Name A Conn
369. project or configuration you need to recompile the entire project Before using a retrieved resource or POU you need to recompile the resource DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 359 Deleting or renaming previously checked in Workbench elements detaches these from their history in the control database For instance before retrieving any part of a deleted resource s history you need to recreate a new instance of the resource having the same name When performing a check in individual elements are placed in four file types within the control database For example a project is split into a project file a configuration file for each configuration a resource file for each resource and a POU file for each POU The project file contains a list calling its configurations resources and POUs The information retained in each type of file varies Element Type Retained in Control Database File POU POU properties local variables symbols and advanced options definitions as well as a list of contained child POUs Resource Resource properties global variables internal external bindings I O devices variable groups and advanced options definitions as well as a list of contained POUs Configuration Configuration settings network connections and advanced options definitions as well as a list of contained resources Project Project settings types and advanced options definitions as well as a list of contained configurations and reso
370. r Workbench elements projects configurations resources and POUs Variables data exports Workbench elements projects configurations resources and POUs or variables data accesses the Document Generator leaves the Workbench Edit Open Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Delete Find Replace in POUs Select All Properties Move to lower level Move to upper level Alt N Ctrl Z Ctrl Y Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V DEL Ctrl F Ctrl A opens the item selected from a resource This option is only available in the link architecture view cancels the last action restores the last cancelled action removes the selected item and places it on clipboard takes a copy of the selected item and places it on the clipboard For the link architecture view this option appears as Copy Program where it copies an entire selected program inserts the contents of the clipboard into the selected item removes the selected item from the selected item finds and replaces text in a project a configuration a resource or a POU selects all items in the active view accesses the properties for the selected item sets the selected FC or SFC program as a sub program of the next program in the resource This option is only available in the link architecture view sets the selected FC or SFC program as a parent program of the previous program in the resource This option is only available in the link ar
371. r used the error variables can take different values with different meanings 68 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Warning Once the error variable is set to a non zero value it has to be reset to 0 by user or by Programs To test globally that there is a binding error you can test the value of the following system variables e SYSVA KVBPERR for a production error It is a Boolean variable If it is true it means there is a production error DS800 does not support the SYSVA KVBPERR system variable e SYSVA KVBCERR for a consumption error It is a Boolean variable If it is true it means there is a consumption error For HSD To test values of one binding error variable you should create the following defined words in the dictionary of your project The O value in the error variable indicates there is no error ISA HSD KVB ER MUTEX 1 An error occurred with semaphore management ISA HSD KVB ER SPACE 2 An error occurred with memory space access ISA HSD KVB ER NOKERNEL 3 The bound producer is stopped not running This error happens only for consumer resources ISA HSD KVB ER TIMEOUT 4 Variable was not refreshed within the maximum time allowed ValidityTime This error happens only for consumer resources ISA HSD KVB ER BAD CRC 5 Producer and consumer have different CRC ISA HSD KVB ER INTERNAL 6 Internal error DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 69 For ETCP To test values of binding error
372. ram with function call for transitions Condition name 412 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual FuncCondtion ST Code with Function call Note The syntax of Function call for LD and IL is given in the corresponding language section Calling Function Blocks from a Transition It is not recommended to call a Function Block in an SFC conditionfor the following reasons e A Function Block should be called at each Cycle typically in a cyclic Program For example counting blocks make incremental operation at each Cycle Trigger Blocks need to store value of a Boolean at each Cycle to test rising or falling edges e An SFC condition is evaluated only when all its preceding Steps are active not at each Cycle DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 413 SFC Dynamic Behavior The dynamic behaviors of the SFC language are Initial situation The Initial Situation is characterized by the Initial Steps which are by definition in the active state at the beginning of the operation At least one Initial Step must be present in each SFC Program Clearing of a transition A Transition is either enabled or disabled It is said to be enabled when all immediately preceding Steps linked to its corresponding Transition symbol are active otherwise it is disabled A Transition cannot be cleared unless e itis enabled and e the associated Transition condition is TRUE Changing of state of Active Steps The clearin
373. rammed in LD wesc eae ee ee 411 Condition Programmed in IL ccc eccccccecceeeecccceeeeeeeeeeeessessssssseeaeees 411 Calling Functions from a TramsitiOn cccccccccccccccceeeeeeessssssssssssseeeeaes 412 Calling Function Blocks from a Transition c ccccccccsssessseeeeeeeseseees 413 SEC Dynamic BEDAVO ance A r 414 SFC Prograni Hierarchy soinn gan onn E E ENE 415 PC Lam Cua Eeo A A 417 FC Basic Components yrccrcecsassceasvaidacoctesacewesadspatien deere teoh aaiae irie nanai 417 FE BEGIN orrian n A A E 418 FOEND eaa E TAAT TOE 418 FC FloW LiNE S daronnisnnn e E saw ae 419 PSSA CUO MS sz sciaseaeekectonce don sasmext acter aiiadessuaaieus AE N 420 Pies CONG OMS arenaen A as geeaad Rauase ean 420 Other FCC Omip Omens orearen A N EA 422 FC UD STO CLAIM marier aes catid duis dade cee caneoeant deaestdemareaa nents 422 FETO Specie A CUONS uosis otan o E e E E 423 FE OMMECTONS i A AE 424 PC OMNI CLIN aena a ON 424 FC Complex Structure Examples naurun a a 425 FC Dynamic Bena v1OF scssi oa eai 426 FECC hecki noanoa a a cantar seatasa eaaecaad dee teas 426 PC ANUS S nena E S 427 FBD LINS UAC Cheats opted AN E a A wen Mate sane 429 FBD Diagram Main Format cccccccccccccccccccececcesseseseessessscaeaaeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 429 RETURN Starmen esei sanitation ode uiaeaitoam dean cnn yseaieenasite 431 aa S and Lapel zeae scores dat tahoe NN 431 Boolean NE Calon sues cate sara we as cps th ors star the een N 433 Calling Functions and
374. ration level Configl Resourcel VarDint DINT vdinx 0 1 5 Free Global Internal No dint var NOoO No 0 0 No 0 No 0 No 0 No 0 0 No 0 00 00 01 000 No O No 0 No No No 0 No No No 100 10000 Yes The data for the second variable Config1 Resourcel VarDint 4 rrrrrrrrrrr NO NO NO NOy NO NOo NO 00 00 01 000 No No No No No No No yes 100 10000 Yes The data for the third variable Config1 Resourcel VarDint 1 rrrrrrrrrr NO YES 0 0 Yes 90 Yes 80 ples 70 Yes 60 0 No 1 00 00 01 000 No0o 2 No 1 Yes No Yes 0 Yes No yes 100 10000 Yes To import variables data 1 From the Tools menu choose Import Variables The Import Type window appears 94 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual 2 Do one of the following steps To add the imported data to the Workbench project s database click Append To replace the contents of the Workbench project s database with the imported data click Replace Warning When replacing the Workbench deletes all existing variables for the given resource before importing the data When appending the Workbench adds all new variables and inquires about replacing existing variables for the given resource The Import window appears 3 Click Set File to locate the file to import then click Open The contents of the selected file are displayed in the browser To export variables data 1 From the Tools menu choose Export Variables The Export window a
375. rce created in the project The columns of the variables grid are Column Name Alias Group Type Dimension Attribute Scope Direction Init value Wiring Comment Retain Address 142 Details Variable name limited to 128 characters conforming to the IEC 61131 standard Any name Used in LD Editor Group name or None BOOL SINT USINT BYTE INT UINT WORD DINT UDINT DWORD LINT ULINT LWORD REAL LREAL TIME DATE STRING Array Types Structure Types Function Blocks See Glossary if Type is STRING this represents the string length max 255 characters For example 1 4 1 7 See Glossary For example READ ONLY See Glossary Global or local to a program or function see Glossary of I O Wiring Input Output or Internal Numeric or Textual See Glossary Read only cell generated by the I O Wiring tool Uses syntax of Directly Represented Variable User comments Free format Yes or No See Glossary and Resource Settings Properties Hexadecimal value in the range 1 to FFFF DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Parameters Grid The Parameters grid defines the interface of the functions and function blocks created in the project resources The columns for parameters are Column Name Short Name Type Dimension Direction Comment Details Parameter name Limited to a maximum of 128 characters and must conform to the IEC 61131 Standard Short name used i
376. rces between configurations creating networks connecting configurations and networks defining configuration connection properties defining resource network properties setting up I O wiring To switch to the hardware architecture view e From the Window menu choose project_name Hardware Architecture DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 109 Configurations A configuration represents a hardware definition M Configi E Main send info to R2 a 2 Test get info from Al When creating a new project a default configuration is automatically created Subsequent configurations must be manually inserted You can resize configuration windows by placing the cursor over an edge or corner until it shows double arrows and dragging M Configi E Main send info to R2 2 Test get info from Al Creating Configurations You can create configurations using the main menu or a contextual menu accessed by right clicking within the workspace Following the creation of a configuration the Configuration Properties dialog box automatically appears where you attach it to a target Choosing a target leads to the accessibility of network I O devices and RAS device functions and function blocks supported by this target To create a configuration 1 Switch to hardware architecture View Eal 2 From the Insert menu choose Configuration An empty configuration is created using a default name then the Conf
377. re Board number and Slot number Board number is always set to 1 and the Slot number refers to the slot in the RAS device housing in which the DO module resides The I O module wiring in DS800 software is NOT self identifying as it is in ROCLINK 800 software Before wiring each variable must be defined in the Dictionary View Variables Grid Select the appropriate variable from the unwired variables list The Name should identify the I O module The direction can be set 3 ways If defined as I Input then the variable will have to be wired to an Input module if defined as O Output then the variable will have to be wired to an Output module or if defined as Internal then it can not be wired to a ROC I O module The Attribute should be R read for Inputs W write for Outputs or Free for Inputs or Outputs that will be used as Inputs in other locations in the algorithm 164 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Multi Variable Sensor Input 6 Point This Wiring is set in the I O Wiring View The three channels refer to the three points received from the MVS Sensor e Differential Pressure DP e Static Pressure SP e Temperature For more information on these points refer to the ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software User Manual The parameters are Board number Slot number and Point number Board number is always set to 1 The Slot number refers to the slot in the RAS device housing in which the MVS module resides The Point numb
378. re building it e When the initial value of an existing variable is changed no warning message appears but the modification is not taken into account by the target at online change stage If changes have been saved the new initial value take effect at the next Stop Start Function Block Instances Each instance of IEC 61131 or RAS device written function corresponds to data stored in DS800 Development Suite virtual machine real time database You cannot add new automatic instances of IEC 61131 function blocks or of standard C function blocks with or without initial values To enable online changes you need to work with function block instances declared in the Dictionary You cannot add any user RAS device Function Blocks instances Compiler Allocated Hidden Variables The compiler generates hidden temporary variables to solve complex expressions The compiler forces a minimum number of temporary variables to be allocated for each program even if not used for compiling the first version of the resource As long as a new compiling of the resource gives a number of allocated temporary variables lower than this minimum the online change will be possible 330 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual I O Devices Since the I O system is very open required modifications should be implemented by an integrator using specific features of the corresponding hardware For simple or complex I O devices when supported by the driv
379. red for the current POU accesses the program description prints the current POU leaves the language editor cancels the last action restores the last cancelled action removes the selected item and places it on clipboard takes a copy of the selected item and places it on the clipboard inserts the contents of the clipboard into the selected item removes the selected item finds and replaces text in a project a configuration a resource or a POU jumps to the indicated element number renumbers all elements in the chart in sequential order opens the level 2 programming for an element DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Edit Edit Level 2 in Separate Ctrl Enter opens the level 2 programming for Continued Window Insert Set Identifier Ctrl I Insert New Rung Ctrl R Change Yes No Direction Tools Browser Ctrl B Debug Debug Alt F6 Simulation Alt F7 Debug FB F11 Options Set Level 2 Language Layout Customize Ctrl U Target Code Settings DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench an element in a separate window accesses the Select Variable dialog box where you can insert a variable in the current POU inserts a rung changes the direction of an IF THEN ELSE structure accesses the Cross References browser listing and localizing all instances of global variables and I Os declared in a project switches the application to debug mode switches the application to simulation mode opens a selec
380. rements for online changes 331 menu bar options for FC editor 236 for main environment 5 for multi language editor 256 for SFC editor 211 for simulator 323 MID function 542 MIN function 543 MLEN function 544 MOD function 546 modes for debugging a project 289 for editing a project 32 for edition the Dictionary 131 for resources execution 298 monitoring information generating for symbols 107 output values of FBD LD POUs 295 moving action blocks in execution order SFC elements 232 configurations 112 elements in FBD POUs 275 networks 121 POUs between sections and resources 100 resources between configurations 113 rows Dictionary grid 135 toolbars 14 multi language editor described 253 menu bar options for 256 programming languages used with the 260 selecting elements in the 273 working with FBD POUs 265 working with LD POUs 261 working with ST IL POUs 260 multiple connections in Ladder diagrams 437 multiplication operator 488 647 MUX4 function 547 MUXS8 function 549 naming conventions for defined words 392 for directly represented variables 387 for variables 385 NEG operator 512 networks creating 120 described 120 moving 121 properties for resources 62 non stored actions within steps 406 not equal operator 515 NOT operator 514 NOT MASK function 550 O ODD function 551 OEM specific options 63 online changes declared variables options for modifying using 329 function block instances modifying using
381. resource code e Print your program e Launch the Dictionary You can also enter a description to document your Program e From the File menu choose Description 214 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual SFC Elements To draw an SFC chart you simply introduce the significant components of the chart The SFC editor automatically draws most of the single lines joining two elements horizontally or vertically Lines or links can be drawn manually To place an SFC component on the chart the user has to select the type of the component in the editor toolbar and then click in the edition workspace at the desired position If the mouse button is kept depressed a ghost of the element is shown in order not to place it blindly When the symbol is placed links can be created automatically depending on the element position regarding the existing elements The editor may not accept the placement of the element For example you cannot place an element over an existing element Initial Step Every SFC program must have an Initial Step Initial steps are double bordered For information about initial steps see page 396 st le PtLst To place an Initial Step 1 On the SFC toolbar click 2 Click in the workspace at the desired position DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 215 Step Steps are given sequentially numbered default names e g S1 S3 S5 For information about steps see page 396 To place a St
382. rforming online changes you can choose to update a running resource at the time of download or at a later time However online changes should be used with care DS800 Development Suite may not detect all possible conflicts generated by user defined operations as a result of these online changes To perform an online change gt From the Debug menu choose Online Change Download then choose the desired option Code Sequences A sequence of code is a complete set of ST IL LD FBD 61131 or FBD 61499 instructions executed in a row In acyclic program a code sequence is the entire list of instructions written in the program In an SFC or FC program a code sequence is the level 2 programming of one step action or transition test An online change consists in replacing one or more code sequences without stopping the PLC execution cycle Therefore you cannot add delete or rename any POUs Note that in such a case no compiler warning is generated and the changes will be denied at download step Particular case of SFC Since the control of SFC tokens is very critical you cannot modify an SFC structure or add renumber or remove a step or transition The switch occurs between two cycles e In the case of a step that was already active if the new code of the step contains non stored boolean or SFC child actions or P1 actions then such actions are not updated Afterwards when the step becomes inactive the Boolean is reset the
383. riable groups from within the link architecture view You can rearrange the order of defined variable groups by dragging and dropping within the variable groups section of a resource window The group order affects the printing order To create a new variable group 1 From the Window menu choose project_name Link Architecture The link architecture view appears displaying all resources and data links defined for a project 2 Select a resource 3 From the Insert menu choose Add Variable Group Opening Variable Groups Opening a variable group opens the Dictionary with the grid showing variables of that group You open variable groups from within the link architecture view For information on the Dictionary see page 125 To open a variable group from the link architecture view 1 Select a group DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 91 2 Do one of the following steps From the Edit menu choose Open Within a resource window double click on the required variable group name Select a group name then press Enter To open a variable group from the Dictionary view 1 Select the Variables Tree 2 Double click the resource name to which the group belongs 3 Click on the variable group name The grid displays the variables for that particular group 92 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Importing or Exporting Variables You can choose to import or export variables data such as hundreds of trends alarms
384. rity operations on the variables operated on by sequential programs before sending values to output devices Child SFC POUs Any SFC POU may control other SFC POUs Such low level units are called child SFC A child SFC POU is a parallel unit that can be started killed frozen or restarted by its parent The parent POU and child POU must both be described with the SFC language A child SFC POU may have local variables When a parent POU starts a child SFC it puts an SFC token activates into each initial step of the child This command is described with the GSTART statement or with the name of the child with the S qualifier When a parent POU kills a child SFC it clears all the tokens existing in the steps of the child Such a command is described with the GKILL statement or with the name of the child and the R qualifier When a father POU starts a child the father continues its execution When a parent POU freezes a child SFC it clears all the tokens existing in the child and keeps their position in memory Such a command 1s described with the GFREEZE statement When a parent POU restarts a frozen child SFC it restores all the tokens cleared when the child was frozen Such a command is described with the GRST statement Child SFC function block instances as their SFC function block fathers have a maximum number of tokens unlike SFC programs whose dynamic behavior limits are set at the resource level You specify the tokens limit for
385. rned to the calling Operation ends the current IL program If the IL sequence is a program Allowed CN modifiers Operand none Example the following example tests the value of an integer selector 0 or 1 or 2 to set one from 3 output Booleans Test is equal to 0 is made with the JMPC operator JMPex LD selector ANY TO BOOL JMPC testi LD true ST boo RET testi LD selector SUB 1 ANY TO BOOL JMPC test2 LD true ST bol LD 1 RET test2 RETNC selector is 0 or 1 or 2 conversion to Boolean if selector 0 then boo true end return 0 decrease selector selector is now 0 or 1 conversion to Boolean if selector 0 then bol true load real selector value end return 1 last possibility returns if the selector has DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 481 ST bo2 bo2 true LD 2 load real selector value end return 2 Operator Operation executes a delayed operation the delayed operation was notified by Allowed none modifiers Operand none Example The following program interleaves delayed operations res al a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 Delayed LD al result al ADD a2 delayed ADD result a2 MUL a3 delayed MUL result a3 SUB a4 result a3 a4 execute delayed MUL result a2 a3 a4 MUL a5 resu
386. rom the contextual menu choose Load Spy List Forcing the Value of a Spy List Variable You can force 1 e change the value of a variable in the spy list To force the value of a spy list variable 1 Double click the Value cell of the variable 2 Enter an new value DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 319 Simulate a Panel of I Os You can simulate a panel of I Os 1 e display the values of inputs and outputs defined for a project in their I O devices When testing a project in simulation mode the Simulator I O Panel Simulation is automatically launched The Simulator is automatically closed when the test mode is stopped You can perform the following tasks from the Simulator Opening and closing I O device windows Forcing the values of input device channels The following example shows the Simulator displaying two I O devices for the Project3 project 320 1 0 Panel Simulation PROJECT3 jy 5 x File View Options Window Help Fa FSlPs ie a S Se GG FM CONFIG AS Man Sf SimInBoo ll USERPANEL AO SimOukString FMM CONFIG EMM Leap 0 Sim OutBoo 2 n 5 CONFIGS P oon raise EMM FLASH A O SimOutBoo foozjOuTS FALSE To display the Simulator While the application runs in Test mode in the Windows click 1o Panel si task bar DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To open and close I O device windows You can choose to open individual I O devices or all I O de
387. rom within the Binding list window You can also delete links from the link architecture view Note Deleting a resource link also deletes the variable bindings using it To delete a resource link from the Binding List window 1 Inthe Resource binding grid select the grid cell holding the resource link to delete 2 Do one of the following From the Binding List window s toolbar click a Press Delete The grid cell appears blank To delete a resource link from the link architecture view 1 Inthe link architecture view click on the resource link The selected data link appears hightlighted 4 Main send info to moim iF By Parameters a Variable Groups EH By Programs os l mL Functions 2 Test get info from Rio H EH By Variable Groups EH By Programs R poh Functions 2 Do one ofthe following From the Edit menu choose Delete Press Delete 76 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Viewing the Internal Bindings Defined for Resources You can view all producing variable bindings or all consuming variables defined for a resource at the same time You can also choose to view all bindings defined for all resources 1 e the entire project However when viewing bindings you cannot edit their definitions To view the producing variable bindings for a resource gt In the first column of the Resource binding grid click the corresponding resource number To view the
388. rrupted by encountering a breakpoint You can execute one of two types of steps e Step executes the current line of code or rung then steps to the next line or rung e Step into executes the current line of code or rung then steps into the next line of code or rung When the next line includes a call to a function stepping continues in the called function then returns to the next line of code or rung in the POU When a resource holds POUs for which debug information is generated stepping is also available while the resource is in either the STOP BREAK or ERROR state However in these states stepping jumps to the first line or rung of the first POU for which debug information is generated When stepping in POUs you can locate the current step from within any POU 302 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To step to the next line of code or rung 1 Select the POU to step in 2 From the Debug toolbar click al l The POU executes the current line of code or rung then steps to the next one To step into the next line of code or rung 1 Select the POU to step in _ il 2 From the Debug toolbar click The POU executes the current line of code or rung then steps into the next one and stepping continues in any called function before returning to the next line of the POU To locate the current step in a resource 91 gt From the Debug toolbar click Set Cycle Time While in debug mode you can change the c
389. rs reals times dates or strings Note The equality test on a TIME variable is not recommended for testing output of TIME blocks such as TON TP TOF BLINK and for testing StepName t in SFC chart Example FBD example with Greater or Equal to Operators ST Equivalence aresult 10 gt 25 aresult is FALSE mresult ab gt ab mresult is TRUE DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 507 IL equivalence LD 10 GE 25 ST aresult LD ab GE ab ST mresult Greater Than Arguments IN1 SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING Both inputs must have the same type IN2 SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING Q BOOL TRUE if IN1 gt IN2 Description Test if one value is GREATER THAN another one on integers reals times dates or strings 508 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Example FBD example with Greater than Operators ST Equivalence aresult CLO 25 5 mresult ab IL equivalence LD GT ST LD GT ST 10 25 aresult lab la mresult gt bey aresult is FALSE mresult is TRUE DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 509 Less Than or Equal Arguments INI SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING Both inputs must have the same type IN2 SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING The TIME input only applies to the ST and IL languages Q BOOL TRUE if IN1 lt IN2 Description Te
390. rt Elek e From the Edit menu choose Renumber or click on the SFC toolbar DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 233 FC Editor a The FC Flow Chart editor is launched automatically when an FC program is edited from the Workbench Note Before creating new programs you need to close the Dictionary To subsequently open another program from the FC editor e From the File menu choose Open CTRL O or click on the Standard toolbar Appearance Title Bar Flow Chart Editor 1 Main MyProgFC oj xj BS File Edit Tools Debug Options Window Help z la x Menu Bar e Fl lt gt M S 8 h e Toolbar X E Ft gt F5 p we nee e a re Ti eal cai ge m fro B Workspace Zoom100 O O m 4 Status Bar DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 235 Menu Bar Some options are available as keyboard commands File Edit 236 Open Close Save Build Program Stop Build Program Dictionary Description Print Exit Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Delete Find Replace in POUs Go to Renumber Edit Level 2 Ctrl O Altt F4 Ctrl S Alt F3 Ctrl D Ctrl K Ctrl P Ctri Q Ctrl Z Ctrl Y Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V DEL Ctrl F Ctrl G Enter opens an existing POU closes the POU saves the current POU builds the code for the current POU stops the build in progress for the current POU opens the dictionary filte
391. rting an element from an uploaded source file you can choose to create an automatic backup for your project 1 In the project make sure that the configuration in which to upload the element is connected to the correct network with the correct connection parameters IP Address for ETCP 2 From the File menu choose Import then Exchange File 3 In the Import Exchange File window select the Upload from target option then click Next 4 From the list of available configurations select the configuration where the required sources are located then click Next 5 From the list of available sources select the one to upload then click Next 6 When the upload is complete click Next 46 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual T 8 From the contents of the exchange file select the element to import for resources and POUs you also need to select the import destination then click Next Import Exchange File F A x Select elements to import EL Project Binding error management EL Configi Bx Main send info to A2 E Addition simple addition HR Main simple loop call to ComplexT est i EL ComolesT est 1 E Import destination Unselect All Config r Back Cancel Assign a name to the new element that will be created Note Before importing elements you should make a back up copy of your project so that you could restore it if the resu
392. rung a e g 7 l e o DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 17 5 E O 8 x 18 Locates the current step Sets the cycle timing Sets or removes a breakpoint For LD programs only Removes breakpoints For LD programs only Shows Hides output values For FBD programs only Debugs a function block Displays the spy variable list Stops the debug simulation mode Refreshes the status of resources Clears the output window DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Window Buttons Toolbar Switches the Workbench to the Hardware Architecture view Switches the Workbench to the Link Architecture view Switches the Workbench to the Dictionary view Accesses the I O Wiring view Accesses the Binding window where you can create data links between resources and define the variable bindings using these links Accesses the External Binding list window where you can define external variable bindings between producer variables of a source resource in a given project with consumer variables of a destination resource in a different project w e E im v Accesses the cross references browser Layers Toolbar Toggles between the link architecture view and the distribution ir view Sets the project layer to display The available layers are Base Base Layer x Layer link architecture view or hardware architecture and 1499 Layer distribution view DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workb
393. s Q DINT valuel if SEL 0 value2 if SEL 1 value3 if SEL 2 value4 if SEL 3 0 for all other values of the selector Description Multiplexer with four entries selects a value between four integer values DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 547 Example FBD Program using MUX4 Function ST Equivalence range MUX4 choice 1 10 100 1000 select from 4 predefined ranges for example if choice is 1 range will be 10 IL Equivalence LD choice MUX4 1 10 100 1000 ST range 548 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Arguments SEL DINT Selector integer value must be in set 0 7 IN1 IN8 DINT Any integer values Q DINT valuel if selector 0 value if selector 1 value8 if selector 7 Q for all other values of the selector Description Multiplexer with eight entries selects a value between eight integer values DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 549 Example FBD Program using MUX8 Function range ST Equivalence range MUX8 choice 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000 5000 select from 8 predefined ranges for example if choice is 3 range will be 50 IL Equivalence LD choice MUX8 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000 5000 ST range NOT MASK not mask IH F Arguments IN DINT Musthave integer format Q DINT _ Bit to bit negation on 32 bits of IN 550 DS800 Development Suite 2
394. s resources and POUs that have been checked in repeatedly to the version source control database Each checked in version appears as a Separate entry To view the history of a project gt With the project open in the Workbench from the Tools menu choose View History then Project All previously checked in versions of the project are displayed To view the history of a configuration resource or POU You can view the history of configurations and resources from the hardware architecture view You can view the history of resources and POUs from the link architecture view You can view the history of configurations resources or POUs using the main menu or from a contextual menu available by right clicking the element 1 Inthe applicable view select the element for which to view the history 2 From the Tools menu choose View History then the respective option All previously checked in versions of the element are displayed 364 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Getting a Previous Version When viewing the history of a project configuration resource or POU you can choose to get i e retrieve a previously checked in version of the element For elements having access control you can access them upon entering a valid password Warning Since getting an element from the control database automatically updates a locally held version to the retrieved version a local element or its underlying elements containing mor
395. s version source control 363 child SFC POUs described 370 cleaning code stored on targets 336 projects and resources 348 clearing the contents of output window 24 transitions SFC 311 transitions forcing of 315 clearing VSC status 359 closing projects 36 CMP function block 578 code building rebuilding for projects 345 cleaning from targets 336 downloading to targets for resources 293 generating for resources 55 sequences of particular cases for online changes 327 stopping builds of 348 coils LD elements aligning on rungs 264 changing types of 263 inserting in FBD POUs 271 inserting in Ladder diagrams 262 collapsing grid components Dictionary grid 135 command lines opening projects 36 starting events logger 175 comments displaying or hiding for variables 279 in FC charts described 424 inserting in FBD 272 inserting in FC charts 245 inserting in literal languages 392 communications CONNECT function block 579 URCV S function block 612 USEND S function block 613 comparison operations CMP function block 578 equal operator 505 greater than operator 508 greater than or equal operator 507 less than operator 511 less than or equal operator 510 not equal operator 515 compilation options for resources 55 stopping in progress 348 compiling POUs 346 projects 345 resources projects 347 complex structures examples of Flow Chart 425 computer allocated hidden variables effect on online changes 330 conditions attached to
396. s 228 links between resources external bindings 87 producer groups external bindings 85 resource properties 54 the contents of cells and rows Dictionary grid 133 transition code SFC elements 231 editing modes for projects normal and single resource 32 for the Dictionary grid and line 131 elements moving in FBD POUs 275 resizing in FBD POUs 274 Workbench uploading from targets 46 end Flow Chart component 418 equal operator 505 error detection 59 ERROR resource state 291 ETCP network parameter 62 EVENT function block 588 events logger starting 175 execution order moving action blocks in SFC POUs 232 order showing for FBD programs 265 rules for resource cycles 376 starting and stopping for resources 297 execution modes resources cycle to cycle 299 real time 298 step by step 299 EXIT ST basic statement 466 expanding grid components Dictionary 135 exporting variables data 93 Workbench elements between projects 43 expressions in ST programs 455 EXPT function 533 extended properties resources 63 extensions ST 467 external bindings accessing the list of 81 defining 88 defining producer groups for 83 deleting 89 deleting producer groups for 85 editing 89 editing links between resources for 87 editing producer groups for 85 linking resources for 86 overview of 81 F F_ TRIG function block 588 falling edge detection contacts described 442 negative coils described 448 FBD Function Block Diagram boolean
397. s a normal stop download and start set of commands The only differences are that no variable state is lost and the switching time is very short usually 1 or 2 cycle duration During the switch no variable is modified and all internal input or output variables keep the same value before and after the resource modification During the switch no action is performed and SFC tokens are not moved 332 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Detailed operations 1 Before making any change on a running application it is highly recommended to make a copy of the current project under another name 2 Before editing any program you should edit the description of each POU that will be modified and indicate the current date and the nature of the modification to ease future program maintenance Select the POU and use the Tools Edit Description command 3 When one or more allowed changes have been made the code of the new resource must be generated on the workbench before downloading Use the Project Build Resource command 4 Use the Debug Online Change Download command 7 In the dialog box displayed check the options as desired Update and Save after download Update after download Update later The modified code is downloaded by selecting the Download button This may slightly slow down the RAS device target during transfer To save your change later once it is validated use the command Debug
398. s or hides the execution order of FBD diagrams accesses the areas layout window where you check the areas to display in the FBD editor workspace shows or hides the output values of blocks operators functions and function blocks in the FBD and LD editors while in debug or simulation mode switches the application to debug mode switches the application to simulation mode adds a selected variable to the Spy List while in Debug mode 25 7 Debug Debug FB F11 Continued Toggle Breakpoint F10 Breakpoints Real Time Cycle to Cycle Execute One Cycle Alt F10 Step Alt F8 Step Into Alt F9 Show Current Step Options Layout Customize Ctrl U Tab Setting Show Coils Contacts Target Code Settings Auto Input opens a selected function block in the language editor with its instantiation values sets or removes a breakpoint for step by step mode removes a breakpoint for step by step mode switches the application to real time mode switches the application to cycle to cycle mode executes one cycle executes the current line then steps to the next line executes the current line then steps into the next line shows the current step accesses the Layout editor where you specify which toolbars to display and the magnification of the workspace area accesses the customization properties for Workbench views and editors as well as working preferences sets the number of spaces for the Tab character
399. sary for the specific operation one or more operands separated with commas A label followed by a colon may precede the instruction If a comment is attached to the instruction it must be the last component of the line Comments always begin with and ends with Empty lines may be entered between instructions Comments may be placed on empty lines Furthermore when entering IL syntax basic coding is black while other items are displayed using color e Keywords are pink e Numbers are brown e Comments are green Example Label Operator Operand Comments Start LD IX push button ANDN MX5 command is not forbidden ST Qx2 start motor DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 473 Labels A label followed by a colon may precede the instruction A label can be put on an empty line Labels are used as operands for some operations such as jumps Labels must conform to the following naming rules e name cannot exceed 16 characters e first character must be a letter e following characters must be letters digits or character The same name cannot be used for more than one label in the same IL program A label can have the same name as a Variable Operator Modifiers The available operator modifiers are shown below The modifier character must complete the name of the operator with no blank characters between them N Boolean negation of the operand delayed operation C conditiona
400. se EEE E Ora 376 X DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual COMMON ODES a sieges tenes eee es 377 TD ANA FY DC oreore e a A E E 377 Standard JEC G11 T TYPES erien a 377 User Types Anay S sce asscccotisas anosatconaapestraasisagausGoscnaase seen deimesseaaietdotce 379 User Types SUUCUTES sir cass saesscaciiaaal cox E E 380 Constant EXPTESSTONS soenrearee l e a a S 381 Boolean Constant ExpressiOns nsis aie ewan 381 Short Integer Constant Expressions cccccccceeeeeesssssccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 381 Double Integer Constant ExpressiOns c cccssccccccececcccceeeeeeseeeeeseeeens 382 Real Constant EX pressiOns asiarren aa 382 Timer Constants Expressions 44a seansksneccnsieoceee eens 383 String Constant Expressions cccccccccccccccceseseseeesssnssseacaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 383 Variables Si casi cussed ciadzerscaadonatecccaeeanioceiaden sual seae cad es 385 R served KG y WOES ascsi sess eigeaaden erie A a E 385 Directly Represented Variables a ccsccocuianticmiacimdiaciiae catenins 387 Information on Variables v5 celsces osc gscnsseacesdoacsoneds esc tawndasaaaieensenes cen Seetoneee 389 Boolean V aniables BOOL iiss soccacies cdectcthea AON AAS 390 Short Integer Variables SINT ccccccscsessoseeeascenenerccncsecseceeseeseeees 390 Double Integer Variables DINT Jamersons a neko 390 Real Variables REAL sxcasssdoessaesadesssastesewoswesetedcenatesauieoeusesedesnaxi stereos 390 Timer Vartables TIME hevn
401. seenes 100 Creating FC SUD pro et aims sesanan a eet 102 Creatine SFC Child POU Sacsa meini R 102 Chanoine Hierarchy evel sci scn ccs a 103 Controlling AcCess 10 POUS orars a E E e 104 Generating Debug and Monitoring Information ccc cccceeeeees 107 Editing a POU Description iccscacosce vor cecosdeves devas sdaobaasaieacdenecevitaedeasoeadwes 108 Hardware Architecture View erson nici E A i 109 CONAP Ur ONS en e a A 110 Creatine Confie irationS aina A aiaeneemubieare 110 Deleting Con SuraviONns sass2scesoccyivscossasesdecenacdsssceksvn sea anntacaadoseeassteaensen 111 Movine C oni Ourations a E edness 112 IMSELUINOR CSOUPCES pitenatetasteseistecseacceue aod cealedtacese wee ae 112 Moving Resources Between Configurations cccesesesssssseeeeeeeees 113 Configuration Properties cccccceesssssssccceeeeccesecceceeeeeeeeseeessessssaaaaeeeeaeees 114 Configuration Link to ROCLINK Configuration File eee 115 Configuration Target Defimitions cccceeceeseessssccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 TakS CUACCESs OMIT Olivia sie satin ai car ac banat cinerea laid aatdentereeectieete 118 COnMOUrATON DESCHPLOM 9544 30 sccteascceads i A E E aal 119 NWO KS na a A a A 120 Creatina NEIWOTK S iea T O woes eens 120 Movino INCEWORKS niorit A AS 121 CONnECHON Soie n E E E Oe 123 Creatine Connections seina N A 123 Weletine Connections erraien e E 124 Dictionary VIe Woi enn A n 125 AD 1816 a ree nee Tee ee Tet mn mer nT aren eee n
402. ser Manual Adding I O Devices You can add simple and complex devices to the I O wiring tree Available devices for a target are displayed in the device selection list When adding complex devices the number of channels i e device size of individual simple devices making up a complex device varies depending on the definition of the complex device in the target To add an I O device 1 From the Edit menu choose Add I O Device or click F on the I O Wiring toolbar The Device Selection dialog box appears Device Selection i a a x Target ROCS0S ROCS0S MWS Module Mult Varable Sensor Ch DF Chl 5F Ch2 T gt ROCEOS DOModule_5Pt 5 Pt Discrete Output ROCSOS AlModule_4Pt 4 Pt Analog Input ROCSDS DI Module_8Pt 8 Pt Discrete Input gt ROCEO AOModule_4Pt 4 Pt Analog Output ROCBOS PiModule_2Pt 2 Pt Pulse Input gt ROCEOS SystemAlModule_5Pt 5 Pt Systema l ChO B atten Chl Charge ROCS0S ATOModule_2Pt 2Pt Resistance Thermal Detector ROCSOS TCModule SPH SPt Thermocouple Heb cose 2 Choose the device from the pull down menu 3 Change the device index and number of channels if required and available 4 Click OK DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 169 Opening Devices You can open existing devices defined for any resource of a project To open an existing device 1 From the File menu choose Open Device or click on the I O Wiring toolbar 2 Inthe Op
403. ses a default routing algorithm DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 267 Jump Fr gt Inserts a jump in the workspace A dialog box containing a list of labels to jump to is displayed Alternatively by entering a new name in the edit box then clicking OK a Jump is created to a new Label the corresponding Label symbol must then be placed in the diagram A Jump symbol must be linked to a Boolean point When this Boolean left connection is TRUE the execution of the diagram Jumps directly to the target Label Note Backward jumps may lead to a blocking of the PLC loop in some cases Label Fa ra R Inserts a label in the workspace The Jump Label dialog box is displayed to enter and create a Label name Alternatively if a Jump symbol was previously inserted and a new Label name was entered in the edit box the Label name specified when creating that Jump can be chosen from the list Labels can be placed anywhere in an FBD diagram They are used as a target for Jump instructions to change the execution order of the diagram Labels are not connected to other elements Note It is highly recommended to place Labels on the left of the diagram in order to increase diagram readability For more details about labels see page 431 268 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Return Fa iz Rer Inserts a return symbol in the workspace If the connection line to the left of the Return symbol has the Bo
404. sing STACKINT Block error management err detect _a knoledge manual model err code max err auto mode err alarm appli alarm last err ST Equivalence We suppose STACKINT1 is an instance of STACKINT Block STACKINT1 err detect acknoledge manual mode err code max err appli alarm auto mode AND NOT STACKINT1 EMPTY err_ alarm STACKINT1 OFLO last error STACKINT1 0OUT TLP_GET_DINT TLP_GET_DINT t p Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments point type t DINT Refers to point type that contains the parameter to be read logical 1 DINT Instance of specified point type parameter p DINT Parameter to get vout DINT Value of specified TLP DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 601 Description Gets parameter referenced by a TLP The specified TLP may be any numerical data type Parameter is converted to a DINT before being written to the output value TLP_GET_REAL Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments point type t logical 1 parameter p vout Description DINT DINT DINT REAL Refers to point type that contains the parameter to be read Instance of specified point type Parameter to get Value of specified TLP Gets parameter referenced by a TLP The specified TLP may be any numerical data type Parameter is converted to a REA
405. sis The Diagnosis window displays the diagnostic information for the resource Timing Timing information holds the current values of specific system variables for a selected resource The timing information is e Programmed cycle time the defined cycle time for the resource e Current cycle time the time of the last executed cycle e Maximum cycle time the longest period of time used for a cycle since the resource was started e Overflow the number of cycles having exceeded the programmed cycle time DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 307 e State the current state of the resource Possible states are RUN real time mode STOP BREAK ERROR STEPPING and STEPPING ERROR e Code the indication of whether the code has been saved on the target system For details on setting the cycle time of a resource see page 303 System Variables System variables hold the current values of all system variables for the resource You can read from or write to system variables These variables are defined in the dsysOdef h file The system variables are Variable Name Type SYSVA RESNAME STRING _ SYSVA SCANCNT DINT _ SYSVA_CYCLECNT DINT SYSVA KVBPERR BOOL SYSVA KVBCERR BOOL _ SYSVA TCYCYCTIME TIME _SYSVA_TCYCURRENT TIME SYSVA TCYMAXIMUM TIME SYSVA TCYOVERFLOW DINT 308 Read Write Read Read Read Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Read Read Description Resource name max length 255 Input scan c
406. sition then from the toolbar click 314 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Transition Clearing Forcing This debug command allows to force the clearing of a transition whether the latter is valid or not i e all previous steps are active or not Tokens are moved and actions are executed as for a usual transition clearing More precisely tokens of all predecessor steps are removed if any Tokens of all successor steps are created All PO actions linked to all predecessor steps are executed even if no token was placed All Pl S R N actions linked to all successor steps are executed The following illustrates cycles execution when clearing of a transition is forced Force cleaning Cycle samples 5a Po Actions 51 P1 5 R N Warning Clearing a transition may lead to abnormal behavior of your chart since it may create several tokens To clear a transition You can clear transitions from the Breakpoints toolbar or from the contextual menu gt Select the transition then from the toolbar click DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 315 Spying Variables While in Debug mode you can choose to spy on selected variables 1 e view the changes of values for these variables You spy on variables by adding them to a spy list To access the Spy List window You can access the Spy List window from either the link architecture hardware architecture or dictionary views as well as the language editors gt
407. source and the individual POUs For details on generating debug information see page 56 Note You can only set breakpoints for resources producing TIC code you cannot set breakpoints for resources producing C source code To set a breakpoint in an ST IL or LD POU 1 Click in the line of code or rung on which to set the breakpoint 2 On the toolbar click A breakpoint appears to the left of the line of code or rung Removing Breakpoints You can remove breakpoints set for ST IL and LD POUs for step by step mode To remove breakpoints gt To remove a breakpoint while in its POU click in the line of code or rung with the The breakpoint is removed from the line of code or rung breakpoint then click on the toolbar gt To remove a breakpoint from any POU in a resource click amp on the toolbar then select the breakpoint from the list and click Remove You can also remove all breakpoints set in all POUs of the resource by clicking Remove All DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 301 Breakpoints Ea CSTO10 ASTOI0INF IL lines CSTO10 ASTOI0INF_ST lines CSTO10RASTOI10INF_LD linet CSTO10 ASTOI10INF_LD lines CSTOIO ASTOMINF_ST lined Remove Remove all The individual or multiple breakpoints are removed from their POUSs Stepping in POUs While a resource is in the STEPPING state you can step in a POU ST IL and LD for which you generated debug information once its execution is inte
408. ss the value of the variable when the resource is executed by the Target The property of a variable indicating a short name for a variable For FBD and LD diagrams aliases indicate the parameters in functions and function blocks Set of elements of the same type referenced by one or more indexes enclosed in square brackets and separated by commas The index is an integer Examples tabi 2 or tabij 2 4 The property of a variable indicating whether a variable is read only write only or free read and write A function block having no assigned instances Automatic instances of function blocks cannot be added to a POU during online changes See also Declared Instance of a function block DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Glossary 615 Binding Binding Error Variable Boolean Bool Boolean Action Breakpoint C Function C Language Call Stack Cell CFB CFU 616 Bindings are directional links i e access paths between variables located in different resources The Workbench enables two types of bindings internal bindings and external bindings Internal bindings are between resources within the same project External bindings are between resources belonging to different projects Variables enabling the management of binding errors at the consumer resource level Basic type that can be used to define a variable a Parameter POU or a device A Boolean can be TRUE 1 or FALSE 0 SFC Action a Boolean
409. ss references these are stored in a cross references file Such a file is automatically created for each resource of a project These files eliminate the need to parse POUs each time the browser is closed and re opened When files are missing or invalid due to changes in the project messages are displayed in the output window The cross reference files are deleted when you clean a project When cross references are out of date the Fy icon appears in the browser s title bar To calculate cross references gt From the Browser s toolbar click 2 Browsing the POUs of a Project Occurrences of a selected object in the source files of an open project appear in the locations section of the browser Double clicking an occurrence opens the program directly where the object appears DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 357 Defining Search Options You can define the search options used when finding cross references The options consist of three types the global object to search for during the next scan the objects to list in the browser window and the exact set of configurations and resources in which to search for selected objects You can choose to scan the cross references for one or more resources in order to shorten calculation time The options for the global object to search for are Variables all global variables and I Os Programs program names SFC or FC names can be used in parent programs Functions all functions dec
410. stalled must be connected to the configuration through a network supported by the Debugger The standard network used by the Workbench is Ethernet If downloading a project with a single configuration then you may also choose to use the ISaRSI network In the Download window select the resources to download by clicking on their name in the list click again to unselect You can click Toggle to select or unselect a selected resource You can also choose to select all or unselect all resources Download options e Start after download indicates that the virtual machine executes the resource code upon reception DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 293 e Save after download indicates that the virtual machine saves the resource code on the configuration platform upon reception The code can be saved to a disk if the platform has one or another storage method depending on the platform and the implementation of the virtual machine To download the code of project resources At anytime during a download operation you can abort the operation by clicking Abort e From the Debug menu choose Download or click Z on the Standard Toolbar 294 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Debug Simulate You can test a project using one of two modes e Debug where you test resources online The debugger establishes the connections with remote configurations Execution errors and warnings can appear in the Output Window e Simulation
411. statement in actions 470 GKILL statement in actions 469 goto steps or transitions 227 GRST statement in actions 471 GSTART statement in actions 468 GSTATUS statement in actions 472 hierarchy of programs 415 hierarchy restrictions for programs 96 inserting initial steps 215 inserting jumps 222 inserting links 221 inserting new branches in convergences divergences 219 inserting steps 216 inserting transitions 216 linking and convergences divergences 217 main format of programs 395 menu bar options for editor 211 programming levels of editor 214 placing DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Index renaming elements 224 renumbering elements in charts 233 setting removing breakpoints for steps and transitions 311 toolbar for language editors 189 SHL function 563 short integer constant expressions 381 variables 390 showing resource links internal bindings 77 toolbars in the main environment 14 SHR function 564 SIG_GEN function block 595 signal generation BLINK function block 577 SIG_GEN function block 595 simulating a panel of I Os 320 simulation mode for debugging a project 289 starting for a project 295 simulator appearance of 322 displaying I O device window headers in the 325 manipulating the browser of the 326 menu bar options for the 323 toolbar options for the 324 SIN function 565 single convergences described 400 single divergences described 400 single resource editing mode 32 SOFT POINT READ function bl
412. stead of flow links This leads to more readable charts when too many flow links cross many elements FC Sub Program The system enables the description of the vertical structure of FC programs FC programs are organized in a hierarchy tree Each FC program can call other FC programs Such a program is called a child program of the FC program which calls them FC programs which call FC sub programs are called father programs FC programs are linked together into a main hierarchy tree using a Father Child relation Father Program Child Program A sub program symbol in a Flow Chart represents a call to a Flow Chart sub program Execution of the calling FC program is suspended till the sub program execution is complete A Flow Chart sub program is identified by a number and a name as other programs Functions or Function Blocks Below is the drawing of a Sub Program call symbol EES Two different objects of the same chart cannot have the same logical number The basic rules implied by the FC hierarchy structure are e FC programs which have no father are called main FC programs e Main FC programs are activated by the system when the application starts 422 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual e A program can have several child programs e A child of a program cannot have more than one father e A child program can be called only by its father e A program cannot call the children of one of its own children The same sub
413. stematically executed at the beginning of each run time cycle Main sequential programs at the top of the hierarchy are executed according to the SFC and FC dynamic behavior POUs of the Functions section are programs that can be called by any other program in the project These are called functions A function can call another function POUs of the Function Block section are programs that can be called by any other POU in the project Thes are called function blocks A function block section can call functions or other function blocks Main sequential programs must be described with the SFC or the FC language Cyclic programs cannot be described with the SFC language neither with the FC language Any SFC program may own one or more SFC child Any FC program can call one or more FC sub program Functions can be described with the ST LD or FBD languages and function blocks can be described with the SFC ST LD or FBD language Functions and function blocks can be called from actions or conditions of SFC or FC programs DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 369 Programs located at the beginning of the cycle before sequential programs are typically used to describe preliminary operations on input devices to build high level filtered variables Such variables are frequently used by the programs of the sequential programs Programs located at the end of the cycle after sequential programs are typically used to describe secu
414. sts if one value is LESS THAN or EQUAL TO another one on integers reals times dates or strings Note The equality test on a TIME variable is not recommended for testing output of TIME blocks such as TON TP TOF BLINK and for testing StepName t in SFC chart Example FBD example with Less or equal to Operators aresult mresult ST Equivalence aresult 10 lt 25 aresult is TRUE mresult ab lt ab mresult is TRUE 510 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual IL equivalence LD 10 LE 25 ST aresult LD ab LE ab ST mresult Less Than lt IH 1 In F Arguments IN SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING IN2 SINT DINT REAL TIME STRING Q BOOL Description Both inputs must have the same type TRUE if IN1 lt IN2 Test if one value is LESS THAN another one on integers reals times dates or strings DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 511 Example FBD example with Less than Operators result o mesut ST Equivalence aresult 10 lt 25 aresult is TRUE mresult z lt B mresult is FALSE IL equivalence LD 10 LT 25 ST aresult LD eA LT B ST mresult NEG Meg IH P Arguments IN SINT DINT REAL Input and output must have the same format Q SINT DINT REAL 512 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Description Assignment of t
415. t get info fram A1 When using a custom bitmap for configurations a copy of the bitmap is automatically placed in the configuration folder and renamed to use the configuration s name DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 115 You specify the configuration general properties in the General tab of the Configuration Properties window Configuration Properties X General Hardware Security Mame Configi Comment D Program Files ROCLINKSOO Rin Use bitmap 7 Disabled e Cancel Apply To link a configuration to a ROCLINK 800 configuration file 1 Click A 2 In the Select ROCLINK 800 Configuration File browser locate the configuration file to link 3 Click Open DS800 extracts the IP address of the RAS device target from the ROCLINK 800 configuration file and automatically creates the network connection The configuration file name and location is indicated in the Comment field 116 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Configuration Target Definitions The configuration target definition property enables you to attach a target to the configuration Changing targets for a configuration affects all resources attached to the configuration You specify the configuration target definition property in the Hardware tab of the Configuration Properties window Configuration Properties A X General Hardware Security Target The selection of the target determines e the ne
416. t Suite 2 1 User Manual ST Extensions The following statements and functions are available to control the execution of the SFC child programs They may be used inside action blocks written in ST in SFC steps GSTART starts an SFC program or function block GKILL kills an SFC program GFREEZE freezes an SFC program GRST restarts a frozen SFC program or function block GSTATUS gets current status of an SFC program Warning These functions are not in the IEC 61131standard Easy equivalents can be found for GSTART and GKILL using the following syntax in the SFC step e child name with the S qualifier equivalent to GSTART child_ name e child name with the R qualifier equivalent to GKILL child_name The following fields can be used to access the status of an SFC step or child from its father StepName x Boolean value that represents the activity of the Step StepName t time elapsed since the last activation of the step activity duration StepName represents the name of the SFC step ChildName S1 x Boolean value that represents the activity of the child ChildName Sl1 t time elapsed since the last activation of the step activity duration ChildName represents the name of the SFC child DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 467 GSTART Statement in SFC Action Name Meaning Syntax Operands Return value GSTART Starts an SFC child program or function block by placing a token into ea
417. t Tree Files of type STVILALOYFBD language FERMDEMO Operate stf MyProgF BD stf UntitledLD st Untitled L stf Untitled FEC stt E File name Cancel 206 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Finding and Replacing in POUs You can find and replace text throughout all POUs You can specify to search an entire project a configuration a resource or a POU Find Replace in POUs E 2 x Find what Find Hert eplace Search In Curent POU Main Replace All Replace with Entire Project Match whol Current Configuration Config Larz Current Resource Main w Match casam pia Searches include level 2 code of SFC and FC POUs as well as action block names of steps The Find Replace in POUs utility is not case sensitive for instance FIND is the same as FinD To find a step or transition name in an SFC chart or an action or test name in an FC chart use the Goto command in the Edit menu from the respective editor To find an item characters word or phrase Searches are performed from top to bottom and from left to right 1 From the Edit menu choose Find Replace in POUs lt Ctr1 F gt or click A on the toolbar Note While in the Dictionary view the toolbar element accesses the Dictionary grid Find Replace utility and the shortcut key for the Find Replace In POUs menu item is Ctrl Shift F 2 Enter the item to search for To perform a case sensitive search
418. t directory gt prj lt library name gt PRJlibrary MDB Three templates are available for use with libraries e LibSingleROC800 and LibSingleFB107 containing one resource in one configuration e LibMultipleROC800 containing two resources in two different configurations linked by an Ethernet network DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 281 Furthermore the target type of a library resource affects the usability of functions and function blocks throughout projects using the library Functions and function blocks can only be used in resources referring to the same target type except when they use the SIMULATOR target type When library resources use the SIMULATOR target type all of their functions and function blocks can be used in any project resource regardless of its target type Below are examples of possible combinations of resource target types Target in library Target in project Usage SIMULATOR ROC809 OK ROC809 ROC809 OK Library functions and function blocks must have unique names When they have the same names as those defined in a project in which they are used only those from the project will be recognized Furthermore you do not need to compile functions and function blocks in the library before using them in projects They are compiled in the calling project space in order to take care of the compiling options defined for the project To create a library 1 From the File menu choose New Project Library 2 Enter a name for
419. tants may be expressed with one of the following Bases Short integer constants must begin with a Prefix that identifies the Bases used Base Prefix Example DECIMAL none 19 HEXADECIMAL Il6 16 A1 OCTAL 8 8 28 BINARY 2 2 0101 0101 The underscore character _ may be used to separate groups of digits It has no particular significance other than to improve constant expression readability DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 381 Double Integer Constant Expressions Double integer constant expressions represent signed double integer 32 bit values from 2147483648 to 2147483647 Double integer constants may be expressed with one of the following Bases Double integer constants must begin with a Prefix that identifies the Bases used Base Prefix Example DECIMAL none 908 HEXADECIMAL 16 16 1A2B3C4D OCTAL OH 8 1756402 BINARY 2 2 1101_0001_0101_1101_0001_0010_1011_1001 The underscore character _ may be used to separate groups of digits It has no particular significance other than to improve constant expression readability Real Constant Expressions Real constant expressions can be written with either Decimal or Scientific representation The decimal point separates the Integer and Decimal parts The decimal point must be used to differentiate a Real constant expression from an Integer one The scientific representation uses the letter E to separate the mantissa part and the exponent
420. tate and security state of the resource e The resource name and comment 48 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual e A Windows control button to maximize or restore the resource window e A Data Link button enabling you to graphically create data links between resources The operative state of a resource is indicated by the color of the upper triangle in the resource icon Blue The resource is in editing mode Green The resource is 1n real time mode running debug mode or simulation y mode You can access the contextual menu from a resource by right clicking in its title bar Double clicking the title bar minimizes restores a resource window You can also resize resource windows by placing the cursor over an edge or corner until it shows double arrows and dragging E i Resource Ee H P Parameters cow LO Yariable Groups coe LO Programs coe LO Functions gt wo LY Function blacks Resource Window Workspace The Workspace displays a graphical representation of the various components of each resource T ia Parameters Variable Groups a P Programs DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 49 Ry Functions ka Function Blocks To expand collapse any branch of the hierarchy gt Click to collapse Note Selecting one of the components changes the menu items available on the menus of the Workbench For example if a function is selected the Insert menu includes t
421. tecture view 1s displayed You can only open one project at any given time When changes have been made to an open project you will automatically be prompted to save the changes before creating a new one DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 35 Opening and Closing Projects In the Workbench you can only open one project at any given time If changes have been made to an open project the system automatically prompts you to save changes before closing a project or opening another You can open projects in one of two project editing modes normal and single resource Project filenames are always PRJLIBRARY MDB the project directory name represents the given project name When you open a project or create a new project the hardware architecture view and the link architecture view are cleared When a project has been relocated you need to redefine its links within the Workbench before opening it When opening a project in single resource editing mode you need to select the project then choose a resource from the list of resources defined for the project In the list of resources resources appear with icons indicating their security state or non availability T Resource unavailable currently open by another user When the advanced options are installed on your computer you can choose to open a project without the advanced options features such as alarms and events trends field communications To open an existing project 1 From the Fi
422. ted 259 Multi Language Elements The language used for the Program currently edited determines the elements that can be inserted This is reflected in the menu commands and toolbar buttons e ST IL Elements e LD Elements e FBD Elements Note Arrays must be declared in the Dictionary View before inserting them in Functional Block Diagrams FBD ST IL Elements The main keywords of the ST or IL language are available in the Language toolbar When entering ST or IL syntax basic coding is black while other items are displayed using color e Keywords are pink e Numbers are brown e Comments are green Inserting a variable name can be done directly by typing it or by using the Insert Identifier command from the Edit menu To insert block instances or to get help on a block use the Insert Block command from the Edit menu 260 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual LD Elements When editing an LD POU you can place elements by using the keyboard Keyboard shortcuts are indicated on the LD toolbar Alternatively use the mouse to select the element to insert from the toolbar The element is inserted at the current position in the diagram The current position is the cell that is marked in black To attach a variable to a coil or a contact double click on it or press lt Return gt when it is selected The Select Variable dialog box is displayed You can also use the Insert identifier button on the Standard toolbar To attac
423. ted function block in the language editor with its instantiation values sets the programming language used for level 2 programming Possible languages are LD ST and IL accesses the Layout editor where you specify options such as the toolbars to display the magnification ofthe workspace area and other level 2 options accesses the customization properties for Workbench views and editors accesses the compilation options for the POU 237 Window Help 238 Cascade Tile Split Show Output Window Ctrl 4 Clear Output Window Contents Fl Search Help On About Support Info sets the different views of the project to appear in a cascading manner sets the different views of the project to appear in a tiled manner splits the workspace into two simultaneous views displays the output window below the workspace clears the contents of the output window accesses the online help not currently supported displays product and version information not currently supported DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Working with Flow Charts Flow Chart programs are created in a resource in the link architecture view of the Workbench After having opened the program you can create insert new elements in the Level 1 diagram or modify move existing elements Every Flow Chart must have a BEGIN and an END these are automatically inserted when a new Flow Chart is created from the link architecture view
424. ted item and places it on clipboard takes a copy of the selected item and places it on the clipboard inserts the contents of the clipboard into the selected item places the contents of the clipboard in a specified position removes the selected item selects all items in the active view finds and replaces text in a project a configuration a resource or a POU finds and selects matching variable names in the current POU DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Edit Continued Tools Debug Find Matching Coil Go to Line Insert Set Identifier Insert Set Block Insert Rung Change Coil Contact Type Insert Comment Browser Show Hide Execution Order Show Hide Areas Show Hide Output Values Debug Simulation Spy Selection Alt F5 Ctrl G Ctrl I Ctrl R Ctrl R Space Ctrl B Ctrl W Alt F6 Alt F7 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench finds and selects matching variable names for coils in the current POU jumps to the indicated line number accesses the Select Variable dialog box where you can insert a variable in the current POU accesses the list of all available functions and function blocks to insert in the current POU inserts a rung changes the selected coil or contact type inserts a comment above a rung in LD diagrams accesses the Cross References browser listing and localizing all instances of global variables and I Os declared in a project show
425. temporary result of first TRUNC LD 2 0891 TRUNC 570 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual ADD temporary ST result XOR _ MASK Arguments IN DINT Must have integer format MSK DINT Must have integer format Q DINT Bit to bit logical Exclusive OR between IN and MSK Description Integer exclusive OR bit to bit mask Example FBD example with XOR _ MASK Operators xor mask O prece O O Herte 16 011 ST Equivalence crce32 XOR MASK preverc nexte result XOR MASK 16 012 16 011 equals 16 003 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 571 IL equivalence LD XOR_ MASK ST LD XOR MASK ST 572 prevcerc nextc Cres2 16 012 16 011 result DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Standard Function Blocks DS800 Development Suite supports the following standard function blocks Alarm and event ALARM operations Warning These EVENT function blocks are available only on ROC800 Series devices Boolean operations SR RS R_TRIG F TRIG Communications CONNECT USEND S URCV S Comparator CMP Counters CTU CTD CTUD Database commands DBG CLR GET ERR Warning These function blocks are available only on ROC800 Series devices DBG CLR SET ERR DBG GET ERR DBG SET ERR SOFT POINT READ SOFT POINT WRITE TLP_GET DINT DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference Places a time stamped alarm in the alarm log of a device Places
426. tended Security General Target Code Settings Target fetare Help Windows NT 4 target C Generate debug information _ _ MV Code for simulation Compiler Options TIC code Structured C source code M Embed Symbol Table Embed Zip Source Resource Cancel Apply Generate Debug Information When using the step by step mode for debugging purposes you need to generate debug information for a resource and its ST IL and LD POUs For details on step by step mode see page 299 When setting up debug information you also need to specify the individual POUs for which to generate debug information Debug information includes call stack information which tracks stepping between POUs and called functions You can only generate debug information for resources producing TIC code Note The first time you choose to generate debug information for a resource the complete resource is compiled when you build the resource Subsequently when you add or remove individual POUs only those POUs are compiled when you build the project 56 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To generate debug information for ST IL and LD programs 1 To generate call stack information for use while stepping in POUs check Generate debug information 2 To generate debug information click 1 3 In the Debug Information window check individual POUs select all POUs or unselect all POUs then click
427. ter STATUS can take following values STATUS Description 0 Connection successfully completed 1 Waiting for reply 2 Too many CFB connect 3 Not ready for a new connection 4 Connect failed 5 Bad partner If the connection failed a new connection is not automatically done a rising edge must be detected on EN_C parameter Example The following is a program of Resource 3 that sends a string to Resource 4 on the same Configuration CONNECT USEND_S AL WAL REQ REQ DHE DONE EN_C4 EN_C ERR ER R4 iD ERR SEMO_ERR T aar ao PTAR RaTOR R_ID STAT SEND_STAT ie Met my sting 0 580 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual The following is the corresponding program in Resource 4 that receives the string CONNECT VAL ALS EN R EN_C3 EN_ ERR ERR STAT pos Boy Be a Poe RTO Reed 10 13 CTO D LOAD F Pir Arguments CD BOOL Counting input down counting when CD is TRUE LOAD BOOL Load command dominant CV PV when LOAD is TRUE PV DINT Programmed initial value Q BOOL Underflow TRUE when CV lt 0 CV DINT Counter result URC S NOR RC ERR ROW STAT Received Sting Warning The CTD Block does not detect the rising or falling edges of the counting input CD It must be associated with an R_ TRIG or F_ TRIG block to create a pulse counter Description Count integer from a given value down to 0 1 by 1 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 581 Example
428. ters on a serial port string empty string nbochar lt 03 WHILE nbchar lt 16 amp ComIsReady DO string string ComGetChar nochar nbchar 1 END WHILE DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 463 REPEAT Statement Name REPEAT UNTIL END REPEAT Meaning iteration structure for a group of ST statements the continue condition is evaluated AFTER any iteration Syntax REPEAT lt statement gt lt statement gt UNTIL lt Boolean_condition gt END_ REPEAT Warning Because the virtual machine is a synchronous system input variables are not refreshed during REPEAT iterations The change of state of an input variable cannot be used to describe the ending condition of a REPEAT statement Example ST program using REPEAT statement this program uses specific C functions to read characters on a serial port string empty string nbchar 2 107 IF ComIsReady THEN REPEAT string string ComGetChar nbchar lt nbchar 1 UNTIL nbchar gt 16 OR NOT ComIsReady END _ REPEAT END IF 464 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual FOR Statement Name FOR TO BY DO END FOR Meaning executes a limited number of iterations using an integer index variable Syntax FOR lt index gt lt mini gt TO lt maxi gt BY lt step gt DO lt statement gt lt statement gt END_ FOR Op
429. th between a toolbar s floating and docked states Standard Toolbar Creates a project Opens a project Saves the current project Cuts the selection and places it on the clipboard Copies the selection and places it on the clipboard Pastes the contents of the clipboard Undoes the last operation Redoes the previously undone operation Ye a o k o M a DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 15 gt 2 A 16 Moves to upper level on currently selected SFC or FC program Moves to lower level on currently selected SFC or FC program Accesses the document generator where you can print different parts of a project Builds the current project library Rebuilds the current project library Builds the current resource Builds a program Stops a build Downloads resource code to targets Switches an application to debug mode Switches an application to simulation mode Performs an Online Change Download DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Adds removes dependencies Accesses the web site Debug Toolbar The Debug toolbar is accessible when you run a project in either Debug or simulation mode Starts all stopped resources Starts a stopped resource Stops all running resources Stops a running resource Switches an application to real time mode Switches an application to cycle to cycle mode Executes one cycle Steps to the next line of code or rung Steps into the next line of code or
430. the Control Icon opens the Control Menu The Control Menu is used to position the Window or to alternate between views see Window Buttons Toolbar Window Buttons The standard window buttons appear at the right end of the menu bar DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 13 Toolbars Many toolbars performing different tasks are available for use in the hardware and link architecture views e Standard Toolbar e Debug Toolbar e Window Buttons Toolbar e Layers Toolbar e Version Source Control Toolbar e Options Toolbar e I O Wiring Toolbar While performing I O wiring tasks in the I O Wiring view the I O Wiring toolbar becomes available To show or hide toolbars You can choose to show as many toolbars as required 1 From the Options menu choose Layout The Layout editor appears 2 To show toolbars check the required toolbars then click OK 3 To hide toolbars uncheck the toolbars then click OK To move a toolbar Toolbars can be placed anywhere on the screen their position is retained until the next change 1 Point the cursor at the toolbar s title bar or main panel Do not point at the control icon or one of the window s buttons 14 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual 2 Press and hold the left mouse button 3 Drag the toolbar by moving the mouse 4 Release the mouse button Docking toolbars e Dock a toolbar to a side of the Workspace by positioning it at the Workspace s edge Switch back and for
431. the Tools menu choose Add Remove Dependencies The Add Remove Dependencies window appears 2 To add a new library to the list of dependencies a Click Add b In the file browser locate the library s PRJlibrary MDB file c Click Open 3 To remove a library from the list of dependencies a From the Dependencies list select the library to remove b Click Remove 286 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual To reestablish an invalid library path You reestablish an invalid library path for a renamed or moved library from the Add Remove Dependencies window Reestablishing a library path restores all associations between a project and library 1 From the Tools menu choose Add Remove Dependencies The Add Remove Dependencies window appears 2 From the Dependencies list select the invalid library to reestablish 3 Click Browse then locate and select the library To license a third party library project You can choose to license third party library projects while adding them as dependencies or at any other time You initiate licensing for these library projects in the Add Remove Dependencies window then complete the process in the License Manager 1 Make sure the third party library project is copied onto your disk then from the Tools menu choose Add Remove Dependencies 2 In the Add Remove Dependencies window add the third party library project to the list of dependencies a Click Add b Inthe file browser lo
432. the list displayed on the right of the title bar of the level 2 window You can set the default language for the level 2 programming from the menu by choosing Options then Set Level 2 Language then the desired default language e Ina test only one condition can be written In the case of editing in LD there is only one coil without any variable attached The coil value corresponds to the value of the test e Ina test no pulse is permitted i e neither positive nor negative contacts can be used Related Topics Multi language Editor 252 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Multi language Editor The Multi language editor has editing functions for graphical and textual languages These editing functions are automatically launched when an FBD ST IL or LD program is opened from the Workbench The editor only allows new elements to be inserted if the current position is valid Use the mouse or cursor keys to move the current position around within the Workspace From the editor you can perform several tasks e Build the current Program code to check your Program and prepare the code for building the Resource code e Print programs e Launch the Dictionary Note Before creating new programs you need to close the Dictionary When printing programs the fonts used in the diagram are the same as for the editor The FBD and LD diagrams are scaled to fit the width of the printed page format portrait or landscape
433. tion Instruction List Programming language Set of the initial steps of an SFC Program which represents the context of the program when it is started Special Step SFC of an SFC Program which is activated when the program starts Value which has a variable when the Virtual Machine starts the execution of the resource The initial value of a variable can be the default value a value given by the user when the variable is defined or the value of the retain variable after the Virtual Machine has stopped Direction of a variable or a Device An input variable is connected to an input channel of an input Device Input argument of a function or a function block These parameters can only be read by function or function block A parameter is characterized by a type Copy of the internal data of a function block which persists from one call to the other This word is used by extension to say that a program calls a function block instance and not the function block itself Elementary operation of an IL program entered on one line of text Attribute of a variable which is not linked to an input or output device Such a variable is called an internal variable DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Internal Binding List T O Binding I O Channel I O Complex Device I O Simple Device I O Driver IO Variable IO Wiring ISaRSI ITA ITS The view displaying the resource links and internal variable bindings define
434. tions or function blocks come from different libraries warnings are generated at compilation and only the first definition is recognized e If one function or function block is defined in the project and the other from a library only the one defined in the project is recognized The other is ignored Furthermore when the same name is used for several types or several defined words having different definitions in a project and attached libraries an error is generated at compilation time However when a data type or defined word is defined several times with the same contents or definition a warning is reported but the project can be compiled DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 283 You specify a project s dependencies in the Add Remove Dependencies window This window is divided into the Dependencies list and the Information and Status areas The Dependencies list displays the full pathnames of all libraries used by the project The Information area shows the description of the library currently selected in the Dependencies list The Status area shows the status of the library Add Remove dependencies Information E Status Not connected Once a project s dependencies are set up you can access the functions and function blocks contained in the specified libraries from the Select Blocks dialog box available in the ST LD and FBD editors In this dialog box library items appear with the IFB or IFU types and the source l
435. tly To split the workspace 100 ae Variable Groups E outputs aR Programm e fa MainFlash start Flash if order comes from Al Flash do the sequence Functions Function blacks 3 Flash alternate sequen H E B Parameters B Vanable Groups Ea outputs E B Programm H E Tea MainFlash start Flask F e Drag and drop the handles to the required positions ae pi 22 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Zoom You can adjust the magnification factor 1 e zoom for the workspace Elements appear with more detail as the zoom level increases You can set the zoom from the Options toolbar or in the Layout editor You access the Layout editor by choosing Layout from the Options menu When editing SFC FC LD and FBD POUs you can also adjust the magnification factor for the language editor s workspace To adjust the zoom level 1 On the Options toolbar click the arrow of the magnification window u El 2 Choose a magnification factor from the list The workspace is displayed using the new magnification factor DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 23 Output Window The output window displays information resulting from builds of projects resources and programs It also displays Workbench run time errors When building a program the output window is automatically displayed The Output window is also available from the language editors You can copy to the clipboard the
436. to a Boolean symbol such as a contact or the Boolean output of a block By default a coil is inserted with a small Right Power Bar If a link is inserted from the right of a coil to a Right Power Bar this small Bar is removed Before linking to a Right Power Bar After linking to a Right Power Bar By default a direct coil is inserted To change the coil type select the coil and press the lt spacebar gt Repeatedly pressing the lt spacebar gt cycles between the all coil types Right Power Bar Coils may be connected on the right to a right power bar This is optional Ifa coil is not connected on the right a small right power bar is included For details about multiple connections see page 437 For details about basic LD contacts and coils see page 439 You can resize the height of a right power bar DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 271 Comment Fiz a Press this button on the Language toolbar then click in the Workspace to insert a comment Comments are free format text inserted anywhere in the FBD POU for documentation puposes only After entering text click elsewhere in the Workspace to validate the comment You can also resize comments 272 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Managing Elements Programming elements can be cut copied and pasted within a program or if more than one 1s open between different programs When an element is moved removed or added the chart is automati
437. to the current project and is either running on the rs configuration but with a different version or it is not running on the configuration but the code of the resource is available on the configuration 290 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Icon Description The resource belongs to the current project and is not running on the configuration and no code is available on the configuration The resource does not belong to the current project but is running on the mm configuration In this case a new empty resource appears with this icon in the link architecture and hardware architecture views of the project Resource icons also display the security state of a resource Text Information The state of the resource appears next to the resource icon before the resource s name in the title bar Resource State RUN STOP BREAK ERROR Description The resource is running real time mode You can switch the resource to cycle to cycle mode The resource is in cycle to cycle mode Possible operations are switch the resource to real time mode execute one cycle go to the next step only when step by step mode is instantiated The resource is in break point mode SFC POUs Possible operations are switch the resource to real time mode execute one cycle go to the next step only when step by step mode is instantiated The resource is in error Possible operations are switch the resource
438. tor 494 ABS function 522 ACOS function 523 addition operator 489 ASIN function 526 ATAN function 527 COS function 530 division operator 492 EXPT function 533 LOG function 540 MOD function 546 multiplication operator 488 NEG operator 512 POW function 554 RAND function 555 SIN function 565 SQRT function 566 subtraction operator 491 TAN function 569 TRUNC function 570 arrays basic or user types described 379 initializing elements in 150 ascending order sorting for Dictionary grid 138 ASCII function 525 ASIN function 526 assignment ST basic statement 459 ATAN function 527 attaching action blocks SFC steps 229 attributes variables 389 auto input of names variables or blocks 265 automatic instances of function blocks debugging 334 available programming languages for function blocks 99 for functions 98 for programs 96 AVERAGE function block 575 634 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual background colors customizing for views and editors 26 begin Flow Chart component 418 binary operations NOT MASK function 550 OR MASK function 553 ROL function 559 ROR function 560 SHL function 563 SHR function 564 XOR_ MASK function 571 bindings between variables described 67 error variables for 68 external between projects 81 external defining 88 internal defining 78 internal within a project 71 BLINK function block 577 blocks functions and function blocks in LD on the left inserting 262
439. trates cycle execution when a breakpoint on step de activation is encountered Breakpoint on Step deactivation Cycle samoles Run Break Resource mode 5a Po Actions 51 P1 5 R N The behaviors of setting a breakpoint on step activation is the same as step de activation These are both available to avoid setting multiple breakpoints as shown below Breakpoint on step deactivation rather than breakpoint on step activation ofall following steps Note On a given step you cannot set both a breakpoint on step activation and a breakpoint on step de activation To set a breakpoint on step deactivation You can set breakpoint commands from the Breakpoints toolbar or from the contextual menu gt Select the step then from the toolbar click DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 313 Breakpoint on Transition When a transition becomes clearable transition is valid 1 e all previous steps are active and its receptivity is true then breakpoint mode is set for the next cycle The current cycle goes on executing normally except that the transition is not cleared and therefore related tokens are not moved The following illustrates cycles execution when a breakpoint on transition is encountered Breakpoint on clearable transition Cycle samples Resource mode To set a breakpoint on a transition You can set breakpoint commands from the Breakpoints toolbar or from the contextual menu gt Select the tran
440. tring string containing 10 characters you would write MyString 10 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 391 Comments Comments may be freely inserted in literal languages such as ST and IL A comment must begin with the special characters and terminate with the characters Comments can be inserted anywhere in a ST program and can be written on more than one line Example counter ivalue assigns the main counter this is a comment expressed on two lines c counter you can put comments anywhere base value 1 Interleave comments cannot be used This means that the characters cannot be used within a comment Warning The IL language only accepts comments as the last component of an instruction line Defined Words The system allows the re definition of constant expressions true and false Boolean expressions keywords or complex ST expressions To achieve this an identifier name called a defined word has to be given to the corresponding expression Defined words have a Common Scope they can be used in any POU of any resource of the Project Example YES is TRUE PI is 3 14159 OK is auto mode AND NOT alarm When such an equivalence is defined its identifier can be used anywhere in an ST program to replace the attached expression This is an example of ST programming using defines 392 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual If OK Then angle PI 2 0 isdone
441. ttribute You instantiate variable bindings in the Variable binding grid of the Binding List window From variable To variable Type Network Iman _ leadstart Dfe start Boor Jere Iman Tmemex em 2 lead TmeProg mme ere Iman Flashstar _fep s Flash stae BOOL_JeTcr _ Iman Tmemex ED Fesh TmeProg TIME jere You define variable bindings in the Binding editor When defining a binding you need to indicate a producing variable and a consuming variable and the network used for communicating The producing variable serves as input for the binding Whereas the consuming variable serves as output You can choose to specify a default value to use in the event of a communication error You can also choose to specify a binding error variable producer error variables are not supported in DS800 x Binding from resource Main to resource Test Producing variable fan x Consuming variable AAA Type DINT Type DINT Direction INTERNAL Comment inputs of multiplication comes Alias Direction INTERNAL Comment Info m Info e Alias Consumption error behavior Network HSD Use last value issued from binding Use default value Binding parameters Default value m Binding error variables Consuming error variable Test from Main with HSD ConsEnFromR1 hd Cancel 78 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual The Producing Variable selection
442. twork on which you can connect the configuration and that can be used in Binding definition e the I O devices that you will be able to use in the I O Wiring Tool e the list of C functions and function blocks that you will be able to call in your programs Warning Changing the target of a configuration may lead to the destruction of the I O wiring of all resources within the configuration and connections to networks You should assign targets to configurations as a first step in your project development When the advanced options are installed you can choose whether to download the advanced options features such as alarms and events definitions trends definitions events server configuration and trends server configuration You can also choose to add a help file using the Help button DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 117 Target Access Control For configuration security you can control access to a target by setting a password This password is embedded on the target and can only be set or changed while running in real time or debug mode The configuration access control prevents the connection of all XL clients not having the target s password At run time the security state of a configuration is indicated by its title bar icon Configuration Security Icon State mm The configuration has no access control All IXL clients can access the target ALS The configuration is not accessible the target does not recognize the
443. ule_2PtH 2 Pt Pulse Input ED E EPMFCD ROC8OS SystemAlModule_5Pt 5 Pt SystemAl ChO Battery Chl Charge Ch2 Modu T EPMFCD ROCS0S ATD Module ani Ft Resistance eee Pulse Input 2 Point This Wiring is set in the I O Wiring View The parameters are Board number and Slot number Board number refers to which RAS device PI Module is being wired as more than 1 PI module may be used and the Slot number refers to the slot in the RAS device housing in which the PI module resides The I O module wiring in DS800 software is NOT self identifying as it is in ROCLINK 800 software Before wiring each I O module must be defined as a variable in the Dictionary View Variables Grid The Name should be A Analog D Discrete P Pulse MVS RTD SA System Analog or TC the direction should be I Input O Output or Internal for System AI The Attribute should be R read W write or Free 166 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual RTD Input 2 Point This Wiring is set in the I O Wiring View The parameters are Board number and Slot number Board number is always set to 1 and the Slot number refers to the slot in the RAS device housing in which the RTD module resides The I O module wiring in DS800 software is NOT self identifying as it is in ROCLINK 800 software Before wiring each variable must be defined in the Dictionary View Variables Grid Select the appropriate variable from the unwired variables list The
444. un time See Global Scope Common Scope Local scope Program function and function block sections are where are localized POU of a resource POUs located in the Program section are executed by the Virtual Machine The indication of the level of access control that is applied to a resource a POU or a target DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Glossary 627 Selection List Separator Sequential Server SFB SFC SFU Short Integer SINT Single Resource Mode SIT ST Standard IEC 61131 Types Statement 628 Also known as a combo box When a Selection List is provided for a particular cell clicking on its right part down arrow displays the available choices To make a selection perform one of the following operations click on the item use the scroll bar first if the required choice is not visible move in the list using the cursor keys and press Enter type the first letter 1f more than one item starts with this letter press the letter again to select the next occurance Special character or group of characters used to separate the identifiers in a literal language Attribute of a program A sequential program gives an order to operations of a process and conditions between operations Generally it is programmed with SFC or FC Part of the target that receives requests from XL to retrieve information about the resource run by the Virtual Machine Indicates a standard function block Sequentia
445. unction block A function has only one output parameter A parameter is characterized by a type Integer value which corresponds to the number of times the cycle time has been exceeded Always 0 if cycle time is 0 See Input Parameter Output Parameter OEM Parameter and Hidden Parameter It can be a Father Program or an FC program that call an FC Sub program Programmable Logic Controller Program Organization Unit set of instructions written in one of the following languages SFC FC IL ST FBD LD A POU can be a program a function or function block Main left and right vertical rails at the extremities of a ladder diagram A group holding outgoing producer variables for consumption in external bindings defined in another project See POU A program belongs to a resource It is executed by the Virtual Machine depending on its location order in the resource Set of configurations and links between their resources A program allowing to convert projects developed using previous versions for use within the latest version Each time you upgrade to a newer version you need to update projects PROPI is an interface enabling you to send commands directly to the Workbench via a custom application For instance you could use the PROPI interface when using the Workbench in the background SFC Action it is a list of statements executed only once when the corresponding Step SFC is activated Determines the way the act
446. urce For details on resource compilation options see page 55 POUs written in FC Flow Chart FBD LD ST IL and action blocks and conditions of SFC POUs are generated in C source code format The C source files must be compiled and linked to the target libraries in order to produce the final executable code For further information about recommended implementation techniques refer to the I O Development Toolkit User s Guide Note Some debugging features such as downloading the resource code online modification and breakpoints are not available when the resource is compiled using the C language DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 351 Project Tree View The Project Tree View displays the project structure and enables accessing most aspects of the currently opened project For instance you can access the link or hardware architecture views the internal binding list elements programs functions and function blocks defined for resources and I O wiring You can also access utilities such as the events viewer trends logger and driver monitor Project Tree View aes Fi Binding list G HM configs Se Main be A 1 0 wiring F _ MyProg61499 Ee mired a A Functions Pie ow Ay Function blocks Contextual menus enabling tasks such as locating and opening project elements are available by right clicking these elements To access the Project Tree View gt From the Window menu
447. urce identification properties of a resource include its name comments and a resource identification number The resource number is automatically assigned You can choose to change this number However when changing this number you need to assign a number that is unique within the project The resource number identifies the Virtual Machine that will run the resource code Comments appear in the resource s title bar next to its name You define resource identification properties on the General tab of the Resource Properties window Resource Properties i j X Network Extended Security General Target Code Settings Hame Waste Comment drives Slave Resource number 1 a Cancel Apply Compilation Options The compilation options of a resource define many aspects of a resource s run time and simulation options The target operating system on which the resource will run The generation of debug information The type of code to generate and compiler options The symbol table DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 55 e Embedded zip of the source files You can also choose the target type at the configuration level However changing the target for a configuration affects all resources attached to it For details on configuration properties see page 114 You specify a resource s compilation options on the Target Code tab of the Resources Properties window Resource Properties a x Network Ex
448. urces Stored element files do not retain information such as imported target definitions compilation output files driver definitions and protocols Each POU also has a second file holding the code and instructions POU_name stf The version control status of an element is indicated in the Workbench For a project the status is indicated in textual format in the title bar Up to date or Locally modified For a configuration or resource the status is displayed as an icon at the left hand corner of its title bar For a POU the status is applied directly to the POU icon Up to date The file is identical to the latest version in the source control database or to its retrieved version Locally modified The file differs from the latest version in the source control 9 database or from its retrieved version A modification at any level affects the upwards status of the project elements For instance when modifying a resource the status of the resource as well as the configuration and project to which it belongs become locally modified 360 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual When using version source control with your projects you can perform the following tasks e Performing a Check in of a Workbench Element e Viewing the History of Workbench Elements Results and errors for version source control operations are displayed in the output window To define a version source control repository You can choose to save version source
449. urces having access control password definitions are retained When editing a project resources making up the project are automatically locked by you except for those resources where another user set password protection or that are currently in use by another user in the single resource editing mode To set access control for a resource You set access control for a resource in its properties Security tab Resource Properties i X General Target Code Settings Network Extended Security Password F Use Project Paseword Confirm Mew T Read Only Locked By Administrator 1 Specify a password To use an unique password in the New field enter a password then reenter it in the Confirm New field To use the same password as set for the project check Use Project Password 2 To enable all users to access the resource in read only mode check Read Only DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 65 To unlock a resource When entering a password while in debug mode or performing a build the resource is only unlocked after stopping the debug mode or when the build is completed 1 Right click the resource s title bar then from the contextual menu choose Enter Password 2 Inthe Security dialog box enter the password for the resource Password Cancel The resource is unlocked Resource Description You can include a free format text description for a resource To edit the resour
450. urrent result is not modified by this operation Allowed none modifiers Operand output or internal Boolean Variable Example RESETex LD true current result TRUE R boo varl boo vari FALSE t current result is not modified ST boo var2 current result is not modified LD false current result FALSE R boo varl nothing done boo vari unchanged DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 479 JMP Operator Operation Allowed modifiers Operand Example jumps to the specified label CN label defined in the same IL program the following example tests the value of an integer selector 0 or 1 or 2 to set one from 3 output Booleans Test is equal to 0 is made with the JMPC operator JMPex testi test2 JMPend 480 LD ANY TO BOOL JMPC LD ST JMP LD SUB ANY TO BOOL JMPC LD ST JMP LD ST selector testi true bod JMPend test2 true bol JMPend true bo2 selector is 0 or 1 or 2 conversion to Boolean x if selector 0 then bodO true end of the program selector decrease selector is now o0 or 1 conversion to Boolean if selector 0 then bol true end of the program last possibility bo2 true end of the IL program DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual RET Operator Function the current result is retu
451. us stat BOOL TRUE error FALSE no error Description This function is intended as an aid for debugging your DS800 application Returns TRUE if an error has been encountered with any of the TLP GET xxx functions Errors occur if the TLP does not exist or if the TLP references a data type that is incompatable with the return type of the function The error remains set until DBG_ CLR GET ERR is called DBG_SET_ERR DBG_SET_ERR Stat Warning This function block is available only on ROC800 Series devices Arguments status stat BOOL TRUE error FALSE no error Description This function is intended as an aid for debugging your DS800 application Returns TRUE if an error has been encountered with any of the TLP_ SET xxx functions Errors occur if the TLP does not exist or if the TLP references a data type that is incompatable with the data type of the value it is being set to The error remains set until DBG_CLR_ SET ERR is called 586 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual DERIVATE derivate Arguments RUN BOOL Mode TRUE normal FALSE reset XIN REAL Input any real value CYCLE TIME Sampling period Possible values range from Oms to 23h59m59s999ms XOUT REAL Differentiated output Description Differentiation of a real value If the CYCLE parameter value is less than the cycle timing of the execution of the resource in the target the sampling period is forced to this cycle timing Example FBD Pro
452. variable is assigned with the activity of a Step SFC SFC POU Mark placed by the user at debug time on an SFC Step SFC or Transition The Target system stops when an SFC token is moved on a breakpoint Step by step mode For ST and IL POUs you set breakpoints to specific lines of code For LD POUs you set breakpoints to rungs When running an application in Debug mode the application stops when it encounters a breakpoint Function written with the C language called from POUs in a synchronous manner High level literal language used to access particularities of the target system C language can be used to program C functions function blocks and conversion functions Information which tracks stepping between POUs and called functions Debug information includes call stack You can only generate debug information for resources producing TIC code Elementary area of the graphic matrix for graphic languages such as SFC FBD or LD or for the Dictionary Grid View Indicates a C function block Indicates a C function DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Channel Check In Child Clearing a Transition CMG Coil Common Scope Complex Equipment Condition Configuration Configuration Manager Connection DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Glossary A channel of a device represents a hardware I O point It can be an input or an output A variable is generally connected to a channel in order to be used in P
453. variables you should create the following defined words in the dictionary of your Project A value of 0 in the error variable indicates no error ETCP KVB ERR BINDING IN PROCESS ETCP KVB ERR NO PRODUCER ETCP KVB ERR BAD CRC Obsolete error value ETCP KVB ERR DATA DIFFUSSION ETCP KVB ERR TIMEOUT ETCP KVB ERR IMPOSSIBLE TO BIND 1 The binding initialization process is on its way The remote producer is not currently runnin g This error happens only for consumer resources Producer and consumer have different CRC The producer has been stopped This error happens only for consumer resources Error during diffusion process ETCP server does not answer quickly enough TimeOut This error happens only for consumer resources Impossible to bind 70 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Internal Bindings Internal variable bindings are bindings between variables of resources belonging to the same project Before creating internal bindings for variables you need to link the resources holding them using data links You manage resource data links and internal variable bindings in the Bindings List window You can also manage resource links directly from the link architecture view The Bindings window displays the resource links and internal variable bindings defined for a project The window is divided into three parts e The Resource binding grid e The Variable binding grid e The Binding List window
454. vices 172 opening I O devices in 170 overview of 155 parameters component for 90 setting the real or virtual attribute devices 171 tool working with the 160 toolbar main environment 20 tree view described 157 wiring channels of devices 172 I Os simulating a panel of 320 identification configuration properties for 115 defining for resources 55 identifiers inserting in POUs 201 using defined words as 392 IF THEN ELSE ELSIF END_IF ST basic statements 461 IF THEN ELSE structures inserting FC elements 241 IL Instruction List operator for 482 calling function blocks from CAL operator 485 calling functions from 483 delayed operations described 475 go to line for POUs 279 JMP operator for 480 labels described 474 LD operator for 477 operator modifiers described 474 R operator for 479 RET operator for 481 S operator for 478 ST operator for 478 summary of operators 476 syntax of programs in 473 toolbar language editor 193 working with POUs multi language editor 260 importing variables data 93 Workbench elements between projects 43 initial steps SFC elements described 396 steps SFC elements inserting 215 values for variables 150 initializing array elements 150 structure fields 150 INSERT function 536 inserting actions FC elements 240 blocks on the left LD elements 262 blocks on the right LD elements 262 coils LD elements for FBD POUs 271 coils LD elements 262 comments FBD elements 272
455. vices belonging to items in a project s structure 1 e resources configurations and projects 1 From the browser double click an item in the structure You can also drag and drop items into the Simulator s workspace 2 To close I O device windows on the individual windows title bars click the Close Window button To force the value of an input device channel You can force i e change the value of BOOL numeric type and STRING input device channels For BOOL input devices forcing the value means changing a TRUE value to FALSE and a FALSE value to TRUE For numeric type SINT USINT BYTE INT UINT WORD DINT UDINT DWORD LINT ULINT LWORD REAL LREAL TIME DATE or STRING input devices this means entering a new value A value cell is any cell in the value column of an I O device window 1 Double click the value cell of the required input device channel 2 For numeric type and STRING input devices press Enter DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 321 Appearance The Simulator is the environment where you can simulate a panel of I Os Its window is divided into two parts a browser and a workspace menu bar 1 0 Panel Simulation PROJECTS Joj x tool bar File wiew Options Help a al a a al ial al a 7 workspace browser i PROJECTS EM CONFIG ES main NN USERPANEL AO SimOueString FW CONFIG EM Leap FE O SimQutBoo H A CONFIG FLASH ff 0 Sim QutBoo status bar
456. vironment 15 starting events logger for run time system events 175 execution of resources 297 status bar displaying and hiding 25 information displaying for resources 290 of elements for version control 359 step by step mode executing resources in 299 locating current step of 302 removing breakpoints for 301 setting breakpoints for 301 stepping in POUs for 302 STEPPING resource state 291 STEPPING ERROR resource state 291 655 steps SFC elements actions within described 404 attaching action blocks to 229 described 396 inserting 216 STOP resource state 291 stopping builds of projects resources and POUs 348 execution of resources 297 storage location of projects 29 string constant expressions 383 variables 391 string manipulation ASCII function 525 CHAR function 528 DELETE function 532 FIND function 534 INSERT function 536 LEFT function 537 MID function 542 MLEN function 544 REPLACE function 556 RIGHT function 558 structures basic or user types described 380 initializing fields of 150 sub programs Flow Chart described 422 inserting 245 SUB DATE DATE function 567 subtraction operator 491 switching to the Dictionary view 125 to the hardware architecture view 109 to the link architecture view 48 symbols downloading complete or reduced table of 55 generating monitoring information for 107 syntax of IL programs 473 of ST programs 453 verification rules for Flow Chart 426 system accessing variables for 30
457. where you simulate the running of the project The Configuration manager and a virtual machine for each resource is launched The Simulate I Os Panel is displayed While in debug or simulation mode for FBD and LD programs and function blocks you can choose to graphically monitor the block operator function or function block output values You can temporarily resize variables to enable viewing their output values Resized variables return to their original size upon quitting debug or simulation mode DGE 45 Resource45 SIMULATION read only a Ioj xj File Edit Tools Debug Options Window Help lej x T 000 P Bi 2441 6 OO H F 8 x m ee ee 4 e Output values of boolean type are displayed using color The output value color continues to the next input The default colors are red when True and blue when False You can customize the colors used for the boolean items e Output values of SINT USINT BYTE INT UINT WORD DINT UDINT DWORD LINT ULINT LWORD REAL LREAL TIME DATE and STRING type are displayed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 295 as a numeric or textual value in a label directly above the output When the output is a structure type the displayed value is the selected member When the output value is unavailable the text is displayed in the output label To enable the graphic display of output values you need to generate the symbols monitoring information f
458. without ELSE If overflow THEN alarm_level true END IF CASE Statement Name CASE OF ELSE END CASE Meaning executes one of several lists of ST statements selection is made according to an integer expression Syntax CASE lt integer_expression gt OF lt value gt lt statements gt lt value gt lt value gt lt statements gt ELSE lt statements gt END CASE Case values must be integer constant expressions Several values separated by commas can lead to the same list of statements The ELSE statement is optional Example ST program using CASE statement CASE error code OF 255 err msg Division by zero fatal error TRUE l1 err msg Overflow 2y 32 err msg Bad sign ELSE err msg Unknown error END CASE 462 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual WHILE Statement Name WHILE DO END WHILE Meaning iteration structure for a group of ST statements the continue condition is evaluated BEFORE any iteration Syntax WHILE lt Boolean_expression gt DO lt statement gt lt statement gt END WHILE Warning Since the virtual machine is a synchronous system input variables are not refreshed during WHILE iterations The change of state of an input variable cannot be used to describe the condition of a WHILE statement Example ST program using WHILE statement this program uses specific C functions to read charac
459. written in SFC ST LD or FBD or C Functions and C Function Blocks can be directly called from an SFC action block based on the syntax of the language used in the action block Detailed syntax can be found in the corresponding language section Example SFC program with a Function call in an Action Block Qualifier Action name ST Code with Function Call CallFuric InitOk DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Language Reference 409 Conditions Attached to Transitions At each Transition a Boolean expression is attached that conditions the clearing of the Transition The condition is usually expressed with ST or LD language This is the Level 2 of the Transition Ways to program a condition e Conditions programmed in ST or LD e Calling Function from a Transition Warning When no expression is attached to the Transition the default condition is TRUE Condition Programmed in ST The Structured Text ST language can be used to describe the condition attached to a Transition The complete expression must have Boolean type and may be terminated by a semi colon according to the following syntax lt boolean_expression gt The expression may be a TRUE or FALSE constant expression a single input or an internal Boolean Variable or a combination of Variables that leads to a Boolean value Example SFC Program with ST programming for Transitions Condition name RuntotError ST Code Run 4nd Mot
460. ws you to select the desired conversion for the channel 158 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual I O Wiring Grid View The Grid view displays a read only list of the available non wired variables of the resource that match the type and direction of the device selected in the Tree View Unwired variables StartProduction PSTA User order to start StopProduction PSTO User order to stop Heatllk HOF Mo eror on temperature Fressure0k FOF Mo eror in pressure SpeedOk SOF No eror in speed DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 159 Working with the I O Wiring Tool When defining the I O Wiring the first time the Tree and Grid views are empty After an I O device is added the Grid view lists all the variables of the current resource that correspond to the device type and direction Example all Boolean inputs for an I O device BOOL Input The I O devices correspond to I O modules in the RAS device unit e Analog Input e Analog Output e Discrete Input e Discrete Output e MVS Input e Pulse Input e RTD Input e System Analog Input e Thermocouple Input 160 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual lt A DS800 Development Suite testdoc 1 0 Wiring 2 Resourcez File Edit Options Window Help ao 5 pl oA A FHS pb O ES Be EE 0 EPMFCD ROCSOS MY SModule Wultitarnable Sensor CHO DP Chl 5F Ch2 TMP El mo 1 EPMFCD ROC8O9 DOModule_5Pti 5 Pt Discrete Output H
461. xtual menu accessed by right clicking the structure To delete a structure 1 Select the structure in the tree 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete Structure Defined Words Tree There is no Tree for defined words these are entered in the grid Defined words have a Common Scope they can be used in any POU of any resource For information on the Defined Words grid see page 145 130 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Working with the Grids Grids display characteristics and values for components corresponding to the selected Tree View You create manipulate and make changes for variables functions and function block parameters user types and defined words directly in the grids The grid is a table formatted database You can use one of two editing modes while working in the grids e Grid where you can access individual cells In this mode a grid outlines individual cells Alias Type Init value fd eoo e Line where you can access complete rows 1 e lines The information contained in the line appears in a dialog box where you can change it In this mode no grid appears Mame Alias Type i Init value din BOOL Keyboard shortcuts enable navigating throughout the grid The behavior of the shortcuts differs depending on the editing mode of the grid Shortcut Grid Mode Line Mode Tab Moves from one grid cell to the next Moves from one line to the next from from left to right When editing the t
462. y List Show Project Contents Show Output Window Ctrl 4 Clear Output Window Contents Fl Search Help On About Support Info sets the different views of the project to appear in a cascading manner sets the different views of the project to appear in a tiled manner accesses the Spy List window where you specify variables whose values are displayed while in test mode displays the project structure and enables accessing aspects of the currently opened project displays the output window below the workspace clears the contents of the output window accesses the online help not currently supported displays product and version information not currently supported Note When no projects are open only the File and Help menus are visible Using the Menus 1 Open a menu by clicking on it or by pressing Alt plus the letter that is underlined in the menu s title For example to open the File Menu you press Alt F shown in this User s Guide as ALT F 2 Choose a menu selection by clicking on it by pressing its underlined letter or by using the cursor keys to highlight it and then pressing Enter Menu selections that appear in grey are not currently available 12 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Control Icon When a project is open and not displayed in Cascade or Tile mode the menu bar has a Control Icon on the left This icon indicates the current view Control Menu Clicking on
463. y other long integer value any other unsigned long integer value any other long word value any other float value not double Scientific format 1 2E 10 can be entered any other float value Scientific format 1 2E 10 can be entered any other timer value using the following syntax t WhXm YsZms or t Z 0 lt W number of hours 0 lt X number of minutes 0 lt Y number of seconds 0 lt Z number of milliseconds Note The h m s and ms fields are optional If t 100 is entered it corresponds to t 100ms DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual DATE d 1970 01 01 any other date value ranging from 1970 01 01 to 2038 01 18 using the following syntax di yyyy mm dd STRING empty any set of characters contained within single quotes for example hello Array initialization OorFALSE you need to initialize each element of an array Structure initialization 0 or FALSE you need to initialize each field in a structure When initializing the values of elements for arrays or structures the total number of characters including commas automatically inserted to separate the initial values defined for each element cannot exceed 482 In the Dictionary window the Initial Value field at the root of the array or structure displays this cumulation All variables Init value Dimensi 2 d 4 5 1075 45 1 75 25 86 52 5000 1 25 L Elffemperatue Temperataely Temperature E Temperature Temperatur
464. y that parameter e From the dictionary view double click the variable s corresponding cell in the Locked column then in the dialog click Lock DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 305 e From the LD or FBD editors double click the variable then in the dialog click Lock To unlock variables e From the dictionary view double click the variable s corresponding cell in the Locked column then in the dialog click Unlock e Inthe LD or FBD editors double click the variable then in the dialog click Unlock You can also unlock variables from the Diagnosis window To force the values of variables e From the dictionary view double click the variable s corresponding cell in the Logical column then in the dialog enter a value and click Write e From the LD and FBD editors double click the variable then in the dialog enter a value and click Write 306 DS800 Development Suite 2 1 User Manual Diagnosis You can access diagnostic information for individual resources while running an application in simulation mode This information is divided into five categories e Timing e System Variables e Locked Variables e Breakpoints e Version Information For details on run time settings for resources see page 59 To access diagnostic information for a resource 1 While the application runs in simulation mode select a resource for which to obtain diagnostic information 2 From the Debug menu choose Diagno
465. ycle time of a resource You can also set the cycle time before building the code for the resource in the run time settings for the resource To view the current value of the resource cycle time from the Debug menu choose Diagnosis To change the Cycle Time of the resource 1 Select the resource 2 From the Debug Menu choose Change Cycle Timing DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 303 Write Lock Unlock While in debug or simulation mode you can view the values and lock status of variables from within the dictionary view LD editor and FBD editor In the dictionary view the Locked column indicates whether a variable is locked You can also choose to display all variables locked variables or unlocked variables ww D5800 Project1 demo project Dictionary ariables ei ESE File Edit Debug Tools Options Window Help lej x c A E E d EB Pa le ved All variables Locked vaiabled Unlocked variables All variables Mens Ses led let Daneel Dee vat No INT o waa a a a a INTC wae No E a L Poer o n o om O mek No L S T on o ae e oe o ase O eo oa o ae OO eo Crea o o J om e L a E Variables e Main Config1 e Any al a Admin Administrator O NUM E In the LD and FBD editors the symbol displayed at the left of a variable name indicates a locked variable You lock and unlock variables and force the values of variables from the dictionary v
466. you can choose to display all internal variable comments then hide the comment for a specific internal variable You can also choose to hide all I O variable comments then display the comment for a specific I O variable The display hide setting for individual comments overrides the display hide setting at the editor level for either I O variable or internal variable comments To display hide comments defined for I O variables You display or hide all comments defined for I O variables at the editor level from the main menu gt To display comments for I O variables from the Options menu choose Show I O Variable Comments gt To hide comments for I O variables from the Options menu choose Hide I O Variable Comments To display hide comments defined for internal variables You display or hide all comments defined for internal variables at the editor level from the main menu gt To display comments for internal variables from the Options menu choose Show Internal Variable Comments gt To hide comments for internal variables from the Options menu choose Hide Internal Variable Comments DS800 Development Suite 2 1 Workbench 279 To display hide individual comments defined for variables You display or hide individual comments defined for I O variables and internal variables at the comment level from a contextual menu You can also reset individual variable comments to use the display hide setting defined for a given typ

DS800 Development Suite Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents